762CNA SINGLE STATION MICRO Controller - Eck

Instruction
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA
SINGLE STATION MICRO
Controller
®
Foxboro, EXACT, I/A Series, and SINGLE STATION MICRO are registered trademarks of The
Foxboro Company.
The Intelligent Automation People is a registered service mark of The Foxboro Company.
Copyright 1996-1998 by The Foxboro Company
All rights reserved
ii
762CNA Controller
MI 018-885 February 1998
Contents
Figures
vii
Tables
ix
Preface
xiii
Safety Considerations · xiii
Organization · xiii
Intended Audience · xiii
How to Use This Manual · xiv
User Feedback · xv
1 Quick Check
1
Seating the NOVRAM · 2
Connecting to Power Source · 3
Controller Display · 4
Changing the Display · 6
Reading Additional Information · 7
Reading Additional Information (cont.) · 8
Looking for More Information? · 8
2 Product Overview
11
Description · 12
Functional Block Diagram · 13
Front Panel · 18
Display Functions · 18
Display Functions (cont.) · 19
Keypad Functions · 19
Signal Wiring Guidelines · 30
Connecting Wires to Terminals · 30
Connecting Wires to Terminals (cont.) · 31
Wiring to Controller · 31
Input Signal Wiring · 32
Input Signal Terminal/Wire Designations · 32
Analog Input Signal Wiring · 33
Frequency Input Signal Wiring · 34
Pulse Input Wiring · 36
RTD and Contact Input Wiring · 37
Output Signal Wiring · 38
Output Signal Terminal/Wire Designations · 38
Output Signal Wiring Examples · 38
Serial Communication Wiring · 39
Terminal/Wire Designations · 39
Wiring to an RS-485 Interface · 39
Power Wiring · 40
Accessory Equipment · 41
Optional Surge Suppressor · 41
Optional Surge Suppressor (cont.) · 42
RS-232/RS-485 Converter · 42
Wiring · 43
OPTO-22 Board Model AC24 Converter Card
· 45
4 Configuration
3 Installation
23
Important Safety Precautions · 24
Shock Hazards · 24
Explosion Hazards · 24
Unpacking · 24
Controller Identification · 25
Positioning Links · 26
Installation Procedure · 27
Removing Input Range Resistors · 29
Removing Input Range Resistors (cont.) · 30
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CSA Controller - Contents
49
Introduction · 50
Planning Your Configuration · 50
Planning Your Configuration (cont.) · 51
Implementing Your Configuration · 54
Implementing Your Configuration (cont.) · 55
Implementing Your Configuration (cont.) · 56
Common Configuration Functions · 58
Security · 58
Control Type and Tuning · 58
Control Type and Tuning (cont.) · 59
iii
Input Signals · 59
Input Signals (cont.) · 60
Input Signal Conditioning and Scaling · 60
Output Signals · 62
Display Features · 62
Auto/Manual Control (A/M) · 63
Alarms · 64
General Information · 64
Forms of Alarms · 65
Types of Alarms · 66
Alarm Action · 70
Configuring, Tuning, and Displaying Alarms
· 70
Configuring, Tuning, and Displaying Alarms
(cont.) · 71
Alarm Configuration Examples · 71
Alternate Station Configurations · 76
Dual Controller · 76
Cascade Controller · 76
Auto Selector Controller · 78
Auto/Manual Station · 79
Indicator Station · 79
Additional Configuration Functions · 80
Logic Gates · 81
Calculations · 82
Calculations (cont.) · 83
Dynamic Compensation · 86
Dynamic Compensation (cont.) · 87
Totalizers · 89
Totalizers (cont.) · 90
Set Point · 91
Set Point (cont.) · 92
Set Point Limits · 93
Ratio Control · 93
Output Summing and Multiplying · 94
Output Tracking · 94
Split Range Output · 94
Split Range Output (cont.) · 97
Output Limits · 98
Output Action · 99
Output Upon Restart (STARTUP) · 99
Output Reverse · 99
Output Bargraph · 99
Characterizers · 100
Nonlinear Control · 100
pH Display · 100
Serial Communications · 101
iv
Toggle · 102
Batch Control · 103
Integral Feedback · 103
Rate of Change Alarms · 104
Configuration Copy Accessory · 105
5 Operation
109
Functions · 110
Block Diagram · 110
Controls and Indicators · 113
Keypad · 115
Structure Diagrams · 115
Modes of Operation · 116
SET OPTUNE · 116
NORMAL Mode Operation · 117
Entering a Passcode · 117
Reading Values of Variables · 118
Changing the Control Status · 121
Changing Set Point, Output, and Variables · 121
Changing Set Point, Output, and Variables
(cont.) · 122
Changing Set Point, Output, and Variables
(cont.) · 123
Displaying/Acknowledging Alarms · 123
Changing Alarm Settings · 126
Enabling/Disabling EXACT Tuning · 127
Switching Faceplate Displays · 127
Switching Modes · 127
Operation as an Auto/Manual Station · 128
Operation as a 3-Variable Indicator Station · 129
Operation as an Auto-Selector Station · 130
Operation as a Cascade Control Station · 130
Totalizer Operation · 131
READ Mode Operation · 132
6 EXACT Tuning
135
Technical Description · 136
Benefits of EXACT Tuning · 136
EXACT Steps · 136
EXACT Steps (cont.) · 137
Determining Process Response (Pattern
Recognition) · 137
Determining Process Response (cont.) · 138
Calculating PID Values (STUN Algorithm)
· 138
Calculating Initial Parameters (PTUN
Algorithm) · 140
User-adjustable Parameters · 141
762CNA Controller - Contents
MI 018-885
February 1998
Using EXACT Tuning with 762C Controllers · 144
Use of Structure Diagrams · 144
Keys Used with EXACT · 145
Responding to a ? Prompt · 145
Configuring EXACT · 147
Status Messages · 147
Status Messages (cont.) · 148
Messages — Read EXACT Pretune · 148
Messages — Read EXACT Self-tune · 148
Messages — Read EXACT Entries · 149
Tutorial Example · 150
Tutorial Example (cont.) · 152
Tutorial Example (cont.) · 153
Tutorial Example (cont.) · 154
EXACT Parameter Tables · 155
Parameter Limits and Values · 156
7 Calibration, Troubleshooting,
Maintenance
159
Calibration · 160
Frequency of Calibration · 160
Calibration Equipment Accuracy · 160
Calibration Connections · 160
Calibration Procedures · 160
Controller Range Conversion · 166
Output 2 Selection · 172
Troubleshooting · 173
Maintenance · 176
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CSA Controller - Contents
General Information · 176
Removal and Replacement of Parts · 176
Appendix A - Specifications
183
Functional Specifications · 183
Physical Specifications · 186
Operating and Storage Conditions · 187
Electrical Safety Specifications · 187
Performance Specifications · 188
Optional Features and Accessories · 189
Appendix B - Configuration Worksheets
193
Factory Preconfiguration Diagrams · 211
Appendix C - Structure
Diagrams
237
Structure Diagram 1 – READ · 239
Structure Diagrams 2 and 3 · 240
Structure Diagram 8 · 243
Appendix D - Parts List
247
762CNA SINGLE STATION MICRO Controller
with Integral Power Supply
Style AA*, DIN Panel Mounted · 247
Model Code · 247
Dimensional Print 255
Appendix F - Functional Diagram
261
Glossary
267
Index
287
v
vi
762CNA Controller - Contents
MI 018-885
February 1998
Figures
Rear Support for Controller................................ 2
Seating the NOVRAM ....................................... 3
Connecting to Power Source .............................. 4
Controller Display .............................................. 5
Operator Keypad ................................................ 6
Model 762CNA Controller .............................. 12
Block Diagram of a 762CNA Control Station. 13
Panel Display (Faceplate 1 or 2) ....................... 18
Keypad ............................................................. 19
Typical Data Plate ............................................ 25
Link Locations.................................................. 26
Removing Controller from Housing................. 27
Mounting of Controller.................................... 28
Rear Support for Controller.............................. 28
Removing Input Range Resistors ...................... 29
Connecting Wires to Terminals........................ 30
Terminal Identification..................................... 31
Examples of Analog Input Signal Wiring .......... 33
Examples of Frequency Input Signal Wiring
for E83 Vortex Flowmeter ............................ 34
Examples of Frequency Input Signals from 81 or 82
Turbine Flowmeter with PA108, PA109,
or A2020LA Preamplifier.............................. 35
Examples of Frequency Input Signals from 81
or 82 Turbine Flowmeter with
PA-106A Preamplifier................................... 35
Examples of Frequency Input Signals from
Self-Powered Flow Transmitter and Positive
Displacement Meters .................................... 36
Examples of Pulse Input Wiring for Remote Set
Points ........................................................... 36
Examples of RTD and Contact Input
Signal Wiring ............................................... 37
Examples of Output Signal Wiring of Controller 38
Serial Communications Wiring of Controller ... 39
Power Wiring to Controller.............................. 40
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CSA Controller - Figures
Installation of Optional Surge Suppressor ......... 41
F6501A RS-232 to RS-485 Converter
Signal Wiring................................................ 44
Cable Connections to 9-Pin Male RS-485
Connector..................................................... 45
Keypad.............................................................. 54
Example Showing Use of Configuration Keys ... 56
Input Signal Conditioning and Scaling ............. 61
High/Low Absolute Alarm ................................ 67
High/Low Deviation Alarm .............................. 67
High/High Absolute Alarm............................... 68
High/High Deviation Alarm ............................. 68
Low/Low Absolute Alarm ................................ 69
Low/Low Deviation Alarm................................ 69
Single Cascade Controller Example................... 77
Typical Auto Selector Control Application ....... 78
Dynamic Compensation ................................... 87
Nonimpulse Mode ............................................ 87
Impulse Mode................................................... 88
Follow Switches ................................................ 89
Totalizer............................................................ 89
Ratio ................................................................. 93
Output Modification and Tracking................... 94
Split Range Application .................................... 95
Split Range Diagrams........................................ 96
Effect of Shifting Split Point ............................. 97
Effect of Deadband ........................................... 98
TOGGLE Feature........................................... 103
Configuration Copy Accessory ........................ 106
Block Diagram of a 762CNA Control Station 110
Panel Display (Faceplate 1 or 2)...................... 113
Keypad............................................................ 115
Faceplate Displays When Configured for
Local Set Point and Totalizer ...................... 119
vii
Faceplate Displays When Configured for
Workstation/Panel and Local/Remote
Set Point and Totalizer...............................
Alarm Displays, High Alarm on Absolute
Measurement (Level 1, Latched).................
Flow Diagram for Enabling/Disabling
EXACT Tuning .........................................
3-Variable Indicator Station (Faceplate 1 or 2)
Reading the Value of Totalizer Preset .............
Structure Diagram for READ
Mode Functions .........................................
Pattern Recognition Characteristics ................
STUN Algorithm State Diagram....................
Typical Process Response to Step Change in
Controller Output......................................
Pretune States................................................
Maximum Wait Time (WMAX) ....................
Period of Oscillation (T) ................................
Damping and Overshoot................................
Structure Diagram for EXACT ......................
General Flow Diagram for
Configuring EXACT..................................
viii
120
125
127
129
131
132
137
138
140
141
142
143
143
146
Structure Diagram 1 .......................................
Structure Diagram 2 .......................................
Terminal Connections for External Current
or Voltage Inputs ........................................
Terminal Connections for RTD Input
Calibration..................................................
Terminal Connections for Output Calibration
Location of Input Range Resistors...................
Addition of Input Range Resistors ..................
RTD Printed Wiring Assembly .......................
Output 2 Jumper Location .............................
Location of Diagnostic Jumper........................
Controller Assembly Diagram .........................
Definition of Worksheet Contents .................
DIN Panel-Mounted Controller Assembly .....
Base Assembly ................................................
Electronics Module Assembly - Digital PWA .
762CNA SINGLE STATION MICRO
Controller ......................................................
Panel Cutout Dimensions ..............................
151
762CNA Controller - Figures
MI 018-885
February 1998
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
172
174
177
194
248
250
251
256
257
Tables
Keypad Functions.............................................. 7
Link Locations................................................. 26
Terminal and Wire designations for Input signal
Wiring......................................................... 32
Output Signal Terminal and Wire Designations 38
Serial Communications Terminal/Wire
Designations................................................ 39
RS-232/RS-485 Converter Specifications ........ 42
RS-485 Terminal Connections on
RS-232/485 Converter ................................ 43
Content of Configuration Worksheet .............. 50
Signal Distribution List ................................... 52
Gate Input List ................................................ 53
Keypad ............................................................ 54
List of Characters............................................. 57
Control Parameter Limits ................................ 58
Alarm Configurations ...................................... 64
High/Low alarms............................................. 67
High/High Alarms........................................... 68
Low/Low Alarms ............................................. 69
Alarm Actions.................................................. 70
Configuring Logic Gates.................................. 81
Characters for Use in Calculations................... 82
Configuration of Serial Communication
Parameters ................................................. 101
Effect of ∆/∇ Keys with R/L Not Configured. 121
Operation of Remote/Local Controller
with Totalizer ............................................ 122
Operation of Ratio Controller with Totalizer 123
Keys Used with EXACT ................................ 145
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CSA Controller - Tables
RD EXACT PTUNE.....................................
RD EXACT STUN .......................................
Messages – RD EXACT ENT........................
EXACT Parameters........................................
EXACT Parameter Limits and Values ............
RTD Span Jumper Positions..........................
RTD Zero Elevation Jumper Positions...........
RTD Temperature Difference Jumper
Positions ....................................................
Output 2 Jumper Positions ............................
Diagnostics ....................................................
Contact Input and Output Terminals ............
Fuses ..............................................................
Functional Specifications — Standard Product
Physical Specifications – Standard Product ....
Operating and Storage Conditions.................
Electrical Classification ..................................
Optional Features and Accessories..................
Signal Distribution List..................................
Gate Input List...............................................
List of Characters ...........................................
Characterization Curve Planning Table..........
Configuration Worksheets .............................
DIN Panel Mounted Controller
Assembly (Figure D-1) ...............................
Base Assembly (Figure D-1) ...........................
Digital PWA Portion of Electronics Module
Assembly (Figure D-3) ...............................
Recommended Spare Parts Summary .............
148
148
149
155
156
168
168
169
172
175
175
178
183
186
187
187
189
195
195
196
196
197
249
250
251
251
ix
x
762CNA Controller - Tables
MI 018-885
February 1998
762C SINGLE
STATION
MICRO
Controller
February 1998
Ð
Preface
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Appendix A
Appendix B
Appendix C
Appendix D
Appendix E
Appendix F
Glossary
Index
• xiii
Quick Check • 1
Product Overview • 11
Installation • 23
Configuration • 49
Operation • 109
EXACT Tuning • 135
Calibration, Troubleshooting,
Maintenance • 159
Specifications • 183
Configuration Worksheets • 193
Structure Diagrams • 237
Parts List • 247
Dimensional Print • 255
Functional Diagram • 261
• 267
• 287
The Intelligent Automation People
xii
762CNA Controller
MI 018-885 February 1998
Preface
Safety Considerations
Foxboro products are designed and manufactured to minimize the risk of
damage and injury to property and personnel. They meet or exceed applicable governmental and industry safety design standards. However, their safe
use depends on proper installation, operation, and maintenance by you, the
user. This manual provides you with the information needed for this. Please
pay close attention to the portions of this manual that relate to safety.
Organization
This manual is designed to present in a single document all information
about the 762C Controller needed by installers, process engineers, operators, and maintenance personnel. A parts list is included in Appendix D and
a dimensional print is included in Appendix E. The only additional document that may be needed for some installations is MI 018-888, Serial Communications Guide for 762C and 743CB Controllers, a reference intended
primarily for programmers and software engineers.
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following types of readers:
•
•
•
•
•
•
MI 018-885
Process Operators
Process Engineers
Process Supervisors
Maintenance Personnel
Equipment Installers
Programmers/Software Engineers
February 1998
762CNA Controller -
Preface
xiii
How to Use This Manual
Process Operators
If you are interested in operating information, first read Chapter 2 – Product Overview, and then read Chapter 5 – Operation. If you need more
information, read the Appendix references given in Chapter 5.
Process Engineers
If you are interested in configuration details, first read Chapter 2 – Product
Overview for general information about the product. You may also want to
look at Appendix A for detailed specification and agency certification data.
To learn how to configure the unit, read Chapter 4 – Configuration. To
make use of the information in Chapter 4, you should also become familiar
with the configuration worksheets in Appendix B and the structure diagrams in Appendix C. You will find the structure diagrams to be the most
important tool in configuring your controller.
For detailed information on the EXACT control feature, read Chapter 6 –
EXACT Tuning.
For operating information, read Chapter 5 – Operation.
For detailed instructions on programming serial communication functions
in a host, refer to MI 018-888, Serial Communications Guide for 762C and
743CB Controllers.
Process Supervisors
Use the same guidelines as those given for process engineers.
Maintenance Personnel
For calibration, troubleshooting, and maintenance information, read
Chapter 7. For background purposes, it may also be advisable to read
Chapter 2 –Product Overview and Appendix A –Specifications.
Equipment Installers
For quick check information, read Chapter 1 – Quick Check.
For more detailed installation instructions, first read Chapter 2 – Product
Overview, and then read Chapter 3 – Installation. You may also need to
refer to the dimensional print in Appendix E and the parts list in
Appendix D.
For information on Electrical Classification, Agency Certifications, and
Product Safety Specifications, refer to Table A-4 on page 187.
If you need additional information that cannot be found in the manual, call
Foxboro Field Service or Foxboro Technical Support at 1-800-441-6014 in
the U.S.A. or your local Foxboro representative.
xiv
762CNA Controller - Preface
MI 018-885 February 1998
Programmers/Software Engineers
Review Chapter 2 – Product Overview and the sections of Chapter 3 –
Installation and Chapter 4 – Configuration that pertain to wiring and communications functions. Refer to MI 018-888, Serial Communications Guide
for 762C and 743CB Controllers, for detailed descriptions of the controller
protocol and communications functionality.
User Feedback
After you have had an opportunity to use this manual to install, configure,
and operate the equipment, please fill out the user feedback form on the
following page and return it to us.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller -
Preface
xv
xvi
762CNA Controller - Preface
MI 018-885 February 1998
MI 018-885
762C/743CB Serial Communications Guide
User Feedback Form
February 1998
Company Name _________________________________
Your Name (optional) _____________________________
Your Position or Dept. ____________________________
762CNA Controller Preface
xvii
TOC, Figures, Tables
Foxboro seeks your constructive suggestions for improving this manual. Please print information requested above,
then circle rating scale for each section of the manual in the column provided. If you find errors, please be specific
about page number and subject in the Comments column. Use space on the back of this form for additional comments. You may FAX both sides of the completed form with additional pages, if necessary, to The Foxboro Company, Technical Communications at 508-549-4380 or follow the instructions on the back for mailing this form. Thank
you for your assistance and suggestions.
A rating of 0 is poor; 4 is excellent; NA is not applicable.
Accuracy
Completeness Ease of Access Relevance
Comments Please Print
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA 0 1 2 3 4 NA 0 1 2 3 4 NA
Preface
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
1. Overview
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
2. Hardware
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
3. Message Requirements
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
4. Function 1 POLL
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
5. Function 1 SET
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
6. UPLOAD Message
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
7. DOWNLOAD Message
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
8. Extended POLL Message
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
9. READ Message Details
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
10. WRITE Message Details
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
11. Function 2 POLL Message
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
12. Function 2 SET Message
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
13. Error Detection
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
Appendix A
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
Appendix B
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
Appendix C
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
Index
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
0 1 2 3 4 NA
Instructions:
Chapter of Manual
‘
xviii
762CNA Controller - Preface
MI 018-885 February 1998
762C SINGLE
STATION
MICRO
Controller
February 1998
Ð
Preface
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Appendix A
Appendix B
Appendix C
Appendix D
Appendix E
Appendix F
Glossary
Index
• xiii
Quick Check • 1
Product Overview • 11
Installation • 23
Configuration • 49
Operation • 109
EXACT Tuning • 135
Calibration, Troubleshooting,
Maintenance • 159
Specifications • 183
Configuration Worksheets • 193
Structure Diagrams • 237
Parts List • 247
Dimensional Print • 255
Functional Diagram • 261
• 267
• 287
The Intelligent Automation People
2
762CNA Controller
MI 018-885 February 1998
Quick
Check
1
The purpose of this chapter is to:
• Verify that your controller is operating to factory specifications.
• Introduce you to the basic controller functions.
• Direct you to more detailed instructions.
The chapter is divided into the following major sections:
• Seating the NOVRAM • 2
• Connecting to Power Source • 3
• Controller Display • 4
• Changing the Display • 6
• Reading Additional Controller Information • 7
• Looking for More Information? • 8
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 1 - Quick Check
1
Figure 1-1. Rear Support for Controller
0.25-20
Bolt* And Nut
(Supplied By
User)
*Restricted wrench clearance.
Machine screw suggested
(slotted hex, pan head, or
fillister head).
Rear Support
(Supplied By
User)
CAUTION
Rear Panel Mounting Screws
(2 on each side)
1
Secure rear of housing to a support as shown in Figure 1-1.
2
Slide controller into housing until latch engages.
3
Secure latch release cover in place to prevent inadvertent removal of
controller.
Once the controller has been placed in operation, do not withdraw it from
the housing except for service. When the controller is partly withdrawn, it is
disconnected from the back panel and the power source and the process is
not controlled.
Seating the NOVRAM
CAUTION
2
The NOVRAM memory chip may be dislodged during shipping. Before
connecting power, verify that the NOVRAM is fully seated in the socket. If
the NOVRAM is not properly seated prior to power-up, the factory-set
parameters may be corrupted when power is applied to the controller.
762CNA Controller - 1 - Quick Check
MI 018-885 February 1998
Figure 1-2. Seating the NOVRAM
Socket release lever – push up to lock
Release Latch below keypad
NOVRAM
After verifying that the NOVRAM is seated, continue to next item.
Connecting to Power Source
The 762C controller can be ordered with an operating voltage of 24, 100,
120, 220, 240 V ac or 24 V dc. Verify that your power input is the same as
indicated on the data label.
CAUTION
MI 018-885
Observe polarity on 24 V dc units.
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 1 - Quick Check
3
Figure 1-3. Connecting to Power Source
With ac supply
With dc Supply
L1 N(L2) Earth
+ _ (Ground)
Power Terminal Cover
(General Purpose)
Terminal Cover
(Division 2 Locations)
Power
Cord
Rear Support
Cable Strap
(Supplied by
user)
WARNING
Protection against shock hazards requires power grounding. Failure to properly earth (ground) this equipment could result in lethal voltages on
exposed metal surfaces in the event of equipment malfunction.
Controller Display
Unless you ordered an alternate configuration, the controller will display
something similar to that shown in Figure 1-4.
4
762CNA Controller - 1 - Quick Check
MI 018-885 February 1998
Figure 1-4. Controller Display
Bargraph indicator to
identify variable
being displayed on
lower digital display
Upper Digital Display
762 MICRO
0.0
Lower Digital Display
Controller Fault
Indicator (Red LED,
Normally Not Visible)
Non-illuminated
20% Scale Markings
Set Point Indicator
M
Manual Status
Output Bargraph
Underrange Indicator
(Measurement Bargraph)
Operator Keypad
W/P
R/L
A/M
SEL
TAG
ACK
NOTE The Controller Fault Indicator (red LED) is on only if the control-
ler malfunctions.
Notice that:
• The Upper Digital Display reads the Foxboro configured Loop Tag
•
•
•
•
•
•
MI 018-885
(762 MICRO).
The Lower Digital Display reads the same value as the Output Bargraph
(0.0%).
The bargraph indicator is above the Output Bargraph. The value of the
output is shown on the Lower Digital Display.
The Auto/Manual Status Indicator displays M, which indicates that the
unit is in Manual mode.
The Output Bargraph reads 0% of span.
The Measurement Bargraph indicates that the measurement input is
underrange.
The Set Point Indicator reads 50% of span (default value).
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 1 - Quick Check
5
Changing the Display
To check out the panel display and to become familiar with the functions of
the keypad (see Figure 1-5), exercise the keys as described below.
Figure 1-5. Operator Keypad
W/P
R/L
A/M
SEL
TAG
ACK
The W/P and R/L keys are configured in the OFF position and are not functional at this time. When configured, a W or P and an R or L appear on the
display.
Using the
A/M Key
The A/M key will transfer the controller between AUTO (A) and
MANUAL (M). Try pressing the A/M key. Return to MANUAL before proceeding. Notice that the bargraph indicator always moves over the Output
Bargraph when you transfer the controller to Manual and that it moves over
the Measurement Bargraph when you transfer to Auto.
Using the
SEL Key
Try pressing the SEL key. Note that this causes the Digital Display to show
the value for the Set Point Indicator, or the Measurement Bargraph, or the
Output Bargraph, depending on the location of the bargraph indicator.
Manual
Output
Press the SEL key to move the bargraph indicator to the Output Bargraph.
You are now prepared to adjust the controller output and to read the values
on the Output Bargraph and the Lower Digital Display.
Increase the output by pressing the ∆ key. The Output Bargraph and the
Lower Digital Display will read the value you select.
To decrease the output, press the ∇ key.
If you press/hold either the ∆ or the ∇ key while adjusting the manual output, the value changes at an accelerated rate that depends on the duration of
the hold.
It is not necessary to return the controller to the original values before proceeding to the next step.
Adjusting
the Set Point
6
Press the SEL to move the bargraph indicator over the set point. The Measurement and Set Point Indicator engineering unit labels are the same (PCT
is factory default). Press the ∆ or ∇ keys to adjust the set point. Note the set
point value (shown on the lower display) and its corresponding indicator
change (each segment represents a 2% change in the value). Holding the
key causes the value to change at a faster rate.
762CNA Controller - 1 - Quick Check
MI 018-885 February 1998
Reading Additional Information
Use the following keys to read the controller information.
Table 1-1. Keypad Functions
Key
Function
TAG
To enter the READ mode or to return to the operating mode.
To display the previous option
To display the next option
SEL
To back up through the menu.
ACK
To answer YES to a displayed question and to display the next parameter.
To READ controller information, use the procedure on the following page.
Note that READ mode does not affect operation of the controller.
This is the digital display in normal position.
762 MICRO
0.0
Press TAG
MENU
READ
?
Do you want to read available information?
Press ACK to read.
Press ACK
READ
VALUES
?
Do you want to read various values?
If NO, press
key. If YES, press ACK.
Press
READ
CONFIG
?
Do you want read the configuration?
See note below.
Press ACK
twice
STRATEGY
ONE FUNC ?
Configuration Strategy?
Configured for one function.
Press ACK
Function 1 configuration?
CONFIG
FUNC 1 ?
Press ACK
FUNC 1
PI, PID
?
Function configured for either PI or PID (default
configuration).
Press ACK
PI, PID
=DISPLAY ?
Review controller display configuration?
NOTE RD CONFIG and following items above are only available if
SHOWOP RD CFG was configured YES.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 1 - Quick Check
7
Reading Additional Information (cont.)
You can continue to read by pressing the ACK key. If you want to back up
to a previous option, press the SEL key. Pressing the ∇ key repeatedly
selects further options.
Return to
NORMAL
To return to normal operation at any time, press the TAG key. Note that no
changes can be made in the READ mode.
This completes the checkout procedure to verify that you have a functional
unit as shipped from our factory.
Looking for More Information?
For more detailed information, refer to the following sections of this
manual:
For general installation information, refer to Chapter 3. For dimensional
details, refer to Appendix E.
For configuration instructions, refer to Chapter 4 and to Appendices B and
C.
For operating instructions, refer to Chapter 5.
For calibration, troubleshooting and maintenance information, refer to
Chapter 7. For replacement parts and accessories, refer to the parts list in
Appendix D.
For information on serial communications programming, refer to
MI 018-888, Serial Communication Guide for 762C and 743CB Controllers.
For information about specifications and agency certifications, refer to
Appendix A.
If you need additional help, please call the Foxboro Customer Service Center at 1-800-441-6014 in the U.S.A. or your local Foxboro representative.
8
762CNA Controller - 1 - Quick Check
MI 018-885 February 1998
762C SINGLE
STATION
MICRO
Controller
February 1998
Ð
Preface
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Appendix A
Appendix B
Appendix C
Appendix D
Appendix E
Appendix F
Glossary
Index
• xiii
Quick Check • 1
Product Overview • 11
Installation • 23
Configuration • 49
Operation • 109
EXACT Tuning • 135
Calibration, Troubleshooting,
Maintenance • 159
Specifications • 183
Configuration Worksheets • 193
Structure Diagrams • 237
Parts List • 247
Dimensional Print • 255
Functional Diagram • 261
• 267
• 287
The Intelligent Automation People
10
762CNA Controller
MI 018-885 February 1998
Product
Overview
2
This chapter is a summary of the general characteristics of the product.
Detailed specifications can be found in Appendix .
The chapter is divided into the following parts:
• Description • 12
• Functional Block Diagram • 13
• Front Panel • 18
• Keypad Functions • 19
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 2 - Product Overview
11
Description
The 762CNA is a microprocessor-based controller that can perform proportional, integral, and derivative (PID) control functions for two independent
loops. The two loops can also be configured to form a single-station cascade
or auto-selector controller. In addition, the 762CNA offers many enhanced
control functions, such as EXACT tuning, totalizing, and comprehensive
calculation and logic capabilities.
As an alternative, you can configure the 762CNA as a single or dual
auto/manual transfer station or a single or dual 3-variable indicator. Control
capability can be intermixed with either auxiliary station type.
A fluorescent front panel display shows current values of control variables in
bargraph format and selected values in numeric form. It also displays an
electronic loop tag, controller status, and alarm status. A keypad, located on
the front of the unit, is used for operator input and configuration functions.
The front panel shows the status of Controller 1 (or Auxiliary Station) as
Faceplate 1 and the status of Controller 2 (or Auxiliary Station) as
Faceplate 2. To change from one faceplate to the other, press/hold the SEL
key on the keypad.
The 762CNA mounts in a compact DIN housing designed for semi-flush
panel mounting. Terminations are located at the rear of the unit.
RS-485 serial communication enables complete supervisory capability from
a host computer.
Figure 2-1. Model 762CNA Controller
.
Power and signal terminations at rear.
Compact panel-mounted DIN housing
Plug-in controller (inserted into
housing)
Faceplate display
Keypad
12
762CNA Controller - 2 - Product Overview
MI 018-885 February 1998
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 2-2 illustrates the inputs, outputs, and functions of a 762CNA
Series station. Explanations follow the block diagram. For more detailed
information, refer to Appendix A – Specifications on page 183 and Appendix F –Controller Functional Diagram on page 261.
Figure 2-2. Block Diagram of a 762CNA Control Station
Panel Displays
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
IN 4
Analog Inputs
(4)
F1
F2
Frequency
Inputs (2)
CI 1
CI 2
Discrete
Inputs (2)
Input Signal Conditioning
RTD (100Ω Pt)
Function
Function
1
With
Totalizer
2
with
Totalizer
AOUT1
AOUT2
Analog
Outputs (2)
CO 1
CO 2
Discrete
Outputs (2)
Four Alarms
Calculations and
Logic Functions
Operator Keypad
Rs-485 Serial
Communication
Inputs
Type
Qty.
Description
Analog
4
4-20 mA dc (May be changed to 1 - 5 V dc by removing input resistors.) Assignable to any controller or function. A 100Ω Platinum RTD
input can be substituted for Analog Input 1 by adding a hardware
option.
1 to 9999 Hz, assignable to any function. May be combined into one
up/down pulse signal.
5 V dc, 1 mA max, non-isolated contact or transistor switch inputs,
assignable to any function. Used for remote status changes such as
A/M, R/L, W/P, EXT ACK, tracking functions, and totalizer logic.
Frequency 2
Discrete
2
Outputs
Type
Qty.
Description
Analog
2
4-20 mA non-isolated, assignable to any function. Isolation option is
available for Output 1. Output 2 may be converted to 1 - 5 V dc by
jumper selection.
Non-isolated, open collector transistor switch outputs, assignable to
alarm, status, or Boolean logic functions. 50 V dc, 250 mA max.
Discrete 2
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 2 - Product Overview
13
Input Signal Conditioning
Type
Description
Linear
Square Root
The conditioned signal is directly proportional to the input signal.
The conditioned signal is proportional to the square root of the input
signal.
The conditioned signal is proportional to the square of the input signal.
Signal conditioning modifies the input signal to match the characteristics of a custom curve entered by the user (8 segments).
Signal conditioning modifies the input signal to match the characteristics of a second custom curve entered by the user (8 segments).
Signal conditioning linearizes the display to match the characteristics of a standard thermocouple type (E, J, or K). For display purposes only.
Signal conditioning linearizes the display to match the characteristics of a standard RTD type (IEC 100 or SAMA 100). For display
purposes only.
A second-order Butterworth filter may be assigned to any input.
Squared
Characterizer 1
Characterizer 2
Thermocouple
(Transmitter)
RTD
Input Filter
Alarms
Item
Description
Quantity
Type
Form
Four, assignable to any input or output signal or internal variable.
2-level (high/high, low/low, or high/low) with adjustable deadband.
Can be configured to activate on Absolute Value, Deviation from a reference value, or Rate-of Change of a variable.
Latching, nonlatching, or permissive. (Latching alarms require operator acknowledgment. Nonlatching alarms may be acknowledged but
are self clearing when the alarm condition no longer exists. Permissive alarms do not require acknowledgment.)
Action
Calculations/Logic Functions
Calculation
Description
Boolean Logic
Five single and five dual gates are available for logic computation.
Each gate is configured by first selecting the logic and then selecting
the source of each input. Inputs may be contact inputs, alarm output
states, status indicator outputs, EXACT state, gate outputs, or three
fixed states. (Refer to Table 4-3, Gate Input List, on page 53.) Gates
0 through 4 are single input gates user-configured as DIRECT or
NOT (inverse logic). Gates 5 through 9 are dual input gates, each of
which can be defined as: OR, NOR, AND, NAND, XOR, or XNOR.
Dynamic
Lead/lag, impulse, and deadtime calculations with user-adjustable
Compensation Gain, Input Bias, Out Bias, and Deadtime.
The result of a dedicated calculation function can be passed through
a dynamic compensator, prior to signal distribution. The dynamic
compensator provides lead/lag with an impulse option, and dead time
functions, each with its individual follow switch. Functionally, dead
time precedes lead/lag.
Using the dynamic compensator and the follow switches, you can
implement feedforward and other complex control applications easily
and efficiently.
14
762CNA Controller - 2 - Product Overview
MI 018-885 February 1998
Calculation
Description
Algebraic
The 762CNA can perform up to three independent algebraic calculations. Each may contain up to nine characters. The variables may
include results of other calculation blocks, scaled and conditioned
inputs, and other internal control signals. To configure an equation,
enter one character at a time from the keypad, following the usual
rules of algebra, and a few easy-to-learn rules.
Controller Selections (Functions 1 and 2)
Type
Description
PID
Proportional (P), Integral (I), and Derivative (D) algorithm is standard
for both controllers. May be configured as P, I, PD, PI, or PID.
EXACT control, the Foxboro patented adaptive tuning system, is
available on both control loops, subject to totalizer configuration constraints.
With this configuration, the output of Controller 1 is the set point of
Controller 2. Allows bumpless transfer between auto/manual and
between remote/local set point modes.
Either or both controllers can be configured for batch control, which
prevents controller windup when the controlled process is shut down.
The two controllers can be combined to provide a single auto-selected
output that can be used for constraint or dual mode control. The
choice of lower, higher, or logic-selected output is available. Feedback signals prevent controller windup. You can configure one common or two independent auto/manual functions.
The two 4-20 mA outputs can be driven from a single controller. This
allows one measured variable to be controlled by two manipulated
variables. A typical application is a temperature control system in
which both the heating medium and the cooling medium are manipulated.
The set points of both controllers may be adjusted manually from the
front panel keypad or automatically from a remote device. Each
remote set point can be sourced to any signal in the Signal Distribution List (see Table 4-2). The R/L key toggles between remote and
local set point modes.
Supervision of the controller can be local (Panel) or remote (Workstation).
Nonlinear extender, measurement and set point tracking, output tracking, output multiplication or summing, external feedback, external output limits. Dynamic compensation (lead/lag, impulse, deadtime)
provides a capability for implementing feedforward and other
advanced control algorithms. Bypass of the control algorithm by
enabling the set point to manipulate the output directly.
EXACT
Cascade
Batch
Auto
Selector
Split Range
Remote or
Local
Setpoints
Panel or
Workstation
Other
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 2 - Product Overview
15
Totalizers (Functions 1 and 2)
Quantity
Description
2
Two 7-digit totalizers can be assigned to any internal or external signal.
The totalizers can be set to integrate up to a preset value or down from
a preset value, and to produce a logic output when the count equals
the target value. Totalization and EXACT tuning are mutually exclusive. (If Function 1 or Function 2 is configured for EXACT tuning, an
associated totalizer is not available.) Each totalizer has its own tag and
engineering units label.
Station Configurations (Functions 1 and 2)
Configuration
Functions
Single
Function
Station
As a single-function station, Function 2 is not operative. Function 1
may be any one of: PID, PID with EXACT, I ONLY, P/PD, 3-variable
indicator, or auto/manual station. If Function 1 is anything other than
PID with EXACT, two totalizers, TOTAL1 and TOTAL2, are available.
If Function 1 is PID with EXACT, TOTAL2 only is available.
As a dual-function station, both functions are operative. Both may be
PID, PID with EXACT, P/PD, I ONLY, 3-variable indicators, or auto/
manual stations. TOTAL1 is available if Function 1 is anything other
than EXACT. TOTAL2 is available if Function 2 is anything other than
EXACT.
As a cascade control station, Function 1 is the primary controller and
Function 2 is the secondary controller. Both may be PID with or without EXACT, P/PD, OR I ONLY. TOTAL1 is available if Function 1 is
anything other than EXACT. TOTAL2 is available if Function 2 is anything other than EXACT.
As an auto-selector, both controllers may be PID, PID with EXACT, P/
PD, OR I ONLY.
An Auto/Manual Station provides all of the features of a controller
without the control algorithm. Up to two auto/manual stations may be
configured.
Up to two 3-variable indicator faceplates are available. Each
selected variable has its own bargraph, digital display of engineering
units, and loop tag display. The 3-variable faceplates are mutually
exclusive with controllers and auto/manual stations. If only one controller or manual station is configured, you may configure one 3-variable faceplate.
Dual
Function
Station
Single Station
Cascade
Auto-Selector
Controller
Auto/Manual
Switching
Station
3-variable
Indicator
Station
16
762CNA Controller - 2 - Product Overview
MI 018-885 February 1998
Other Features
Feature
Description
“Copy Configuration”
Accessory
This optional accessory permits you to copy the configuration of one
controller for use in another controller. This is accomplished using two
NOVRAMs (nonvolatile, random access memory modules) and a configuration copy accessory device. To use this feature, simply turn off
power, remove the configured NOVRAM from the controller, install the
copy accessory, plug the configured NOVRAM and a second NOVRAM
(to be configured) into the copy accessory, and turn on power. The first
NOVRAM is then copied into the second for use in another controller.
With minimum effort, any number of controllers can thus be configured
with the same parameter values as the original controller. Individual
parameters in each controller can then be easily changed to fit a particular loop.
The output bargraph and digital indicator can be configured to display
the actual 4-20 mA output value by connecting the 4-20 mA output to
an unused input and assigning the output bargraph to that input.
The output, AOUT 1 or AOUT 2, can be configured to be a value equal
to 100% minus the actual output.
The 762CNA controller is equipped with an RS-485 serial port for communication with most host computers, either directly or through an
RS-232/RS-485 converter or equivalent accessory. The protocol
conforms to ANSI Specification X3.28-1976, Subcategory E3. Using
the Foxboro Model F6501A converter, up to 90 controllers can be
accommodated by a single host communication port. Serial communications capability includes uploading/downloading of configuration,
remote setting of Auto/Manual (A/M), Remote/Local (R/L) status, manual output value, local set point values, polling of all inputs and outputs,
and writing as well as reading of all configurable parameters. Both control loops are accommodated by the single port. You can also select
baud rate, parity, and panel or workstation (host) priority.
Using the keypad, you can read the values of inputs, alarm and limit
settings, and the current operating configuration. However, you can
adjust only those settings that were specified as operator-adjustable
when the controller was configured. To adjust the remaining parameters, you must enter a passcode from the keypad. The passcode is
determined by an authorized person at the time the controller is configured. Thus, only those who have been given this passcode can change
any of the protected parameters. The passcode can be changed at any
time by the authorized person.
The display of the measurement, local set point, or remote set point
may be displayed before or after the signal is characterized. If pH Display is activated, the displays are before characterization. This feature
is often used on pH applications when it is important to read pH, but
control be performed on concentration.
Actual
Output
Indication
Output
Reverse
RS-485
Serial Communications
Interface
Passcode
Security
pH Display
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 2 - Product Overview
17
Front Panel
The 762CNA controller can be configured and operated entirely from the
front panel with no external equipment. The panel consists of an alphanumeric display, a graphics display, status indicators, an alarm indicator (horn
symbol), and a keypad. Refer to Figure 2-3. A controller faceplate is shown
for illustrative purposes.
Display Functions
Figure 2-3. Panel Display (Faceplate 1 or 2)
Upper Digital Display
FIC 1002A
Lower digital display
150.5 GPM
WP
Red LED Fault
Indicator (normally
not visible)
Workstation/Panel
Status
RL
Remote/Local
Set Point Status
AM
Auto/Manual
Status
Bargraph indicator
Overrange indicator
Setpoint Indicator
Left Bargraph
(Set Point)
Middle Bargraph
(Measurement)
Alarm Indicator
Right Bargraph
(Output)
Underrange indicator
Keypad
W/P
R/L
A/M
SEL
TAG
ACK
The alphanumeric display at the top of the front panel has two lines of nine
characters each, 5 mm (0.196 in) high, colored blue-green.
18
762CNA Controller - 2 - Product Overview
MI 018-885 February 1998
Display Functions (cont.)
The graphics display consists of three bargraphs, each having 50 segments
(each 2% of full scale) plus a triangular pointer on top and bottom to indicate when the variable is either above or below the range of the display. The
bars are 55.4 mm (2.18 in) long. The left and center bargraphs are 5 mm
(0.196 in) wide, and the right bar graph is 2.5 mm (0.098 in). All are colored blue-green.
The status characters (W/P, R/L, A/M) are 4 mm (0.157 in) high; the alarm
symbol is 5 mm (0.196 in) high. The status characters are colored bluegreen; the alarm symbol is red. The position of the bargraph indicator or
“dot” identifies which variable is currently displayed on the Lower Digital
Display. To move the indicator to the next position, press (short press) the
SEL button.
Keypad Functions
The keypad has eight keys as shown in Figure 2-4 and identified in the table
below. The key switches are single pole, normally open contacts, all closing
to a common lead. For actuation, keys must be pressed for a minimum of
200 ms (0.2 s).
Figure 2-4. Keypad
Key
W/P
R/L
MI 018-885
February 1998
W/P
R/L
A/M
SEL
TAG
ACK
Function
Pressing these keys moves you forward and backward through menu
items and functions, and permits you to adjust parameter values. Also
use these keys to increase and decrease set point and manual output
values.
When W/P is configured, pressing this key toggles between Workstation and Panel mode. In Workstation mode, the controller is supervised
from a remote workstation via the serial communication port. In the
Panel mode, the controller is locally supervised. This key is disabled
when the unit is configured for workstation priority and when W/P is
routed to any selection from the Gate Input List.
When R/L is configured, pressing this switch toggles between Remote
(R) and Local (L) set point operation. This key is disabled when the
controller is in the W mode and when R/L is routed to any selection
from the Gate Input List.
762CNA Controller - 2 - Product Overview
19
Key
Function
A/M
Pressing this key toggles between Auto (A) and Manual (M) operation.
When transferring from A to M, the bargraph indicator light automatically selects the Output Bargraph for alphanumeric display. When
transferring from M to A, it selects the Measurement Bargraph. This key
is disabled when the controller is in the W mode and when A/M is
routed to any selection from the Gate Input List.
A short press (200 to 300 ms) selects the next variable for display on
SEL
(Short press) the Lower Digital Display (alphanumeric). Also provides access to
remote set point, ratio, and totalized count, when so configured.
SEL
A long press (≥300 ms) toggles between Faceplates 1 and 2, provided
(Long Press) they are configured and active. If only one faceplate is configured, the
key performs the same functions as a short press.
TAG
Pressing this key causes the controller to exit from the faceplate display
and enter the User Interface. If the controller is in W mode, this key is
disabled.
ACK
In NORMAL mode, pressing this key acknowledges an alarm condition,
causing the indicator to change from flashing to steady. This key is
functional in both W and P modes.
A keypad disable link is provided to prevent unauthorized tampering in
remote unmanned locations. See page 26 for information about this link.
20
762CNA Controller - 2 - Product Overview
MI 018-885 February 1998
762C SINGLE
STATION
MICRO
Controller
February 1998
Ð
Preface
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Appendix A
Appendix B
Appendix C
Appendix D
Appendix E
Appendix F
Glossary
Index
• xiii
Quick Check • 1
Product Overview • 11
Installation • 23
Configuration • 49
Operation • 109
EXACT Tuning • 135
Calibration, Troubleshooting,
Maintenance • 159
Specifications • 183
Configuration Worksheets • 193
Structure Diagrams • 237
Parts List • 247
Dimensional Print • 255
Functional Diagram • 261
• 267
• 287
The Intelligent Automation People
22
762CNA Controller
MI 018-885 February 1998
Installation
3
This chapter provides all information necessary for installing the controller.
It is divided into the following major sections:
• Important Safety Precautions • 24
• Unpacking • 24
• Controller Identification
• 25
• Positioning Links • 26
• Installation Procedure • 27
• Signal Wiring Guidelines • 30
• Input Signal Wiring • 32
• Output Signal Wiring • 38
• Serial Communication Wiring • 39
• Power Wiring • 40
• Accessory Equipment • 41
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 3 - Installation
23
Important Safety Precautions
Shock Hazards
This product operates from hazardous voltage power sources. Hazardous
voltage points are labeled and/or covered within the enclosure. For your
own safety, please observe these warnings and replace all protective covers
after servicing.
Explosion Hazards
Certain versions of this product are designed for use in Class I, Division 2
hazardous locations. If you have one of these versions, never connect or disconnect power wiring or field wiring unless the area is known to be nonhazardous. Doing this in the presence of an explosive gas-air mixture could
result in an explosion.
Unpacking
24
1
Remove the controller from its shipping container and check for
visible damage.
2
Remove the mounting brackets.
3
Save the container until you determine that no shipping damage has
occurred.
4
If no damage is observed, proceed with installation.
5
If the controller has been damaged, notify the carrier immediately
and request an inspection report. Obtain a signed copy of the report
from the carrier and contact Foxboro in the U.S.A. (Dept. 880 at
1-800-441-6014) or your local Foxboro representative.
762CNA Controller - 3 - Installation
MI 018-885 February 1998
Controller Identification
The data plate, located on top of the chassis, contains information
specific to your controller. A typical data plate is shown in
Figure 3-1.
Figure 3-1. Typical Data Plate
MODEL
762CNA-AT
ST. AA
CERT SPEC
REF NO.
94F30110-1-1
ORIGIN
CAUTION: USE ONLY WITH
120 V ac, 50/60 Hz
VA
SUPPLY
15
CUST. DATA
Model
Style (Hardware, Firmware)
Electrical Classification Code (See Note.)
Sales No. (If Applicable)
Date And Plant of Manufacture
Supply Voltage and Frequency
Power Consumption
User Information
NOTE: Blank space indicates Ordinary Location
Classification
MI 018-885
May 1995
762C Controller – 3 - Installation
25
Positioning Links
The controller 2 output (AOUT 2) and keyboard enable/disable functions
are link-selectable as shown in Table 3-1. The links have been positioned in
the factory in the 4-20 mA output and keypad enable positions. The links
are located on the main printed wiring assembly (PWA) as shown in
Figure 3-2.
CAUTION
Turn off controller power before positioning links. Repositioning links with
power on can damage components.
Figure 3-2. Link Locations
P53
P55
P56
P52
P57
P54
Table 3-1. Link Locations
26
Function
Setting
Link Position
Keypad
Enable/Disable
Enabled
P55 - P56
Disabled
P56 - P57
AOUT 2
Output
1 - 5 V dc
P52 - P54
4 to 20 mA
P52 - P53
762CNA Controller - 3 - Installation
MI 018-885 February 1998
Installation Procedure
The controller is shipped in its housing, which mounts in a DIN panel cutout. For exact cutout dimensions, refer to the Dimensional Print in
Appendix E.
NOTE If you plan to use 1-5 V dc instead of 4-20 mA on some inputs,
you will have to remove the 250Ω resistors across the selected input terminals. Although it is usually more convenient to do this before installing the
housing in the panel, you may also do it after installation. Refer to
“Removing Input Range Resistors” on page 29 for instructions.
CAUTION
Be sure that installation complies with all applicable codes, safety regulations, and certification requirements. For product safety specifications, refer
to Table A-4 on page 187.
The installation procedure is as follows:
1
Remove the controller from its housing and set it aside. To do so,
loosen the latch release screw and swing cover down, press the
latch (below the keypad) and slide the controller out of the housing, as shown in Figure 3-3.
Figure 3-3. Removing Controller from Housing
Printed wiring assembly, which carries input termination resistors*
Power
Terminals
Threaded
shaft
Terminal Block for wire connections
Rear Support
and cable restraint
Transformer
Connectors
*To remove termination resistors,
remove back panel assembly per instructions
2
Printed Wiring Assembly
NOVRAM
Latch Cover**
Latch**
**Loosen cover with screwdriver.
Press latch to release controller
from housing.
Mount the housing in the panel cutout.
Attach upper and lower mounting brackets to housing by inserting
tabs on brackets into slots in housing, as shown in Figure 3-4.
(Note that upper bracket can be mounted only on top of housing;
and lower bracket can be mounted only on bottom of housing.)
Tighten threaded shaft in each mounting.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 3 - Installation
27
Figure 3-4. Mounting of Controller
Tab
Upper Mounting Bracket
Threaded Shaft
Panel
Slot
Flange
Lower Mounting Tab
3
Secure rear of housing to a support as shown in Figure 3-5.
Figure 3-5. Rear Support for Controller
0.25-20
Bolt* And Nut
(Supplied By
User)
Rear Support
(Supplied By
User)
CAUTION
28
Rear Panel Mounting Screws
(2 on each side)
*Restricted wrench clearance.
Machine screw suggested
(slotted hex, pan head, or
fillister head).
4
Slide controller into housing until latch engages.
5
Secure latch release cover in place to prevent inadvertent removal of
controller.
Once the controller has been placed in operation, do not withdraw it from
the housing except for service. When the controller is partly withdrawn, it is
disconnected from the back panel and the power source and the process is
not controlled.
762CNA Controller - 3 - Installation
MI 018-885 February 1998
Removing Input Range Resistors
To modify an analog input to accept a 1-5 V dc signal, you must remove the
250Ω input range resistor connected across the terminals of that input.
Removing a resistor requires that you remove the rear panel assembly from
the rear of the controller housing in order to gain access to the resistors.
To remove input range resistors for selected inputs, execute the following
procedure:
1
Disconnect power from the housing.
2
Remove the controller from the housing.
3
Unbolt the rear support for the housing.
4
Remove the four mounting screws at the rear of the housing that
secures the back panel assembly to the housing.
5
Gently pull the rear panel assembly away from the rear of the housing until you have access to the input range resistors.
Note that the resistors are identified by markings on the board as AI1,
AI2, AI3, and AI4, which mean Analog Input 1, Analog Input 2, etc.
Using wire cutters, snip the desired resistor(s) from the circuit.
6
After verifying that the board is clean, reinstall the back panel assembly into the housing, using the four mounting screws.
Figure 3-6. Removing Input Range Resistors
Printed Circuit Board
(inside view)
at rear of housing
Termination Resistors (4)
Cut leads to remove from
circuit.
AI3
AI2
Rear Panel Assembly
AI4
AI1
Connectors
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 3 - Installation
Rear panel mounting screw (4 places)
29
Removing Input Range Resistors (cont.)
7
Bolt the housing to the rear mounting support.
8
Slide the controller back into the housing, secure the latch release
cover, and re-connect power.
Signal Wiring Guidelines
CAUTION
Except for the 4 to 20 mA isolated output module, all inputs, outputs, and
the transmitter power supply share a non-isolated, common, ungrounded
reference line. This line will be normally connected to plant ground (or
some other reference point) by external wiring schemes adopted by plant
practices. In doing this, care must be exercised that such grounding shall
only occur at a single point, and by single connection of “common” to the
designated reference point (plant ground).
CAUTION
Multiple connections of “common” lines to various grounding locations will
result in ground loops and give rise to faulty unit operation. Similar problems will occur if multiple grounding is made both at the 762CNA and at
the receiver/transmitter locations.
Connecting Wires to Terminals
762C controllers have compression type terminals as shown in
Figure 3-7.
Figure 3-7. Connecting Wires to Terminals
Terminal Screw
Wire
Clamp Jaw
To connect a wire to one of these terminals:
30
1
The controllers are shipped from the factory with the terminal
clamp jaws fully open. If, however, the jaw is closed, turn the terminal screw counterclockwise until the clamp jaw is fully open.
2
Insert stripped wire into clamp jaw as shown. Recommended wire
strip length is 1.4 cm (0.5 inches).
762CNA Controller - 3 - Installation
MI 018-885 February 1998
Connecting Wires to Terminals (cont.)
3
Turn terminal screw clockwise to tighten clamp.
4
Verify that clamp grips only the metal wire and not the insulation.
Also verify that the wire is secured in place after tightening clamp.
Recommended installation torque is 3.39 to 5.42 N-m (2.5 to
4.0 lb-in).
Wiring to Controller
Terminal locations are shown in Figure 3-8. Wiring connections for the 32
terminals are shown in Table 3-2 through Table 3-4. Examples of typical
wiring configurations are shown in Figure 3-10 through Figure 3-16. After
connecting the signal wires, secure them with a cable strap to the rear of the
controller as shown in Figure 3-8.
Figure 3-8. Terminal Identification
Controller
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
MI 018-885
February 1998
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
762CNA Controller - 3 - Installation
Terminal Strips
Cable Strap
(supplied by user)
Signal Cable
Rear Mounting
Bracket
31
Input Signal Wiring
This section describes installation of input signal wiring for all types of
inputs.
Input Signal Terminal/Wire Designations
Table 3-2 designates input signal terminals by terminal number. For examples of typical input signal wiring circuits, refer to the applicable section following Table 3-2.
Table 3-2. Terminal and Wire designations for Input signal Wiring
Terminal
Number
Function
a
Internal dc Power for 4-20 mA Transmitter (+):
a
Internal dc Power for 4-20 mA Transmitter (+):
Common for Internal dc Power:
b
Analog Input 1(+):
b
Analog Input 1 (–):
b
Analog Input 2 (+):
b
Analog Input 2 (–):
b
Analog Input 3 (+):
b
Analog Input 3 (–):
b
Analog Input 4(+):
b
Analog Input 4(–):
Frequency Input 1 from Flowmeter; or
Pulse-Up Input from Computer for Set Point
Frequency Input 2 from Flowmeter; or
Pulse-Down Input from Computer for Set Point
Common for Frequency or Pulse Inputs:
Frequency Input 1 (+) for Controller-Powered Flowmeter:
Frequency Input 2 (+) for Controller-Powered Flowmeter:
RTD;Temperature Measurement
Blk Wire:
Grn Wire:
Wht Wire:
RTD; Temperature Difference Measurement
Wht Wire (Reference Sensor):
Grn and Blk Wires (Act. & Ref. Sensors):
Wht Wire (Active Sensor):
Contact Input 1:
Contact Input 2:
Contact Input Common:
1
17
3, 6 and 19
2
4
5
7
21
23
18
20
15
13
14
16
12
9
10
11
9
10
11
29(+)
28(+)
30
a. Unit can supply power for up to two 4 to 20 mA transmitters.
b. 4-20 mA, field convertible to 1-5 V dc.
32
762CNA Controller - 3 - Installation
MI 018-885 February 1998
Analog Input Signal Wiring
Examples of analog input signal wiring for the 32-position terminal
block are shown in Figure 3-9.
Figure 3-9. Examples of Analog Input Signal Wiring
Self-Powered Signal Sources
CONTROLLER
TERMINALS
SOURCES
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
RED
+
GRA
(-)
RED
+
GRA
(-)
RED
+
GRA
(-)
RED
+
GRA
(-)
2
4
5
7
21
NOTES:
a. Standard controllers can supply power to two 4-20
mA transmitters.
b. If controller power is used for two transmitters,
connect (+) wire of one trans-mitter to Terminal 1;
connect (+) wire of other transmitter to Terminal
17.
c. Make a note of which signal is connected to each
input. The information will be required during
configuration.
23
18
20
Controller-Powered 4-20 mA Transmitters
SOURCES
RED
INPUT 1
GRA
+
(-)
CONTROLLER
TERMINALS
1 or 17(b)
2
3,6, or 19
JUMPER
INPUT 2
4
RED
+
GRA
(-)
1 or 17(b)
5
3,6, or 19
JUMPER
INPUT 3
7
RED
+
GRA
(-)
1 or 17(b)
21
3, 6, or 19
JUMPER
INPUT 4
23
RED
+
GRA
(-)
1 or 17 (b)
18
3, 6 or 19
JUMPER
MI 018-885
May 1995
20
762C Controller – 3 - Installation
33
Frequency Input Signal Wiring
Examples of frequency input signal wiring of controller are shown in
Figure 3-10 through Figure 3-13.
Figure 3-10. Examples of Frequency Input Signal Wiring for E83 Vortex Flowmeter
EXTERNALLY POWERED VORTEX FLOWMETER:
E83 In Hazardous Location
E83 In Ordinary Location
Ordinary Non-hazardous Location
Vortex Flowmeter Terminals
MTL Model 779 Intrinsically-safe Barrier
+
External
Power
Supply
+
Controller
15(13)
15(13)
14(14)
Input 1
+
-
Terminals
Pulse
Hazardous Location
14(14)
Input 2
Regulated
24 V dc Supply
1
3
2
4
Pulse
-
Vortex Flowmeter
Terminals
Earth (Ground)
Bus
Controller-powered
Vortex Flowmeter:
Vortex Flowmeter Terminals
+
A
B
Controller Terminals
+
1 (17)
15(13)
Pulse
-
14(14)
Input 1
34
Input 2
762CNA Controller - 3 - Installation
MI 018-885 February 1998
Figure 3-11. Examples of Frequency Input Signals from 81 or 82 Turbine Flowmeter with
PA108, PA109, or A2020LA Preamplifier
EXTERNALLY POWERED PREAMPLIFIER
CONTROLLER-POWERED PREAMPLIFIER
PREAMPLIFIER
TERMINALS
PREAMPLIFIER
TERMINALS
CONTROLLER
TERMINALS
CONTROLLER
TERMINALS
INPUT
15(13)
15(13)
OUTPUT
_
14(14)
_
15 to
30 V dc
INPUT 2
INPUT 1
1(17)
+
SHIELDED CABLE IS
REQUIRED WITH
PREAMPLIFIER
A2020LA, STYLE A. USE
PART N0138BY OR
EQUIVALENT.
TURBINE
TURBINE
FLOWMETER
14(14)
15 to
+ 30 V dc
SHIELDED CABLE IS
REQUIRED WITH
PREAMPLIFIER
A2020LA, STYLE A.
USE PART N0138BY OR
EQUIVALENT.
15 TO 30 v
dc SUPPLY
_
+
Figure 3-12. Examples of Frequency Input Signals from 81 or 82 Turbine Flowmeter with
PA-106A Preamplifier
CONTROLLER-POWERED PREAMPLIFIER
PREAMPLIFIER
TERMINALS
CONTROLLER
TERMINALS
_
+
EXTERNALLY POWERED PREAMPLIFIER
PREAMPLIFIER
TERMINALS
15(13)
_
1(17)
+
GND
_
20 to 28 V dc
SUPPLY
R
CONTROLLER
TERMINALS
+
15(13)
14(14)
GND
1
2
INPUT 1
2
INPUT 2
INPUT 1
1
INPUT 2
SUPPLY VOLTAGE VALUE OF R
20 V dc
24 V dc
28 V dc
TURBINE
FLOWMETER
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 3 - Installation
400 Ω, 2 W
600 Ω, 2 W
800 Ω, 2 W
TURBINE
FLOWMETER
35
Figure 3-13. Examples of Frequency Input Signals from
Self-Powered Flow Transmitter and Positive Displacement Meters
FREQUENCY INPUT SIGNAL
FROM POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT METER
CONTROLLER-POWERED
FREQUENCY INPUT SIGNAL
FROM SELF-POWERED FLOW TRANSMITTER
CONTROLLER
TERMINALS
CONTROLLER
TERMINALS
POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT
METER CONTACTS
15(13)
16(12)
HIGH
FLOW
TRANSMITTER
15(13)
14(14)
EARTH
(GROUND)
INPUT 2
INPUT 1
EXTERNALLY-POWERED
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
CONTROLLER
TERMINALS
POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT
METER CONTACTS
14(14)
15(13)
680
2W
_
Ω
INPUT 1
24 V dc MAX.
SUPPLY
INPUT 2
+
Pulse Input Wiring
762C Series Controllers can have pulse input signal for remote supervisory
control of set point or for certain remote, direct digital control (DDC)
backup of output. Examples of pulse input signal wiring are shown in
Figure 3-14.
Figure 3-14. Examples of Pulse Input Wiring for Remote Set Points
SELF-POWERED
EXTERNALLY-POWERED
CONTROLLER
TERMINALS
CONTROLLER
TERMINALS
PULSE UP
+
PULSE UP
15
15
_
14
13
_
PULSE DOWN
PULSE DOWN
13
+
14
CONTROLLER-POWERED
+
CONTROLLER
TERMINALS
+24
-
_ SUPPLY
*500
PULSE UP 1500
Ω MIN.
Ω MAX
V dc MAX.
16
*RESISTORS SUPPLIED BY USER
14
*500
1500
PULSE DOWN
36
Ω MIN.
Ω MAX
MINIMUM CONTACT RATING: 25 mA
12
762CNA Controller - 3 - Installation
MI 018-885 February 1998
RTD and Contact Input Wiring
Examples of RTD and contact input signal wiring of controller are shown in
Figure 3-15. To use an RTD, the RTD Input Option must be installed and
Analog Input 1 Terminals 2 and 4 must be disconnected.
Figure 3-15. Examples of RTD and Contact Input Signal Wiring
RTD INPUT SIGNALS (a)
TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT (b)(c)
TEMPERATURE DIFFERENCE
MEASUREMENT (b)(d)
WHITE
WHITE
CONTROLLER
TERMINALS (a)
ACTIVE
RTD
CONTROLLER
TERMINALS
RTD
11
11
GREEN
BLACK
GREEN
BLACK
BLACK
GREEN
10
REF.
RTD
9
10
9
WHITE
a.
b.
c.
d.
RTD Input Option is dedicated to Input 1.
Diagrams show wire colors for Foxboro RTDs.
To maintain specified accuracy, RTD extension wires must all be the same length and gauge.
With temperature difference measurement, the reference RTD is used for the lower temperature.
CONTACT INPUT SIGNALS
CONTROLLER
TERMINALS
CONTACTS
INPUT 1
+
29
COMMON
30
INPUT 2
+
28
OPEN CIRCUIT VOLTAGE = +6 V MAX
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 3 - Installation
37
Output Signal Wiring
Output Signal Terminal/Wire Designations
Table 3-3 designates output signal terminals by terminal number. For examples of output signal wiring, refer to Figure 3-16.
Table 3-3. Output Signal Terminal and Wire Designations
Terminal
Number
Function
Control Output Signal #1; 4-20 mA (+):
Control Output Signal #1; 4-20 mA (–):
Control Output Signal #2; 4-20 mA(+) or 1-5 V dc (+):
Control Output Signal #2; 4-20 mA(-) or 1-5 V dc (-):
Contact Outputs: Open collector switch (NPN) output.
Contact Outputs 1 and 2 can be configured by user for the following:
Remote Status Indication of A/M, R/L, W/P, Alarms,
EXACT Algorithm, Contact Inputs, Gate Outputs, Auto Selector Status,
Totalizer Status.
26
27
8
6
Contact Output 1:
Contact Output 2:
Common for Contact Outputs:
32 (+)
31 (+)
30 (–)
Output Signal Wiring Examples
Examples of output signal wiring are shown in Figure 3-16.
Figure 3-16. Examples of Output Signal Wiring of Controller
Contact Output Signals
Controller
Terminals
(a)
RECEIVER
OUTPUT 1
32
50 V dc MAX.
SUPPLY
30
+
_
NOTE:
a. Maximum contact capacity is
250 mA. If receiver/supply
voltage combination results in
a current in excess of 250 mA,
add appropriate current
limiting resistor. Resistor not
required for loads less than
250 mA.
31
RECEIVER
OUTPUT 2
(a)
Output Signal #2
Output Signal #1
+
26
RECEIVER
COM _
27
Controller
Terminals
38
762CNA Controller - 3 - Installation
_
RECEIVER
+
8
COM _
6
Controller
Terminals
MI 018-885 February 1998
Serial Communication Wiring
This section describes installation of wiring for serial communication functions. Refer to “Serial Communications” on page 101 for important configuration details. For detailed programming information, refer to
MI 018-888, Serial Communication Guide for 762C and 743CB Controllers.
Terminal/Wire Designations
Table 3-4 designates terminals for serial communications wiring by terminal
number for a controller. For examples of serial communications wiring,
refer to the next section. If controller has optional surge protection, see
“Accessory Equipment” on page 41 for wiring details.
Table 3-4. Serial Communications Terminal/Wire Designations
Function
Terminal No.
RS-485-A Serial Connection:
RS-485-B Serial Connection:
Potential Equalization Terminal:
24 (+)
25 (–)
22
RS-485 is used for serial communication of measurement, set point, output, alarm, and status signals. Maximum number of controllers that can be connected in a single loop is 30. Maximum accumulated cable length is 1.5 km (5000 ft).
Wiring to an RS-485 Interface
Figure 3-17 shows an example of 762C controller terminal serial communications wiring to an RS-485 Interface. If a Foxboro Model F6501A RS-232
to RS-485 Converter is used, refer to “RS-232/RS-485 Converter” on
page 42 for additional details. Use twisted-wire pair for serial communications wires A and B. If screened (shielded) cable is used, connect screens to
system earth (ground).
Figure 3-17. Serial Communications Wiring of Controller
CONTROLLER NO. 1 (a)
TERMINALS (a)
A(+)
RS-485
(SUPPLIED
BY USER)
24
A(+)
B(-)
25
B(-)
POTENTIAL
EQUALIZATION
TERMINAL
22
CONTROLLER NO. 2 (a)
TERMINALS (a)
24
A(+)
24
25
B(-)
25
22
(a) IF CONTROLLER HAS OPTIONAL SURGE PROTECTION, SEE “Accessory
Equipment” on page 41 FOR WIRING DETAILS.
(b) IF SCREENED (SHIELDED) CABLE IS USED, MAKE SYSTEM EARTH CONNECTION
AT ANY SINGLE POINT ALONG THE SHIELD RUN.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 3 - Installation
TOTAL OF
30 CONTROLLERS (a)
MAXIMUM
22
SYSTEM
EARTH
(GROUND)(b)
39
Power Wiring
To connect power wires to the controller, complete the following procedure.
WARNING
1
Remove protective cover from terminals on rear of controller as
shown in Figure 3-18.
2
Connect wires to applicable terminals as shown.
3
Secure cable to rear of controller with a cable strap as shown.
4
Reinstall protective cover over terminals.
For protection against fire and electrical shock hazards:
•Protective cover must be installed over power terminals.
•All wiring must conform to local electrical code requirements.
•The power earth (ground) terminal must be connected to the ground
point serving the branch circuit powering the unit.
•Power wiring must be kept separate from low voltage field circuit wiring.
Figure 3-18. Power Wiring to Controller
With ac Supply L1 N(L2) Earth
(Ground)
With dc Supply + _
Power Terminal Cover
(General Purpose)
(Part No.K0143AH)
Terminal Cover
(Division 2 Locations)
(Part No.K0143DU)
Power
Cord
Rear Support
Cable Strap
(Supplied by
user)
40
762CNA Controller - 3 - Installation
MI 018-885 February 1998
Accessory Equipment
This section describes the installation of common accessory devices, such as
a surge suppressor, an RS-232/RS-485 converter, and an Opto-22 converter.
Optional Surge Suppressor
Surge protection is sometimes required with serial communications
(RS-485) wiring. If input wiring is located near transient-producing
sources, such as motors, solenoids, or high voltages, surge protection may
be required.
To install a surge suppressor, execute the following procedure:
1
Disconnect power source from controller (or disconnect power by
pulling controller from housing).
2
Remove protective cover if there is one (used only for Division 2
locations) from terminal blocks located on rear of controller.
3
Install surge suppressor assembly in terminal blocks as shown in Figure 3-19.
Figure 3-19. Installation of Optional Surge Suppressor
Power
Terminal Cover
Surge Suppressor
(Part No. L0122HS)
MI 018-885
February 1998
B(-)
A(+)
S
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
762CNA Controller - 3 - Installation
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
41
Optional Surge Suppressor (cont.)
Input Wiring
to Surge
Suppressor
4
Connect wires referenced in Figure 3-17 to the corresponding terminals on the suppressor assembly. For input wiring to the surge suppressor, use twisted-wire pair.
1
Connect wires from RS-485 to terminals of surge suppressor as
shown in Figure 3-19. Use twisted-wire pair.
2
If screened (shielded) cable is used, connect screen to system earth
(ground).
RS-232/RS-485 Converter
The Foxboro RS-232 to RS-485 Converter provides the interface between
the RS-485 field-wiring (twisted-wire pairs) and the RS-232 communications for the host computer, as shown in Table 3-5.
Table 3-5. RS-232/RS-485 Converter Specifications
Item
Specification
Supply Voltage
Limits
Supply Frequency
Limits
Inputs
120, 220, or 240 V ac +10% and -15%. Supply voltage as
specified in sales order.
50 or 60 Hz; ±3 Hz.
Connections
42
Accepts up to three independent RS-485 twisted-wire pairs.
Each pair can have up to thirty controllers connected to it.
The other input is the RS-232 connection to the host computer.
Terminal block for RS-485 twisted-wire pair terminations and
25-pin D-type connector for RS-232 cable.
762CNA Controller - 3 - Installation
MI 018-885 February 1998
Wiring
This section gives wiring details of the F6501A RS-232 to RS-485 Converter used for serial communications with the controller.
Wiring to
Controllers
Controller connections are made to the rear of the converter at the RS-485
interface shown in Figure 3-20 on page 44. Table 3-6 shows the function of
each terminal of the RS-485 interface. Note that terminals are arranged in
redundant pairs (links). For example, terminals 1 and 3 are electrically the
same; terminals 2 and 4 are electrically the same. Each redundant pair will
support up to 30 controllers. The maximum number of controllers that can
be connected to the converter using all three links is 90.
Table 3-6. RS-485 Terminal Connections on RS-232/485 Converter
Converter
Terminal Numbers
1 and 3 (+)
2 and 4 (–)
5 and 7 (+)
6 and 8 (–)
9 and 11 (+)
10 and 12 (–)
13
14
Function
Sample Device Addresses*
Interface for up to 30 Devices
1 through 30
Interface for up to 30 Devices
31 through 60
Interface for up to 30 Devices
61 through 90
RTS Signal
Case Earth
(ac Ground)
-----
* Addresses shown are for illustration only. Actual addresses are assigned by the user. Any address may be connected
to any terminal pair.
NOTE For each link, 30 controllers can be either connected to a single ter-
minal pair or split between terminal pairs in any combination totaling 30
(Arrangement A in Figure 3-20).
The preferred field wiring arrangement (chain arrangement) is shown as
Arrangement A in Figure 3-20 on page 44. Note that, with Arrangement A,
a break in either the (+) or (-) wire run disconnects all instruments on the
remote side of the break.
As an option, any of the following field wiring arrangements can be used.
• A “ring” arrangement can be connected to any of the three terminal
groups by using plus-to-plus and minus-to-minus wiring.
• A “star” arrangement can be connected to any of the three terminal
groups by using a junction box.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 3 - Installation
43
Figure 3-20. F6501A RS-232 to RS-485 Converter Signal Wiring
RS-232 TO RS-485
CONVERTER
1
+
2
_
3
+
4
_
5
+
6
_
7
+
8
9
10
_
11
+
12
13
14
RS-232
INTERFACE
(TO COMPUTER)
_
60
CONTROLLER
ADDRESS
00
16
31
01
22
32
37
02
23
33
36
34
35
03
61
90
JUNCTION
BOX
62
15
63
30
30 CONTROLLERS MAXIMUM
ARRANGEMENT A
(CHAIN ARRANGEMENT)
64
30 CONTROLLERS MAXIMUM
ARRANGEMENT B
(RING ARRANGEMENT)
30 CONTROLLERS MAXIMUM
ARRANGEMENT C
(STAR ARRANGEMENT
FROM JUNCTION BOX)
PREFERRED
44
762CNA Controller - 3 - Installation
MI 018-885 February 1998
OPTO-22 Board Model AC24 Converter Card
Interface
Requirements
The following details are included for information only, to assist users in
interfacing their OPTO22 cards to Foxboro controllers. The information
presented is applicable to the current OPTO22 AC24 family requirements
and may or may not be applicable to future design introductions. Requirements may also vary, depending on configuration and/or other devices connected to the network. For this reason, Foxboro emphasizes that the data
presented is for guidance only; no warranty or guarantee of any kind is
implied.
For complete details of the AC24 converter card, address, interrupt, and
communications jumpers, consult the manufacturer’s specifications. For
controller connections, refer to Figure 3-17.
Configuration
Before installing your AC24, configure your board by selecting the appropriate address, interrupt, and communications jumpers, as shown in
Figure 3-21.
The host PC is set up to use one asynchronous communications port,
COM1 or COM2.
Figure 3-21. Cable Connections to 9-Pin Male RS-485 Connector
COM1
COM2
C
B
1
1
7
1
7
1
7
7
A
A
3
3
COM
C
B
COM
IRQ2
IRQ7
IRQ6
IRQ5
COM1
COM2
CTS DIS
IRQ2
IRQ7
IRQ6
IRQ5
COM1
COM2
CTS DIS
9
OPTO 22
AC24
LEGEND:
NOT INSTALLED
EARLIER VERSIONS OF AC24
DO NOT HAVE THIS JUMPER
SEE NOTES
OPTO 22
AC24
9-PIN
MALE
CONNECTOR
INSTALLED
NOTES:
1. MAKE CONNECTIONS BETWEEN PINS 4 AND 8,
AND PINS 5 AND 9.
2. “A” AND “B” ARE TWISTED-PAIR WIRES.
A8
9
1
6
COMMON
2
7
3
4
8
9
“A” (TX/RX+)
“B” (TX/RX-)
To Controller
Rear Terminal
Panel. Refer to
Figure 3-17 or
Figure 3-21.
5
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 3 - Installation
45
46
762CNA Controller - 3 - Installation
MI 018-885 February 1998
762C SINGLE
STATION
MICRO
Controller
February 1998
Ð
Preface
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Appendix A
Appendix B
Appendix C
Appendix D
Appendix E
Appendix F
Glossary
Index
• xiii
Quick Check • 1
Product Overview • 11
Installation • 23
Configuration • 49
Operation • 109
EXACT Tuning • 135
Calibration, Troubleshooting,
Maintenance • 159
Specifications • 183
Configuration Worksheets • 193
Structure Diagrams • 237
Parts List • 247
Dimensional Print • 255
Functional Diagram • 261
• 267
• 287
The Intelligent Automation People
48
762CNA Controller
MI 018-885 February 1998
Configuration
4
This chapter describes all configuration options and defines procedures for
implementing them. If you have not yet read Chapter 2 - Product Overview,
we suggest that you do so before proceeding.
The chapter is divided into the following major sections:
• Introduction • 50
• Common Configuration Functions • 58
• Alarms • 64
• Alternate Station Configurations • 76
• Additional Configuration Functions • 80
• Configuration Copy Accessory • 105
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
49
Introduction
Configuration is the process of enabling functional capability in the controller firmware for a specific application. This section will enable you to
systematically determine, record, and configure the value or status of each
parameter required for your application. Whether you have a controller
with standard default values or one with factory pre-configured default values, you can reconfigure your controller to meet your specific requirements.
Most applications require only simple variations to the default values and
statuses already entered.
The following material will help you to configure your controller:
•
•
•
•
Appendix B - Configuration Plan Worksheets
Appendix C - Structure Diagrams
Appendix F - Functional Diagrams
Glossary
Planning Your Configuration
There are two common approaches to configuring your controller. One is to
first identify and record all the changes you need to make to the default configuration and then to implement them. This approach is preferred because
there is less need to move around in the product structure. However, you
may prefer to implement each change as you identify it.
Appendix B will be especially important in planning your configuration. It
is primarily a worksheet whose content is described below:
Table 4-1. Content of Configuration Worksheet
Structure
Diagram
Location
Direction to
parameter
on specific
sheet of
Appendix C
and to horizontal and
vertical
coordinates
on that
sheet.
Prompt/
Parameter
Parameter
Limits
Prompts to
parameters
in the order
they are displayed when
menu structure is
sequenced
step by step.
Limits of
each
parameter
with units
as applicable.
Standard
Factory
Configuration
Standard factory configuration as
shipped from
Foxboro.
User
Configuration
Remarks
and Notes
Column for
you to record
your configuration.
Additional
information
and space
for your
notations.
As you determine changes that must be made to the standard factory configuration (default) values for your application, record them in the User Configuration column of this worksheet.
50
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
MI 018-885 February 1998
Planning Your Configuration (cont.)
Throughout the Configuration section of this instruction, you will find
location designators (e.g., 2 - A3). These direct you to the parameter you
are looking for in the structure diagram in Appendix C. In the example
given, the 2 refers to the diagram beginning with Balloon 2 in the upper left
corner. The designation A3 refers to map coordinates on that diagram.
NOTE Diagrams in Locations 2, 3, 6, and 7 are so simple that map coor-
dinates are not used.
More detailed information on using the structure diagrams is located in the
beginning of Appendix C.
During configuration, you will need to access various signals such as inputs,
outputs, measurements, set points, and calculated values. These are located
in a Signal Distribution List which is in Location 6 in the structure and
explained in Table 4-2 on page 52.
You will also need to access alarms, gates, contact inputs, and other logic
functions to initiate actions. These are located in the Gate Input List in
Location 7 in the structure and explained in Table 4-3 on page 53.
Appendix F provides a functional overview of the controller. It can be used
with Appendix B, Configuration Worksheets, and Appendix C, Structure
Diagrams, to select the product capability needed to match your application.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
51
Table 4-2. Signal Distribution List
Name
Signal
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
C1 MEAS
C1 LOCSP
C1 REMSP
C1 SETP
C1 OUT
C2 MEAS
C2 LOCSP
C2 REMSP
C2 SETP
C2 OUT
ASEL OUT
AOUT 1
AOUT 2
CALC 1
CALC 2
CALC 3
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
F1
F2
TOTAL 1
TOTAL 2
100 PCT
0 PCT
NONE
Conditioned Analog Input IN1
Conditioned Analog Input IN2
Conditioned Analog Input IN3
Conditioned Analog Input IN4
Conditioned Frequency Input F1
Conditioned Frequency Input F2
Constant, adjustable
Constant, adjustable
Constant, adjustable
Constant, adjustable
Controller 1 Measurement
Controller 1 Local Set Point
Controller 1 Remote Set Point
Controller 1 Active Set Point
Controller 1 Output
Controller 2 Measurement
Controller 2 Local Set Point
Controller 2 Remote Set Point
Controller 2 Active Set Point
Controller 2 Output
Selected Output of Auto Selector
Analog Output 1
Analog Output 2
Result of Calculation 1
Result of Calculation 2
Result of Calculation 3
Analog Input 1
Analog Input 2
Analog Input 3
Analog Input 4
Frequency Input 1
Frequency Input 2
Totalizer 1 Accumulated Value*
Totalizer 2 Accumulated Value*
Constant, fixed at 100 percent
Constant, fixed at 0 percent
No Source
*Lower two bytes of 3-byte number
52
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
MI 018-885 February 1998
Table 4-3. Gate Input List
Name
Source
True State
CI 1
CI 2
ALARM 1
ALARM 2
ALARM 3
ALARM 4
C1 A/M
Closed
Closed
In Alarm
In Alarm
In Alarm
In Alarm
Automatic
W/P
COMMFAIL
C1 EXACT
C2 EXACT
TOTAL 1
Contact Input 1
Contact Input 2
State of Alarm 1
State of Alarm 2
State of Alarm 3
State of Alarm 4
State of Automatic or Manual,
Controller 1
State of Remote or Local, Controller 1
State of Automatic or Manual,
Controller 2
State of Remote or Local, Controller 2
State of Workstation or Panel
Communications Timeout
State of EXACT, Controller 1
State of EXACT, Controller 2
State of Totalizer 1
TOTAL 2
State of Totalizer 2
AUTOSEL
GATE 0
GATE 1
GATE 2
GATE 3
GATE 4
GATE 5
GATE 6
GATE 7
GATE 8
GATE 9
ON
OFF
NONE
Auto Select Output State
Output of Gate 0
Output of Gate 1
Output of Gate 2
Output of Gate 3
Output of Gate 4
Output of Gate 5
Output of Gate 6
Output of Gate 7
Output of Gate 8
Output of Gate 9
Fixed State Input
Fixed State Input
Function Switch Not Used
C1 R/L
C2 A/M
C2 R/L
Remote
Automatic
Remote
Workstation
Timed Out
Enabled
Enabled
Totalizer reached preset value
or counted down to zero
Totalizer reached preset value
or counted down to zero
False = C2 output; True = C1
True
True
True
True
True
True
True
True
True
True
Always
Never
N/A
NOTE:
A switch assignment other than NONE has priority over the W/P, A/M, and R/L keys and the communication link. For
example, if C1 A/M is assigned through Gate 1, the A/M key or a supervisory host command to change A/M status is
ignored.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
53
Implementing Your Configuration
When you have determined the necessary changes for your application, use
the keypad on the front panel to implement the changes.
Figure 4-1. Keypad
CAUTION
W/P
R/L
A/M
SEL
TAG
ACK
Entering the CONFIGuration mode freezes both outputs, ceases all algorithm execution, and blanks the graphics display. Also, when you return
from CONFIG to Normal Operation, the controller is placed in manual
control, local set point (if R/L is configured), and panel (if W/P is configured). The display will be that of Controller 1 (or FUNCtion 1) with the
bargraph identifier positioned over the output (right) bargraph.
Five of the eight keys are used during configuration.
Table 4-4. Keypad
Key
Description
TAG
Used to go from Normal Operation to READ mode and to
return from any point in READ or SET to Normal Operation.
Used to sequence up and down in the program structure
and to change menu entries (i.e., mode, alarm, status, and
limit settings).
Used to step sequentially through all remaining items in
the structure and to “enter” a changed value or status.
Used to return display in minor increments back through
the program structure.
ACK
SEL
54
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
MI 018-885 February 1998
Implementing Your Configuration (cont.)
To go from Normal Operation to CONFIGuration, use the following procedure. This procedure assumes that the factory default passcode is configured.
762 MICRO
0.0
Press TAG
MENU
READ
Press
?
MENU
SET
?
Press ACK
SET
OPTUNE ?
Press
SET
SECURE ?
Press ACK
PASSCODE
=
Press ACK
(3 TIMES) *
SECURE
ALLTUNE ?
Press
(2 TIMES)
SECURE
CONFIG ?
Press ACK
*For default passcode: (blank)(blank)(blank)
CAUTION
MI 018-885
Entering the CONFIGuration mode freezes both outputs, ceases all algorithm execution, and blanks the graphics display. Also, when you return
from CONFIG to Normal Operation, the controller is placed in manual
control, local set point (if R/L is configured), and panel (if W/P is configured). The display will be that of the Controller 1 (or FUNCtion 1) with
the bargraph identifier positioned over the output (right) bargraph.
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
55
Implementing Your Configuration (cont.)
Continue using the ∆, ∇, ACK, and SEL keys, and go to the category and
subdivision of each parameter to be changed. The Location column of the
Configuration Worksheets in Appendix B and the Structure Diagrams in
Appendix C help you get there.
As Figure 4-2 shows, you move sequentially through the structure with the
ACK key and up and down with the ∆ and ∇ keys. The SEL key enables you
to return the display back through the structure in minor increments.
Lastly, you can return to Normal Operation at any time with the TAG key.
The category is on the upper line of the display and the subdivision on the
lower line.
CONFIG
GATES
Pressing the ACK key causes the subdivision to move to the upper line and
its value or status to appear on the lower line.
GATES
GATE 0
Use the ∆ and ∇ keys to change the selection, value or status.
After the change is completed, press the ACK key to “enter” the new selection, value or status. The display then advances to the next item in the
structure.
Figure 4-2. Example Showing Use of Configuration Keys
NORMAL
OPERATION
TAG
TAG
CONFIG
GATES
ACK GATES
GATE 0
TAG
ACK GATE 0
LOGIC
TAG
ACK LOGIC
DIRECT
SEL
SEL
SEL
ACK
SEL
TAG
LOGIC
NOT
SEL
ACK
SEL
GATE 0
INPUT 1
ACK
INPUT 1
NONE
SEL
SEL
INPUT 1
CI 1
TAG
ACK
TAG
ACK
GATES
GATE 1
TAG
= starting point of example
56
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
MI 018-885 February 1998
CAUTION
A selection, value, or status is not entered into the data base until the ACK
key is pressed.
In the READ or SET mode, holding down the ∆, ∇, ACK, and SEL key
causes the displays to sequence automatically.
Values of some parameters are entered or changed one character at a time.
The first character will flash; it may be changed by pressing the ∆ or ∇ key.
The available characters are listed in Table 4-5. Not all parameters use the
entire list.
Table 4-5. List of Characters
Character
Character
9 through 0
.(decimal)
-(minus)
(blank)
A through Z
_(underline)
\
@
?
>
=
<
/
,(comma)
+
*
)
(
’(apostrophe)
(test)
√ (sq root)
°(degree)
Note: Test = All character segments lighted
After changing the first character, enter it by pressing the ACK key. The
next character then flashes. Repeat this process for each character in succession. Use the SEL key to backspace and correct an error. When the final
character is entered, the display changes to the next item in the structure.
NOTE Parameters in the CONFIG section of the structure must be config-
ured before those in the ALLTUNE (or OPTUNE) section.
When the configuration is completed, use the TAG key to return to Normal
Operation.
CAUTION
MI 018-885
At various points in the Configuration section of this instruction, examples
are given. If you implement an example on your instrument, the results are
stored in your configuration module. Thus, the next user may encounter
different entries than are shown in the Standard Factory Configuration column of Appendix B.
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
57
Common Configuration Functions
This section contains the following subjects:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Security • 58
Control Type and Tuning • 58
Input Signals • 59
Input Signal Conditioning and Scaling • 60
Output Signals • 62
Display Features • 62
Auto/Manual Control (A/M) • 63
Security
A PASSCODE enables you to prevent unauthorized personnel from changing the configuration and those categories of values you choose to protect.
The 762CNA Controller is shipped from the factory with a PASSCODE of
three blanks. The passcode may be changed to three other characters. Any
characters from Table 4-5 can be used. The configuration parameter to do
this is NEWPASS. It is found in Location 5-C2 in the structure diagrams.
After you enter the characters and press the ACK key, you are asked to enter
them a second time as a verification (VERIFY). If the two entries match,
the new passcode replaces the previous passcode.
Under the configuration parameter SHOWOP (Location 2 in the structure
diagrams), you can allow or prevent unauthorized personnel from changing
the values of those parameters (TUNE C1, C1 LIMITS, TUNE C2, C2
LIMITS, ALARMS, CONSTS, TOTALS, RD CFG) that may be adjusted
without the use of a PASSCODE (in OPTUNE). ACKnowledge YES for
each parameter group that authorized personnel may adjust in OPTUNE.
Note that SHOWOP categories displayed depend on whether the function
is configured. For example, if neither totalizer is enabled, TOTALS does
not appear under SHOWOP.
Control Type and Tuning
For each controller, the standard algorithms are PI/PID, I, P/PD, and
EXACT control. The factory default is PI/PID. If you select a different
algorithm, you will need to configure a change. You can configure each of
the two control FUNCtions at Location 5-A1 in the structure diagrams.
Next determine your values for the algorithm selected. The parameter limits and the default configuration for Proportional (PF), integral (IF), and
derivative (DF) control are as follows:
Table 4-6. Control Parameter Limits
58
Parameter
Limits
Default
PF
IF
DF
1 and 8000%
0.01 and 200 minutes/repeat
0 and 100 minutes
200
2.0
0.0
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
MI 018-885 February 1998
Control Type and Tuning (cont.)
Note that the PI and PID algorithms are grouped together as are the P and
PD algorithms. To get PI or P, set DF to zero. To get PID or PD, set DF
to a value.
Set Point Lag (SP LAG), the ratio of lead to lag, can be configured between
0 and 1. Zero (0) means that no proportional gain is applied to the set
point; all proportional gain is applied to the measurement. One (1) is used
for a dominant deadtime process (delay). Typically, 0.2 is used for a dominant lag process.
Details of EXACT parameters are discussed in Chapter 6 of this instruction
manual.
BYPASS causes the set point to go directly to output. Make a ON entry to
enable bypass for Controller 1 at TUNE C1 and for Controller 2 at TUNE
C2. The factory default is OFF. Both are at Location 4-A1 in the structure
diagrams.
Input Signals
Analog
Inputs
The 762CNA has four analog inputs (IN1, IN2, IN3, IN4). These inputs
are 4-20 mA dc (through 250-ohm resistors). They can be changed to
1-5 V dc by removing the 250-ohm input termination resistors. One can be
an RTD input. If you use an RTD input, you must configure it as IN1 and
also have the RTD hardware option. IN1 through IN4 can be specified
from the Signal Distribution List (Location 6 in the structure diagrams).
Frequency
Inputs
The frequency/pulse inputs can be two 1 to 9999 Hz inputs or a pair of
Pulse Up/Pulse Down inputs. Frequency rates below 1 Hz are cut off and
ignored, producing the same results as inputs of 0 Hz. When configured as
pulse inputs, F1 is the pulse up input and F2 is the pulse down input. The
instantaneous difference between the pulse up and pulse down input is F2;
the integrated difference is F1. F1 and F2 can be specified from the Signal
Distribution List.
In a pulse set point application (which emulates Foxboro 62HM controllers), the following configuration entries must be made:
MI 018-885
1
Select PULSED at FREQ I/P (Location 5-B2 in the structure diagrams).
2
Configure the SET PT TYPE as R/L (Location 5-G1).
3
Configure LOCTRK as ON (Location 5-H1).
4
Configure SOURCE as CALC n (Location 5-H1).
5
Configure CALC n as L+F (Location 5-C1). Signal F is the scaled
and conditioned version of F2.
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
59
Input Signals (cont.)
All analog or frequency input signals can be conditioned and scaled, characterized, or combined in a variety of calculations. These operations are discussed later in this chapter.
Discrete
Inputs
The controller also has two discrete (non-isolated contact or transistor
switch) inputs, CI1 and CI2. You can use them, for example, to actuate
remote status changes of auto/manual (A/M), remote/local (R/L), workstation/panel (W/P), EXTernal ACKnowledge, tracking functions (MEASTRK and OUTTRK), and totalizer functions (HOLD and RESET). CI1
and CI2 are specified from the Gate Input List.
Input Signal Conditioning and Scaling
Each of the analog and frequency inputs discussed above can be passed
through a Butterworth FILTER adjusted for 0 to 10 minutes, then FORMATted as LINEAR, SQUARED, SQuare ROOTed, or CHARacterized
over one of two selectable series of points. Lastly, an INBIAS may be
applied before a GAIN and an OUTBIAS after the GAIN. The equation is:
[ FORMATted Input + INBIAS ] × GAIN ) + OUTBIAS = Conditioned Input
See Figure 4-3 for a diagram representing the signal conditioning and scaling process.
The order of these functions is reversed during configuration (i.e., OUTBIAS, GAIN, INBIAS, FORMAT, and FILTER) at Location 5-B2 of the
structure diagrams.
Analog inputs IN1, IN2, IN3, and IN4 become signals A, B, C, and D after
signal conditioning and scaling. Likewise, frequency inputs F1 and F2
become E and F.
Four constants may be used, identified as G, H, I, and J. These may be
adjusted through OPTUNE (if allowed) and ALLTUNE at Location 4-B2
of the structure diagrams.
All conditioned inputs (A - F) and the constants (G - J) are available in the
Signal Distribution List (Location 6).
60
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
MI 018-885 February 1998
Figure 4-3. Input Signal Conditioning and Scaling
A Filter
IN 1
Analog Input 1
LIN
SQR
SQD
CHAR1
CHAR2
IN
BIAS
+
GAIN
+
x
+
OUT
BIAS
+
+
+
A
Input Scaling
B Filter
IN 2
Analog Input 2
LIN
SQR
SQD
CHAR1
CHAR2
IN
BIAS
+
GAIN
+
x
+
OUT
BIAS
+
+
+
B
Input Scaling
C Filter
IN 3
Analog Input 3
LIN
SQR
SQD
CHAR1
CHAR2
IN
BIAS
+
GAIN
+
x
+
OUT
BIAS
+
+
+
C
Input Scaling
D Filter
IN 4
Analog Input 4
LIN
SQR
SQD
CHAR1
CHAR2
IN
BIAS
+
GAIN
+
x
+
OUT
BIAS
+
+
+
D
Input Scaling
Freq
Freq Input 1
New Value
+
+
+
F1
E Filter
+
LIN
SQR
SQD
CHAR1
CHAR2
Freq
Input 2
+
x
+
OUT
BIAS
+
+
+
E
Input Scaling
F2
F Filter
Pulse
Up/Down
February 1998
GAIN
+
-
MI 018-885
IN
BIAS
+
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
LIN
SQR
SQD
CHAR1
CHAR2
IN
BIAS
+
GAIN
+
x
+
OUT
BIAS
+
+
+
F
Input Scaling
61
Output Signals
The 762CNA has two analog output signals. AOUT1 is a 4 to 20 mA signal into 500 ohms maximum. AOUT2 can be a 4 to 20 mA or 1 to 5 V dc,
jumper selectable signal. You can configure either at Location 5-C2 in the
structure diagrams to output a signal from the Signal Distribution List.
Note, however, that certain configurations automatically assign the source
of AOUT 1 and AOUT 2.
The controller also has two discrete (non-isolated open collector transistor
switch) outputs, CO1 and CO2. You can use them for status indication of
A/M, R/L, W/P, and alarms. You can also configure them as the destination
for any two of the Boolean gate outputs. Configuration is done at
Location 5-C2 in the structure diagrams to output a signal from the Gate
Input List.
Display Features
TAG
The top line of the alphanumeric display can read a looptag of your choosing during normal operation mode. You can configure the TAGs for both
the first and second controller to be up to a nine character ASCII text string.
Enter the configuration at TAG in Location 5-E1 of the structure diagrams.
Enter the TAG one character at a time as explained in “Implementing Your
Configuration” on page 54.
Display
Variable (in
place of
Looptag)
If an engineering variable is desired in place of a looptag, it may be configured at TOP LINE VARIABLE at Location 5-E1 in the structure diagrams.
Enter its TYPE (LINEAR or TEMP), ENG UNiTS, range (URV and
LRV), and SOURCE (from the Signal Distribution List). Thus, this function provides a simple indication of any assigned SOURCE variable.
Measurement,
Set Point
Display
(MEAS, SP)
In normal operation mode, the engineering scaled value of the measurement
or set point, as identified by the Bargraph Identifier, is located on the second line of the alphanumeric display. Configure this display at MEAS, SP
in Location 5-E2 by specifying its TYPE (LINEAR or TEMPerature),
ENG UNiTS, and range (URV or LRV). If you select TEMPerature, specify the SCALE as IEC 100 or SAMA 100 for an RTD input or T/C J,
T/C K, or T/C E for a thermocouple input from a temperature transmitter.
Also, specify the ENG UNiTS as DEG F or DEG C.
62
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
MI 018-885 February 1998
Auto/Manual Control (A/M)
The controller can be placed in either an automatic (A) or manual (M)
mode. This can be changed by the A/M key on the front of the controller if
the controller is in panel mode (P) and if the function switch (A/M) is configured to NONE. A switch assignment other than NONE has priority
over the A/M key. Auto or Manual control may be specified at
Location 5-G2 under the following conditions:
STARTUP:
FLUNK:
SWITCH:
A/M state upon application of power or restart after a power failure.
A/M state upon loss of serial communications (when in Workstation
mode) between controller and host computer. Besides a choice of
Auto or Manual, the configurator may also select the last status
(LAST A/M) of control before serial communications was lost.
An entry from the Gate Input List here drives the specified SWITCH
to change the controller operation from Auto to Manual or vice
versa. A configuration of ON or to an entry from the Gate Input List
whose logic is in the True state sets the control to the AUTO mode.
Conversely, OFF or (False) sets the control to the MANUAL mode.
A switch assignment other than NONE has priority over the A/M
key or the communication link; e.g., if A/M were assigned through
Gate 1, then the A/M key or a supervisory host command to change
A/M status would be ignored.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
63
Alarms
Critical process signals are often monitored by process alarms that alert
operating personnel to out-of-range or abnormal conditions. Occasionally,
these alarms are used in a non-alert mode for interlocking logic.
This section describes the kinds of alarms available in the controller, how
they operate, and how to enable them. Examples illustrate various situations in which alarms are used.
This section contains the following subjects:
•
•
•
•
•
•
General Information • 64
Form of Alarms • 65
Types of Alarms • 66
Alarm Action • 70
Configuring, Tuning, and Displaying Alarms • 70
Alarm Configuration Examples • 71
General Information
The Controller has four alarms. Each alarm can activate on any one of the
signals from the Signal Distribution List. Each alarm has two alarm levels
and a deadband whose values can be set. Each also has one Boolean output.
You can also configure each alarm to have a specific Form, Type, and Action
as follows:
Table 4-7. Alarm Configurations
Form:
Type:
Action:
Absolute, Deviation, or Rate of Change
High/Low, High/High, or Low/Low
Latching, Nonlatching, or Permissive
For deviation alarms, both the reference and alarmed variables are selected
from the Signal Distribution List.
Measurement and output alarm conditions of Controller 1 and/or Controller 2 can be viewed on the alphanumeric and bargraph displays on the faceplate of the controller. The Output and Measurement bargraphs can each
display one of the four alarms. The alarm must, however, be an absolute or
deviation alarm, not a permissive alarm. Alarms can also be displayed on a
3-bar indicator display. The alarm is only displayed on the bargraph display
of an alarmed variable.
Lastly, in addition to acknowledging alarms with the ACK key, you can configure alarms to be EXTernally ACKnowledged by one of parameters from
the Gate Input List. The ACK key is active even if EXT ACK is used.
The basic configuration of alarms is done in the CONFIGuration section
(Location 2-A2) in the structure diagrams as just described. However, the
alarm level and deadband values are adjusted in the ALLTUNE (OPTUNE)
section (Location 4-A2); the display selections are added in the DISPLAY
section (Location 5-E2, 8-A2, or 9-A2).
64
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
MI 018-885 February 1998
Forms of Alarms
There are three forms of alarms:
• Absolute (ABS)
• Deviation (DEV)
• Rate of Change (ROC)
An ABSolute alarm measures a variable relative to the zero process condition; e.g., temperature measurement or level in a vessel. An ABSolute alarm
has one input variable. This input is the monitored value that is compared
with the configured alarm levels. When the attached monitored value
exceeds the alarm level, an alarm condition occurs and the Boolean output
associated with that alarm is set to True. In the case of Hi/Hi and Lo/Lo
alarms (see “Types of Alarms” on page 66), the second alarm level (Level 1
for Hi/Hi, Level 2 for Lo/Lo) trips the Boolean output.
Absolute
Alarms
Assign the input variable from the Signal Distribution List using the parameter ATTACH at Location 5-B2 in the structure diagrams.
Deviation
Alarms
A DEViation alarm monitors a process variable in relation to a reference
variable. For example, you can use this form to determine how the measurement is performing in relation to the set point, or how “Flow 1” is performing in relation to “Flow 2”. A DEViation alarm has one input that is
the monitored variable and one that is the reference variable. When the difference between the two variables exceeds the configured alarm level, an
alarm condition occurs and the Boolean output associated with that alarm is
set to True.
Select both monitored and reference variables from the Signal Distribution
List. Assign the monitored variable using the parameter ATTACH and the
reference variable using the parameter REF at Location 5-B2 in the structure diagrams.
Rate of
Change
Alarm
MI 018-885
Use a Rate-of-Change alarm when the change of a variable in an increment
of time is important; i.e., the change in temperature per change in unit time
in a reactor. Because of its infrequent use and greater complexity, the rate of
change alarm is discussed in detail later in the “Additional Configuration
Functions” section.
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
65
Types of Alarms
There are three types of alarms:
• High/Low (HI/LO)
• Low/Low (LO/LO)
• High/High (HI/HI)
Each alarm type uses a deadband (DB), a user adjustable parameter that
prevents intermittent alarming when the monitored value hovers around the
alarm levels.
Examples of all alarm types are given on the following pages.
66
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
MI 018-885 February 1998
HIgh/LOw
Alarms
Figure 4-4 and Figure 4-5 show High/Low alarms when used with Absolute and Deviation forms of alarm respectively.
Table 4-8. High/Low alarms
Alarm State
When Monitored Signal Is
Enters High Alarm
Exits High Alarm
Enters Low Alarm
Exits Low Alarm
Greater than the HI alarm level
Less than the HI alarm level minus the deadband
Less than the LO alarm level
Greater than the LO alarm level plus the deadband
Figure 4-4. High/Low Absolute Alarm
% OR
Units
Alarm
Condition
HI
Level 1 Limit
Monitored Variable
Deadband
Deadband
LO
Level 2 Limit
Alarm
Condition
Time
Figure 4-5. High/Low Deviation Alarm
% or
Units
Monitored
Variable
Alarm
Condition
+Dev.
Deadband
HI Level 1 Limit
Ref. Variable
LO Level 2 Limit
-Dev.
Deadband
Alarm
Condition
TIME
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
67
HIgh/HIgh
Alarms
Table 4-9. High/High Alarms
Alarm State
When Monitored Signal Is
Enters Warning
Exits Warning
Enters High Alarm
Exits High Alarm
Greater than the Lower alarm level
Less than the Lower alarm level minus the deadband
Greater than the Higher alarm level
Less than the Higher alarm level minus the deadband
Figure 4-6 and Figure 4-7 show High/High alarms when used with Absolute and Deviation forms of alarm respectively. Note that in the warning
state, the alarm activates the alarm indicator on the front panel but not the
Boolean alarm output. The alarm condition activates this output.
Figure 4-6. High/High Absolute Alarm
% or
Units
Deadband
Level 1 Limit
HI/HI
Monitored
Variable
HI
Level 2 Limit
Alarm
Condition
Deadband
Warning
Time
Figure 4-7. High/High Deviation Alarm
Warning
% or
Units
Alarm
HI/HI
HI
Level 1
Limit
Level 2
Limit
Condition
Deadband
Monitored
Variable
Deadband
+Dev.
Ref. Variable
-Dev.
Time
68
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
MI 018-885 February 1998
LOw/LOw
Alarms
Table 4-10. Low/Low Alarms
Alarm State
When Monitored Signal Is
Enters Warning
Exits Warning
Enters Low Alarm
Exits Low Alarm
Less than the Higher alarm level
Greater than the Higher alarm level plus the deadband
Less than the Lower alarm level
Greater than the Lower alarm level plus the deadband
Figure 4-8 and Figure 4-9 show Low/Low alarms when used with Absolute
and Deviation forms of alarm respectively. Note that similar warning and
alarm condition states occur as in the High/High alarm type.
Figure 4-8. Low/Low Absolute Alarm
% or
Units
Warning
Alarm
Condition
Deadband
LO
Level 1
Limit
Deadband
Monitored
Variable
LO/LO
Level 2 Limit
Time
Figure 4-9. Low/Low Deviation Alarm
% or
Units
Monitored Variable
Warning
+Dev.
-Dev.
LO
Ref. Variable
Deadband
Level 1 Limit
Deadband
LO/LO
Level 2 Limit
Alarm
Condition
Time
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
69
Alarm Action
There are three kinds of alarm action:
• Latching (LAT)
• Nonlatching (NON LAT)
• Permissive (PERMISVE)
A LATching action requires that the user always acknowledge an alarm state
either during or after the time that the alarm condition exists.
A NONLATching action provides notification during transient alarm conditions, but is self clearing once these conditions no longer exist.
A PERMISsiVE action is used to monitor signals to generate logic-only
action. This action requires no operator interaction.
A summary of alarm action characteristics is given in Table 4-11.
Table 4-11. Alarm Actions
Alarm Action Characteristics
Latching
Nonlatching
Permissive
Both warning and alarm state
require acknowledgment
Exiting warning or alarm state
cancels requirement to acknowledge alarm
Alarm indicator flashes when
acknowledgment required
Alarm indicator ON continuous in
warning or alarm state following
acknowledgment
Boolean output is TRUE in
alarm state
Yes
No
Allowed, not
required
Yes
No; Cannot be
acknowledged
N/A
Yes
Yes
Never; no display
Yes
Yes
Never; no display
Yes
Yes, only
Yes
until the alarm
state is
ACKed
No
No
Boolean output is TRUE in
warning state
No
Configuring, Tuning, and Displaying Alarms
Configuring the form, type, and action of each of your alarms as well as
attaching the selected input variable and reference variable (in the case of a
Deviation alarm) is done in CONFIG at Location 5-A2 in the structure diagrams.
Tuning the alarm levels and the deadband values is done in ALLTUNE (or
OPTUNE) at Location 4-A2 in the structure diagrams. Level 1 is assumed
to be the higher of the two alarm levels; i.e., Level 1 is HI in a HIgh/LOw
alarm, HI/HI in a HIgh/HIgh alarm, and LO in a LOw/LOw alarm.
Level 2 is LO in a HIgh/LOw alarm, HI in a HIgh/HIgh alarm, and
LO/LO in a LOw/LOw alarm.
Configuring measurement or output alarm conditions to display on the
faceplate is done in DISPLAY at Location 5-E2 or 9-A2 in the structure diagrams.
70
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
MI 018-885 February 1998
Configuring, Tuning, and Displaying Alarms (cont.)
NOTE If more than one alarm is configured for measurement or for out-
put, only the first (lowest numbered) alarm will be displayed. Rate of
change alarms cannot be displayed.
Configuring alarms to display on a 3 bar indicator is done at Location 8-B2
in the structure diagrams. An alarm is only displayed on the bargraph display of an alarmed variable. For an alarm to be displayed on the bargraph of
a 3-bar indicator, the bar must be sourced to the same parameter that the
alarm is attached and the alarm display must be turned on.
Alarm Configuration Examples
Example 1
An application requires a High/Low absolute alarm on the measurement to
Controller 1. The alarm levels are to be 10 and 90% and have a dead band
of 2%. The alarm output, when active, should close a contact output for as
long as the alarm condition persists or until the alarm is acknowledged
(nonlatching action). Finally, the alarm levels must be indicated on the measurement bargraph display.
NOTE The parameters in CONFIG must be configured before those in
ALLTUNE.
1
Access CONFIG ALARMS (Location 5-A2) and go to
ALARM 1.
2
Select HI/LO from the menu for TYPE.
3
Select NON LAT from the menu for ACTION.
4
Select ABS from the menu for FORM.
5
Connect this alarm to the Controller 1 Measurement by selecting C1
MEAS from the menu for ATTACH.
6
Go to EXT ACK (Location 5-B2) and select NONE from the menu.
7
Access CONFIG OUTPUTS (Location 5-C2) and select ALARM 1
from the menu for CO 1. This connects the alarm to a contact
output.
8
Access FUNC 1 DISPLAY (Location 5-E1) and go to DISPLAY
ALARMS (Location 5-E2).
9
Select MEAS ALM from the menu and then select YES.
NOTE To assign the alarm levels you must now exit the CONFIGuration
Mode and enter the ALLTUNE mode.
MI 018-885
10
Access ALLTUNE ALARMS (Location 4-A2) and go to
ALARM 1.
11
Select a value of 90 for LEVEL 1. (For any alarm TYPE, LEVEL 1
is always the numerically greater value.)
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
71
Example 1
(cont.)
12
Select a value of 10 for LEVEL 2.
13
Select a value of 2 for DB (dead band). The configuration of this
example is now complete.
This may be shown pictorially as:
C1 MEAS
C1 PID
ATTACH
ALARM 1 OUTPUT
(HI/LO)
(NONLAT)
(ABS)
Level 1 = 90%
Level 2 = 10%
DB = 2%
Example 2
CO 1
Bargraph Display
A High/Low, nonlatching, deviation alarm is required on the measurement
of a remote/local set point controller. The alarm is to be activated when the
measurement deviates from the remote set point by some level (C1 MEAS C1 REMSP).
[The intent of this example is to demonstrate the configuration of a deviation alarm. The other attributes of this alarm (Output, Display requirements, Levels, and Dead Band), if given, would be configured as in
Example 1, Steps 7 - 13.]
1
Access CONFIG ALARMS (Location 5-A2) and go to
ALARM 1.
2
Select HI/LO from the menu for TYPE.
3
Select NON LAT from the menu for ACTION.
4
Select DEV from the menu for FORM.
A Deviation alarm has two inputs: the alarmed variable (the measurement in this example) and a REFerence variable.
5
Select C1 REMSP from the menu for REF.
6
Select C1 MEAS from the menu for ATTACH.
7
Configure Output, Display, Levels, and Dead Band requirements to
complete this example.
R
C1 REMSP
Set point
L
C1 MEAS
REF
C1 PID
ALARM 1
(HI/LO)
(NONLAT)
(DEV)
ATTACH
72
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
MI 018-885 February 1998
Example 3
The output state of a deviation alarm determines whether the EXACT state
is ON or OFF and whether Contact Output 2 is open or closed.
NOTE For this example assume that ALARM 1 is the alarm in question
and that its configuration has been completed. Further assume that Controller 1 has been configured to the point of selecting the TYPE of control.
MI 018-885
1
Access CONFIG FUNC 1 (Location 5-A1) and select EXACT.
2
At EXACT SW in Location 5-G3, select ALARM 1 from the menu.
This selection means that EXACT is activated (turned ON) when
ALARM 1 is in the alarm state.
3
Access CONFIG OUTPUTS (Location 5-C2) and select CO 2.
4
Select ALARM 1 from the menu for CO 2. This selection means
that Contact Output 2 is closed when ALARM 1 is in the alarm
state. The configuration of this example is now complete.
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
73
Example 4
A permissive alarm, connected to scaled variable C, is used to activate a
logic gate whose output is used as a Boolean operator in a calculation. The
use of such an operator as a switch is discussed in “Example 3: Signal
Switching” on page 84.
1
Access CONFIG ALARMS (Location 5-A2) and go to ALARM
1.
2
Select HI/HI for Type, PERMISIVE for Action, and ABS for Form.
3
Select C from the menu for ATTACH.
4
Access CONFIG GATES (Location 5-A3), go to GATE 0 (GATE 0
is DIRECT), and select ALARM 1 from the menu for INPUT 1.
5
Access ALLTUNE ALARMS (Location 4-A2) and assign values for
LEVEL 1, LEVEL 2, and DB for ALARM 1.
NOTE Since the Warning state of a permissive alarm does not trigger
alarm logic, the two levels are usually set to the same value.
6
Access CONFIG CALC and go to CALC 1. If G is to be a constant
used if Gate 0 is in the true state and H if in the False state, configure
CALC 1 = G0H.
This may be shown pictorially as:
True
Variable C
74
ATTACH
ALARM 1 INPUT 1
(HI/HI)
GATE 0
(PER)
(ABS)
False
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
G
CALC 1
H
MI 018-885 February 1998
Example 5
A Deviation alarm is required to monitor the difference between the measurement and the set point of a process. This alarm is to be displayed on the
controller. A second alarm is also required for monitoring the level of a
tank.
1
Access CONFIG ALARMS (Location 5-A2) and go to
ALARM 1.
2
Select HI/LO for TYPE, NONLAT for ACTION, and DEV for
FORM.
3
Connect this alarm to Controller 1 Measurement by selecting C1
MEAS from the menu for ATTACH. Select C1 SETP for REF.
4
Go to ALARM 2 and select HI/LO for TYPE, PERMISIVE for
ACTION, and ABS for FORM.
5
ATTACH this alarm to IN 4 scaled and conditioned variable D to
which the level transmitter is connected.
6
Access CONFIG OUTPUTS (Location 5-C2) and select ALARM 1
from the menu for CO 1 and ALARM 2 for CO 2.
7
Access FUNC 1 DISPLAY (Location 5-E1) and go to DISPLAY
ALARMS (Location 5-E2. Select MEAS ALARMS from the menu
and then select YES.
8
Access ALLTUNE ALARMS (Location 4-A2) and go to
ALARM 1. Select the desired values for LEVEL 1, LEVEL 2 and
DB.
9
Go to ALARM 2 and select the desired values of LEVEL 1,
LEVEL 2 and DB for ALARM 2.
This may be shown pictorially as:
C1 SETP
C1 MEAS
D
MI 018-885
February 1998
REF
ATTACH
ATTACH
ALARM 1
(HI/LO)
(NONLAT)
(DEV)
ALARM 2
(HI/LO)
(PERMISVE)
(ABS)
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
CO 1
CO 2
75
Alternate Station Configurations
This section contains the following subjects:
•
•
•
•
•
Dual Controller • 76
Cascade Controller • 76
Auto Selector Controller • 78
Auto Manual Station • 79
Indicator Station • 79
Dual Controller
You can use the 762CNA as two controllers with independent control strategies. All control functions (P, I, PI, PD, PID, and EXACT) are available to
each loop. Specify the STRATEGY as TWO FUNC at Location 5-B1 in
the structure diagrams. Then configure the first loop in CONFIG FUNC 1
and the second loop at CONFIG FUNC 2, both at Location 5-A1 in the
structure diagrams.
Cascade Controller
You can also configure the 762CNA to operate as a cascade controller. As
such, the output of Controller 1 (primary controller) is used as the set point
or ratio input of Controller 2 (secondary controller). The configuration
allows bumpless transfers between auto/manual modes and between
remote/local set point modes. To configure the 762CNA as a cascade controller, specify the STRATEGY as CASCADE at Location 5-B1 in the structure diagrams. Then configure the primary controller at FUNC 1 and the
secondary controller at FUNC 2, both at Location 5-A1 in the structure
diagrams.
Example
76
A single station cascade controller is required as shown in Figure 4-10. As
steam is drawn from the header, the pressure drops, reducing the flow to the
heat exchanger and causing fluctuations in heated liquid temperature. By
measuring the steam flow, the secondary controller can quickly adjust the
steam flow to compensate for pressure fluctuations, thus minimizing the
temperature variation seen in the heated fluid.
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
MI 018-885 February 1998
Example
(cont.)
Figure 4-10. Single Cascade Controller Example
Steam Header
Cold Liquid
Heat Exchanger
FT
RTD
C2 MEAS
FIC
Heated Liquid
C2 REMSP
C1 OUT
TIC
C1 MEAS
INT FBK
The primary is a temperature controller (RTD Option is used) and the secondary is a flow controller. The integral feedback (INT FBK) to the primary is the measurement of the secondary.
For this example, start with configuration of STRATEGY to CASCADE.
Next, configure the primary, then the secondary, and finally the inputs.
1
Access CONFIG STRATEGY (Location 5-A1) and select CASCADE from the menu.
2
Access CONFIG FUNC 1 and go to DISPLAY (Location 5-E1).
3
At this point you would configure MEAS, SP TYPE as TEMP, and
then the SCALE, ENG UNiTS, and range (URV and LRV), if
given, in the example at Location 5-E2 and 5-E3.
4
Access CONFIG FUNC 1 and go to MEAS (Location 5-G2).
Select LINEAR from the menu for FORMAT.
5
Select A from the menu for SOURCE. INPUT 1 must be used for
an RTD and A is INPUT 1 after signal conditioning.
6
Access CONFIG FUNC 2 and go to DISPLAY (Location 5-E1).
7
At MEAS, SP (Location 5-E2), go to TYPE and select LINEAR.
8
Access CONFIG FUNC 2 and go to MEAS (Location 5-G2).
Select B from the menu for SOURCE. (Flow Measurement)
9
Access CONFIG INPUTS and go to INPUTS A (Location 5-B2).
10
Go to FORMAT and select LINEAR from the menu.
11
Go to INPUTS B and repeat Step 10.
This completes the configuration of the requirements given for this
example.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
77
Auto Selector Controller
You can also configure your instrument to operate as a two-controller auto
selector station, as shown in Figure 4-11. In auto selector mode, a single
valve is controlled by more than one controller. Typical applications are processes such as shown in the diagram in which a vessel is normally controlled
to maintain a certain temperature, but at other times must be controlled to
maintain pressure.
As long as pressure is within an acceptable range, temperature is controlled.
If pressure rises above a specified value, steam flow must be decreased to
keep the pressure within range. As pressure rises and falls, control is
required to transfer smoothly from temperature to pressure and vice versa.
Because the outputs of two controllers are tied together and control shifts
from one to the other, feedback is provided to prevent wind-up in the controller that is not currently active. If this were not provided, control might
overshoot wildly whenever control is transferred from one controller to the
other.
Figure 4-11. Typical Auto Selector Control Application
Controller
PIC
TIC
PRESSURE
VESSEL
STEAM
To configure the 762CNA as an auto selector controller, specify the
STRATEGY as AUTO SEL at Location 5-B1 in the structure diagrams.
Next, specify TYPE to be HI SELECT, LO SELECT, or GATE 4. For HI
SELECT, the higher output (C1 OUT or C2 OUT) is selected; for LO
SELECT, the lower output is selected. When GATE 4 is TRUE, C1 OUT
is selected; when FALSE, C2 OUT is selected. If configured as HI
SELECT or LO SELECT, specify if the TRK MAN feature is to be used.
TRK MAN connects the OUT TRK switches and signals so that placing
one controller in MANUAL, puts the other controller into track. Then configure the first controller as FUNC 1 and the second controller as FUNC 2,
both at Location 5-A1 in the structure diagrams.
78
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
MI 018-885 February 1998
Auto/Manual Station
You may also configure the 762CNA as one or two auto/manual transfer
stations. If a controller or indicator is configured, only one auto/manual
station is available. Configuring your instrument as an auto/manual station
will enable you to manually select either an incoming signal or a manuallyadjusted signal and send the results to a valve or other receiver. This allows
you to interrupt a signal that is sourced from another device and manually
take control of it. In addition, all of the supporting functions available in the
controller (e.g., calculation blocks) are available in the auto/manual station.
To configure the 762CNA as an auto/ manual station, specify the STRATEGY as ONE FUNC or TWO FUNC at Location 5-A1 in the structure
diagrams. Then configure FUNC 1, FUNC 2, or both as A/M STN at
Location 5-B1 in the structure diagrams. From there go to Location 9 to
configure the details of your auto/manual station. Configure the set point
display type to NONE to eliminate the normal controller set point function
and bargraph.
NOTE Check the BIAS under OPTUNE or ALLTUNE, as it affects the
output when in AUTO mode. For proper operation as an A/M Station,
the BIAS should be set to zero.
Indicator Station
You can also use the 762CNA as one or two 3-variable indicators. Each
variable has its own bargraph, digital engineering units, and loop tag. If a
controller or auto manual station is configured, only one 3-variable indicator is available. To configure the 762CNA as a 3-variable indicator:
MI 018-885
1
Specify the STRATEGY as ONE FUNC or TWO FUNC at
Location 5-B1 in the structure diagrams.
2
Configure FUNC 1, FUNC 2, or both as 3 BAR IND at
Location 5-B1 in the structure diagrams.
3
Go to Location 8 to configure the details of each of the bargraphs of
your 3-variable indicator.
4
Specify a 9-character loopTAG. If a blank TAG line is desired, then
blank entries must be made.
5
Specify the TYPE of indication (LINEAR or TEMP), ENG UNiTS
and range (URV and LRV). If you select TEMPerature, specify the
SCALE as IEC 100 or SAMA 100 for an RTD input or T/C J,
T/C K, or T/C E for a temperature transmitter thermocouple input.
Specify the ENG UNiTS as DEG F or DEG C.
6
Specify the SOURCE of the variable indicated from the Signal Distribution List. A SOURCE selection of NONE blanks the respective bargraph and its digital display.
7
Specify for each variable, whether or not alarms should be displayed
at Location 8-B2. For an alarm to appear on a given bargraph, there
must be an alarm ATTACHED to the SOURCE of that bargraph.
Alarms are configured at Location 5-A2.
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
79
Additional Configuration Functions
This section contains the following subjects:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
80
Logic Gates • 81
Calculations • 82
Dynamic Compensation • 86
Totalizers • 89
Set Point • 91
Set Point Limits • 93
Ratio Control • 93
Output Summing and Multiplying • 94
Output Tracking • 94
Split Range Output • 94
Output Limits • 98
Output Action • 99
Output Upon Restart (STARTUP) • 99
Output Reverse • 99
Output Bargraph • 99
Characterizers • 100
Nonlinear Control • 100
pH Display • 100
Serial Communications • 101
Toggle • 102
Batch Control • 103
Integral Feedback • 103
Rate of Change Alarms • 104
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
MI 018-885 February 1998
Logic Gates
There are five single input gates and five dual input gates. See Table 4-12.
Each gate is configured by selecting the LOGIC and then selecting the
source of the INPUT from the Gate Input List. Gates 0 through 4 are the
single input gates and each one is configured DIRECT or NOT. Gates 5
through 9 are the dual input gates and each one is configured OR, NOR,
AND, NAND, XOR, or XNOR. The configuration is done at
Location 5-A3 in the structure diagrams.
Table 4-12. Configuring Logic Gates
Gate
Logic
Input 1
Input 2
Output
0-4
DIRECT
N/A
0-4
NOT
5-9
OR
5-9
NOR
5-9
AND
5-9
NAND
5-9
XOR
5-9
XNOR
True
False
True
False
True
True
False
False
True
True
False
False
True
True
False
False
True
True
False
False
True
True
False
False
True
True
False
False
True
False
False
True
True
True
True
False
False
False
False
True
True
False
False
False
False
True
True
True
False
True
True
False
True
False
False
True
N/A
True
False
True
False
True
False
True
False
True
False
True
False
True
False
True
False
True
False
True
False
True
False
True
False
When gate states are read on the display (Location 1-C3), True status is represented by the term “closed” and false status by the term “open”.
Gates are cascadeable. They are evaluated in ascending order once each 100
milliseconds. They are intended primarily for combinational rather than
sequential logic. See Example 3 on page 84 and Example 4 on page 85 in
the Calculation Examples section.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
81
Calculations
The output of the CALCulation blocks can be derived from a calculation
involving a number of inputs. These inputs may be direct inputs to the controller, conditioned and scaled inputs, constants, or the output of another
CALCulation block.
The characters available for use in the equations are listed in Table 4-13.
Table 4-13. Characters for Use in Calculations
Character Description
Character Description
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
@
(
√
)
*
/
+
>
<
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(blank)
Analog Input A
Analog Input B
Analog Input C
Analog Input D
Frequency Input E
Frequency Input F
Constant G
Constant H
Constant I
Constant J
C2 Local Set Point
C1 Local Set Point
C1 Measurement
C2 Measurement
C1 Output
C2 Output
C2 Remote Set Point
C1 Remote Set point
C1 Active Set point
C2 Active Set point
AOUT 2 Output
TOTAL 1*
TOTAL 2*
Output of Calculation CALC 1
Output of Calculation CALC 2
Output of Calculation CALC 3
AOUT 1 Output
Open Bracket
Square Root Brackets
Closed Bracket
Multiplication Operator
Division Operator
Subtraction Operator
Addition Operator
Greater than (high select)
Less than (low select)
Output of Gate 0
Output of Gate 1
Output of Gate 2
Output of Gate 3
Output of Gate 4
Output of Gate 5
Output of Gate 6
Output of Gate 7
Output of Gate 8
Output of Gate 9
Terminates the Equation
*Lower two bytes of 3-byte number
Each equation may have as many as nine characters. Each character is
selected using the up and down arrow keys. In each position in the equation, only those characters that may be entered are available in the selection
list. For example, a variable can not follow a variable and is not offered for
selection at that point. The selected character is entered using the ACK key.
The cursor then moves one position to the right.
The usual rules of mathematics apply. However, there are a few additional
rules.
82
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
MI 018-885 February 1998
Calculations (cont.)
1 To save space, if there is an open bracket with no associated closed
bracket, there is an implied closed bracket to the right of the rightmost character. Similarly, if there is a closed bracket with no associated open bracket, there is an implied open bracket to the left of
the leftmost character. For example, (A/B)*(D+H) has 11 characters and thus exceeds the limit of nine. This can be made acceptable by rewriting the equation as A/B)*(D+H.
2
A square root is treated like an open bracket during evaluation except
that the square root is taken after evaluating the contents of the
bracket. For example, in the expression A * √ (B + C), B is added to
C, then the square root of the sum is taken and multiplied times A.
3
The left argument of a gate is selected in the True state and the right
argument in the False state. For example, in the equation CALC 1 =
A0B, CALC 1 = A if the output of Gate 0 is True but CALC 1 = B
if the output of Gate 0 is False. Thus gates can perform switch functions.
4
The order of evaluation is:
Contents of a bracket pair
All gates (switches) left to right
All selectors left to right
All multiplications and divisions left to right
All additions and subtractions left to right
The SEL key will move the cursor one position to the left. If the SEL
key is pressed when the cursor is in the leftmost position, the equation
entry is aborted. If in going back to make a change, the up or down
arrow key is used to select a different category from the current selected
character, the characters to the right of the cursor position are blanked.
Several examples are given below to help you understand how to configure
this powerful function.
Example 1:
Simple Math
A controller is used for pressure-temperature compensated head flow. The
equation measurement = √hP/T applies. The head is INput 1; the pressure,
INput 2; and the temperature, INput 3. Because the inputs and output are
expressed in percent of range, a scaling factor, G, is required. Its value is set
in ALLTUNE.
To enter this, choose CALC 1 (or CALC 2 or CALC 3) to be the calculation. The scaled INputs 1, 2, and 3 are A, B, and C respectively.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
83
Example 1:
Simple Math
(cont.)
Nine characters can be entered to form an equation. Since the √ is treated
like an open bracket, all terms to the right (up to a closed bracket if there is
one) are evaluated and then the result is square rooted. Therefore, the equation is CALC 1 = √A*B*G/C and the calculation entry is √A*B*G/C at
Location 5-C1 in the structure diagrams. Only eight of the available nine
character spaces were required.
Later in the configuration, CALC 1 is assigned as the SOURCE of the Controller 1 measurement (FUNC 1 MEAS) at location 5-G2 in the structure
diagrams.
Example 2:
Signal
Selecting
An application requires selection of the measurement based on the highest
of three temperature transmitter inputs. INputs 1, 2, and 3 are utilized.
The scaled INputs 1, 2, and 3 are A, B, and C respectively. CALC 1 is chosen to be the calculation variable. The equation is CALC 1 = A>B>C and
the calculation entry is A>B>C at Location 5-C1 in the structure diagrams.
The result of CALC 1 will be the highest value of A or B or C. Later in the
configuration, CALC 1 is assigned as the SOURCE of the Controller 1
measurement (FUNC 1 MEAS) at location 5-G2 in the structure diagrams.
This completes the application requirement. It is shown pictorially as:
Example 3:
Signal
Switching
IN 1
Scaling
A
IN 2
Scaling
B
IN 3
Scaling
C
CALC 1
SOURCE
C1 MEAS
Depending on the state of an external contact, either one of two set points
are required by the controller.
Gates 0 through 9 behave like switches when used as operators in a calculation. If the gate output is true, the variable or expression to the left of the
gate is used. If the gate output is false, the variable or expression to the
right is used.
CALC 1 is chosen to be the calculation variable. Constants G and H are
used to store the two set points. The equation is CALC 1 = G0H and the
calculation entry is G0H, where 0 is the output of Gate 0. The calculation
entry is made at Location 5-C1 in the structure diagrams.
84
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
MI 018-885 February 1998
Example 3:
Signal
Switching
(cont.)
The input of Gate 0 is assigned to a contact input to cause its state to
change. If the controller is configured for remote/local (R/L) set point
operation and CALC 1 is assigned as the source of the remote set point,
either the value of G or H will become the set point depending on the state
of Gate 0. This is shown pictorially below:
True
INPUT 1
CI 1
L
G
SOURCE
R
CALC 1
GATE 0
SET POINT
C1 PID
H
False
NOTE See Alarm Configuration “Example 4” on page 74 to see how a
Permissive alarm can trigger a switch.
Example 4:
Using Gates
Together
Following up on the previous example, two or more gates may be used
together. If we want the result of CALC 1 to be A if Gate 1 is in the true
state and B if Gate 1 is in the false state, the equation is CALC 1 = A1B. If
we want the results of that equation to be further modified to be C if Gate 2
is in the false state, the equation becomes CALC 1 = (A1B)2C and the calculation entry is (A1B)2C. This expression could be simplified as A1B)2C
with the same results. This is shown pictorially as:
True
A
GATE 1
CALC 1
B
False
GATE 2
False
C
It may also be expressed as:
MI 018-885
GATE 1
GATE 2
CALC 1
True
False
True
False
True
True
False
False
A
B
C
C
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
85
Example 5:
Ramping
Set Point
A ramp can be generated by taking advantage of the calculation function’s
capability to reuse a calculation within the same expression.
CALC1 = CALC1 + G will create a ramp since the value of CALC1 is
incremented by the constant G in each computation cycle.
Furthermore, if the calculation is expanded to be CALC1 = (CALC1 + G)
< H, the ramp will continue as long as its value is less than the constant
value H and will stop ramping when its value reaches H.
Symbolically, this appears as X + G ) < ( H in the calculation entry.
If the controller is configured for Remote/ Local (R/L) set point operation
and CALC1 is assigned as the source of the remote set point, then the set
point will be the ramping value up to a maximum value of constant H. This
is shown pictorially as:
+
CALC 1
+
<
R
C1 SETP
G
H
L
Dynamic Compensation
Dynamic Compensation is used often in feedforward control strategies to
help optimize the model response.
The result of CALC 3 can be passed through a dynamic compensator prior
to signal distribution. The dynamic compensator is composed of DEADTIME and LEADLAG functions, each with its own FOLLOW switch. The
DEADTIME precedes the LEADLAG and is the input of the LEADLAG
function. The ratio of lead to lag is controlled by a user specified GAIN factor. The result may also be subjected to a specified bias. The lag is controlled
by specifying lag time (T). See Figure 4-12 and Figure 4-13.
The user can also configure an impulse option. If this option is configured,
the GAIN is applied as usual but the steady state settles out to a zero level
(plus BIAS) rather than at the new input value. If either POSITIVE or
NEGATIVE impulse modes are configured, only a positive or negative shift
in the input value is detected and the corresponding output pulse is positive
or negative (again returning to the bias baseline at the lag time rate). The
configuration for both a POSITIVE and NEGATIVE impulse option is
BIPOLAR. See Figure 4-12 and Figure 4-14.
86
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
MI 018-885 February 1998
Dynamic Compensation (cont.)
When a process variable (CALC 3) connected to the function varies by
some amount (delta), the block output value will lag, track, or lead the
CALC 3 change, depending on whether a gain of 0 (lag), 1 (track), or n>1
is specified.
Figure 4-12. Dynamic Compensation
Calc 1
Calc 2
*Dync Off
On (True)
None Off
Impulse
(False)
*
Deadtime
Dync
On
Calc 3
Impulse
Bias
On
(True)
None
Deadtime
Follow
Switch
Calc 3
Leadlag
None
Off (False)
* Switch Position
Leadlag
Defined by Configuration
(Impulse)
Follow
Switch
Figure 4-13. Nonimpulse Mode
∆
Gain = 0<n<1
First Order Lag
∆
Gain = 1
Track
2∆
Gain = n>1
Lead
MI 018-885
February 1998
2∆
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
87
Figure 4-14. Impulse Mode
Gain
=0
Gain
=1
Impulse
Bipolar
∆
∆
Impulse Positive
Impulse Negative
As shown in Figure 4-13, lead action is applied in the form of an instantaneous amplification of the change in CALC 3 value (delta). The increase in
the block output value lags, or decays, to a steady state representing the new
level of CALC 3 (plus any user specified BIAS applied to the output of the
function. The time constant required to settle out is configured as LEADLAG TIME by the user. Lag action is applied by specifying a GAIN of 0, in
which case the output change in value simply lags the CALC 3 step change
by the specified LEADLAG TIME. With a GAIN of 1, the output value
follows (tracks) the input (CALC 3) value.
If the optional IMPULSE mode is configured, the GAIN is applied as in the
nonIMPULSE mode, but the steady state settles out to a zero level (plus
BIAS) rather than at the new input (CALC 3) value. If either POSITIVE or
NEGATIVE IMPULSE modes are configured, only a positive or negative
shift in the input value will be detected, and the corresponding output pulse
will be positive and negative respectively (again returning to the bias baseline with the LEADLAG TIME exponential decay). See Figure 4-14.
The DEADTIME and LEADLAG functions each have their own FOLLOW switches which can be used to bypass either or both functions when
the state of these switches is TRUE. When one of these functions are
employed, and its follow switch is activated, the output jumps to the input.
See Figure 4-15. Any entry from the Gate Input List can be used to drive
the Deadtime and Leadlag Follow switches.
88
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
MI 018-885 February 1998
Figure 4-15. Follow Switches
∆
INPUT
FOLLOW OFF
OUTPUT
FOLLOW ON
OUTPUT
Totalizers
Up to two 7-digit totalizers are available. The totalizers can be configured
to integrate up to a preset value or down from a preset value to zero and
produce a logic event output. Any internal or external signal can be totalized.
Figure 4-16. Totalizer
Assignable signal for TOTAL 1, 2
PRESET
Input
DEC PT
(position)
SOURCE
nnnnnn . n
TOTAL 1, 2
Totalized Value
(7 digits plus configurable
decimal point position)
Logic Output
(Assignable Signal)
TYPE (Count up or down)
CNT/SEC
RESET
HOLD
Totalization and EXACT tuning are mutually exclusive. For example, if one
controller is configured for EXACT tuning, only the other faceplate can be
configured for totalization; if both controllers are configured for EXACT
tuning, no totalizers will be available. However, if FUNCtion 1 is configured for EXACT, a signal associated with FUNCtion 1 can be totalized with
the totalizer in FUNCtion 2.
MI 018-885
1
Begin CONFIGuration of a Totalizer at Location 5-A1 in the
structure diagrams.
2
At the prompt TOTAL n, select YES and ACKnowledge if you wish
to configure the totalizer.
3
Specify its TAG, the SOURCE of what is being totalized from the
Signal Distribution List, the CouNT/SECond (at 100% signal
level), the DECimal PoinT position in the totalizer display, the
events from the Gate Input List that you wish to HOLD (deactivate)
and RESET the totalizer, and the TYPE of totalizer (COUNT UP or
COUNT DOWN).
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
89
Totalizers (cont.)
Tune the totalizer at Location 5-A3 in the structure diagrams by
specifying TOTAL (the starting point if not zero or the preset value),
PRESET (the value it is to count up to or down from), and STATE
(whether the totalizer is to be enabled [COUNT] or disabled
[HOLD] or RESET). The STATE is only available in the menu at
this location when the HOLD and/or RESET switches in the totalizer configuration menu (Location 5-B1) have been sourced to
NONE.
4
Example 1:
Inventory
Control
A process flow requires continuous totalization. The totalizer source is conditioned signal A from analog input 1. The totalizer is to count up. Since
totalization is continuous, the HOLD and RESET logic inputs are not
required. The scale factor is set to produce 3600 counts/minute
(60 counts/second) when the flow rate is at 100%.
1
Begin configuration at TOTAL 1 at Location 5-A1 in the structure diagrams.
2
If TOTAL 1 reads NO, change to YES.
3
Specify desired TAG.
4
Specify SOURCE as signal A.
5
Specify CNT/SEC as 60.0 counts/second.
6
Specify DEC PT as 1 (meaning one place from the right).
7
Specify HOLD and RESET as OFF. This prevents the totalizer from
being interrupted (HOLD) or cleared (RESET) unless reconfigured.
8
Specify TYPE as COUNT UP.
This is shown pictorially as:
DEC PT = 1
SOURCE
A
TOTAL 1
Display
TYPE = COUNT UP
CNT/SEC = 60.0
HOLD = OFF
RESET = OFF
90
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
MI 018-885 February 1998
Example 2:
Batching
A totalizer is used to batch 150,000 pounds of a product. The product rate
is computed in a calculation. The totalizer is reset manually by the operator.
A logic signal trips a solenoid when the batch ends. The scale factor is set to
produce 100 counts/second when the product rate is 100%.
1
Begin configuration at TOTAL 1 in Location 5-A1 in the structure diagrams.
2
If TOTAL 1 reads NO, change to YES.
3
Specify desired TAG.
4
Specify SOURCE as CALC 1.
5
Specify CNT/SEC as 100.
6
Specify DEC PT as 1 (meaning one place from the right).
7
Specify HOLD as TOTAL 1 from the Gate Input List. This ensures
that the totalizer will stop when the PRESET value is reached.
8
Specify RESET as NONE. This allows the TOTAL to be RESET
(cleared to zero) in OPTUNE or ALLTUNE at Location 4-B3 in
the structure diagrams.
9
Specify TYPE as COUNT UP.
10
Go to Location 4- B3 in the structure and specify PRESET 1 as
150,000.
11
Go to CO 1 at Location 5-C2 in the structure and select TOTAL 1
from the menu to actuate CO 1 for the solenoid.
This is shown pictorially as:
PRESET = 150,000
DEC PT = 1
SOURCE
CALC 1
TOTAL 1
Display
TYPE = COUNT UP
CO 1
CNT/SEC = 100
RESET = NONE
HOLD = TOTAL 1
Set Point
The set point may be configured as LOCAL, REMOTE/LOCAL (R/L), or
RATIO. Whatever your selection, you may configure the controller to have
the local set point track the measurement by specifying a parameter from
the Gate Input List to activate the measurement tracking switch. This is
done at MEASTRK in Location 5-G1 in the structure diagrams.
If you configure the controller R/L, you may also configure the following
features:
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
91
Set Point (cont.)
• Specify that the local set point track the remote set point (LOCTRK)
when in REMOTE and when one of the parameters from the Gate
Input List activates the set point local tracking switch.
• Specify that a parameter from the Gate Input List SWITCH remote to
local control and vice versa. A configuration of ON or to an entry from
the Gate Input List whose logic is in the True state fixes the control in
the REMOTE mode. Conversely, OFF or (False) fixes the control in the
LOCAL mode.
NOTE A switch assignment other than NONE has priority over the R/L
key or the communication link. For example, if R/L is assigned through
Gate 1, the R/L key or a supervisory host command to change R/L status
is ignored.
• Specify (in STARTUP) whether the controller is to be in REMOTE or
LOCAL upon restart after a power failure.
• Specify INBIAS applied to the remote signal.
• Specify the SOURCE of the remote set point to be any signal from the
Signal Distribution List.
To configure your instrument as a ratio controller, see See “Ratio Control”
on page 93.
Configuration of these features are done at Location 5-G1 in the structure
diagrams.
Lastly, the set point may be FORMATted to be linear, squared, square
rooted, or characterized over one of two selectable series of points.
When configured as REMOTE/LOCAL, the R/L key on the front of the
controller can change the set point operation from REMOTE to LOCAL
and vice versa. The function switch R/L must be configured to NONE. If
the W/P feature is configured ON, the controller must be in the panel mode
(P).
Set Point
Configuration
Example 1
92
A Remote/Local set point controller is required. The local set point must
track the remote value when the controller is in Remote.
1
Access CONFIG FUNC 1 (Location 5-A1) and go to SET PT
(Location 5-G1).
2
Select R/L for TYPE.
3
Go to LOCTRK (Location 5-H1) and select ON from the menu.
The configuration of this example is now complete.
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
MI 018-885 February 1998
Set Point
Configuration
Example 2
The R/L status should always be in Remote during normal operation.
1
Access CONFIG FUNC 1 (Location 5-A1) and go to SET PT
(Location 5-G1).
2
Select R/L for TYPE.
3
Go to SWITCH (Location 5-H1) and select ON from the menu.
The configuration of this example is now complete.
Set Point Limits
Set point limits apply to both local and remote set points. Specify them in
ALLTUNE at Location 4-B1 of the structure diagrams.
Ratio Control
When using the 762CNA as a ratio controller, access SET PT at Location 5G1 in the structure diagrams and select RATIO as the TYPE. Specify the
RL LOGIC (LOC TRK, SWITCH, and STARTUP) as described in “Set
Point” on page 91. Then select the SOURCE of the ratio SIGNAL and set
an INBIAS if required. The biased signal can be multiplied by a RANGE
factor of from 0 to 1 to 0 to 5. It then can have an OUTBIAS added. See
Figure 4-17. The ratio SOURCE can be entered from the controller faceplate (or workstation) or can be any signal ROUTED from the Signal Distribution List as configured.
Figure 4-17. Ratio
Faceplate Control
of Local Set Point
Set Point
Limits
Signal Out
Remote
Ratio Signal
+
Ratio
INBIAS
Ratio Gain
x
+
OUTBIAS
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
93
Output Summing and Multiplying
The OUTPUT can be modified by adding to it (OUTSUM), or multiplying
it by (OUTMUL) a parameter from the Signal Input List in percent
(divided by 100). This is done in OUTPUT MODIFIER at Location 5-G2
in the structure diagrams. The result then can then be FORMATted as linear, squared, square rooted, or characterized over one of two selectable
series of points. See Figure 4-18.
Output Tracking
The OUTPUT can also be configured so that the OUTTRK SWITCH
entry made from the Gate Input List causes the output to track (OUTTRK)
a SOURCE that is specified from the Signal Input List. This is done at
Location 5-G2 in the structure diagrams. See Figure 4-18. The output is
not bumped on a transfer from track to run.
Figure 4-18. Output Modification and Tracking
SOURCE
SIGNAL
+
C1 OUT
C2 OUT
x
OUTSUM
OUTMUL
LINEAR
SQ ROOT
SQUARED
CHAR 1
CHAR 2
OUTTRK
SWITCH
SIGNAL OUT
SIGNAL TO BE TRACKED
SOURCE
SIGNAL
Split Range Output
You can configure the two analog outputs of the 762CNA for split range
control of two valves by a single controller. This feature is available on
Controller 1 and in Cascade and Auto Selector configurations. A typical
application is illustrated in Figure 4-19. In this application, temperature is
controlled by alternately controlling the flow of hot water and chilled water
to a vessel.
As shown in the diagram, when the controller output is in the upper part of
its range, the chilled water valve is closed and the hot water valve is throttling. Conversely, when the controller output is in the lower part of its
range, the hot water valve is closed and the chilled water valve is throttling.
The split point and its associated dead band determine how this transition
occurs.
94
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
MI 018-885 February 1998
Figure 4-19. Split Range Application
Controller
TIC
HOT
WATER
CHILLED
WATER
Controller Output (C1 OUT or C2 OUT)
100%
100%
HI
ACT
0%
0%
LOW
ACT
0%
Hot Water Valve Position
AOUT 1 (INC/INC)
Split Point
Cold Water Valve Position
AOUT 2 (INC/DEC)
100%
To configure Split Range Output, go to CONFIG OUTPUTS at Location
5-C2 in the structure diagrams and specify SPLT RNG YES. Specify the
SPLIT PT in percent of controller output. Next, set the DEADBAND.
Then specify the controller action in the low (LOW ACT) and high (HI
ACT) portions of the range. In each portion of the range, you may configure the analog output (AOUT n) to increase with decreasing controller output (Cn OUT) (INC/DEC) or increase with increasing controller output
(INC/INC). See Figure 4-20. Lastly, specify the deadband which creates a
symmetrical zone on either side of the split point during which no output
change occurs.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
95
Figure 4-20. Split Range Diagrams
Controller Output (C1 OUT or C2 OUT)
Controller Output (C1 OUT or C2 OUT)
100%
100%
AOUT 1 (INC/INC)
100%
LOW
ACT
0%
Split Point
100%
100%
Split Point
AOUT 2 (INC/DEC)
LOW
ACT
AOUT 2 (INC/INC)
0%
100%
100%
AOUT 1 (INC/INC)
100%
LOW
ACT
0%
96
0%
AOUT 1 (INC/DEC)
HI
ACT
HI
ACT
0%
100%
0%
Controller Output (C1 OUT or C2 OUT)
Controller Output (C1 OUT or C2 OUT)
100%
AOUT 1 (INC/DEC)
HI
ACT
HI
ACT
0%
0%
0%
Split Point
100%
0%
Split Point
AOUT 2 (INC/INC)
LOW
ACT
AOUT 2 (INC/DEC)
0%
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
0%
100%
MI 018-885 February 1998
Split Range Output (cont.)
In Figure 4-21, note that moving the split point effectively changes the gain
between AOUT 1 and AOUT 2. In the left diagram, the gain of AOUT 1
to C1 OUT and AOUT 2 to C1 OUT are equal since a 50% change in C1
OUT results in a 100% change in both AOUT 1 and AOUT 2. In the right
diagram, the gain of AOUT 2 to C1 OUT is higher than AOUT 1 to C1
OUT since only a 33% change in C1 OUT causes a 100% change in AOUT
2 while a 67% change in C1 OUT is required to cause a 100% change in
AOUT 1. This relationship is convenient for loop tuning.
Figure 4-21. Effect of Shifting Split Point
Controller Output (C1 OUT or C2OUT)
Controller Output (C1 OUT or C2OUT)
100%
100%
AOUT 1 (INC/INC)
100%
0%
100%
LOW
ACT
0%
AOUT 1 (INC/INC)
HI
ACT
HI
ACT
50%
100%
Split Point
AOUT 2 (INC/INC)
0%
33%
0%
0%
100%
LOW
ACT
0%
Split Point
AOUT 2 (INC/INC)
In Figure 4-22, note that a deadband of 0% results in no delay between
AOUT 1 and AOUT 2 at the split point; e.g., one valve opens when the
other closes. Adding a deadband introduces a delay between AOUT 1 and
AOUT 2 at the split point; e.g., both valves are closed. The larger the deadband, the longer both valves are closed.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
97
Figure 4-22. Effect of Deadband
NO DEADBAND
100%
WITH DEADBAND
100%
C1 OUT
HI ACT
C1 OUT
DEADBAND
SPLIT 50%
POINT
SPLIT
POINT 50%
LO ACT
0%
0%
100%
AOUT 1
(INC/INC)
Increase of AOUT 1
delayed by deadband
100%
AOUT 1
(INC/INC)
HI ACT
0%
0%
100%
100%
LO ACT
AOUT 2
(INC/DEC)
Increase in AOUT 2
delayed by deadband
AOUT 2
(INC/DEC)
0%
0%
Output Limits
High and low external limits (EXTLIM) can be configured to be any
SOURCE selected from the Signal Distribution List. Each limit can be
transferred between its internal and external value by a SWITCH from the
Gate Input List. ON (True) sets the limits to external; OFF (False) and
NONE to internal. Configuration of EXTLIM is done at Location 5-G3 in
the structure diagrams. Internal limits can be tuned in ALLTUNE
(OPTUNE) at Location 4-B1. The internal limits are independent of the
external limits. Output limits are applied prior to split ranging.
If batch action is used, OUT HLIM represents Hi Batch Trip and OUT
LLIM represents Lo Batch Trip.
98
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
MI 018-885 February 1998
Output Action
You may configure the controller algorithm output (C1 OUT or C2 OUT)
to increase with decreasing measurement (INC/DEC) or increasing measurement (INC/INC). This is done at ACTION in Location 5-G2 in the
structure diagrams.
Output Upon Restart (STARTUP)
The value of output upon restart (STARTUP) after a power loss can be configured to any value from 0% to 100% or the last value before the power
loss occurred. This is done at OUTPUT STARTUP in Location 5-G3 in
the structure diagrams.
Output Reverse
The output bargraph on the controller display is normally a direct indication
of the output signal and the manipulated variable. Increasing the controller
output raises the bargraph (and the corresponding digitally displayed
value), increases the manipulated variable and usually, but not always,
increases the process or measured variable.
In some applications, a valve operator or positioner is selected for fail-safe
or other reasons, where an increase in controller output actually decreases
the manipulated variable. If not addressed, this can result in confusion when
viewing the display, as well as improper implementation of high-low alarms
and high-low limits.
This can be easily compensated for, by first completely configuring the controller just as if the manipulated variable changed directly with the output,
and then, as the last step, simply selecting YES for REVERSE in the OUTPUTS, AOUT1/AOUT2 menu (Location 5-D2 in the structure diagrams).
When configured in this manner, the output bagraph will rise and the
manipulated variable will increase when the analog output decreases, thus
providing the proper response with a reverse acting valve operator.
Output Bargraph
The Output Bargraph causes any item from the Signal Distribution List
(Location 6) to be displayed on the output (right) bargraph. This allows
you to indicate a true (live) output. For example, the output from a valve
position transmitter could be connected to an unused input which then
could be displayed on the output bargraph. This feature is configured at
OUTBAR in Location 5-E2 in the structure diagrams.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
99
Characterizers
Characterization consists of one or two curves of 8 segments (9 points).
Each curve may be assigned to any of the following signals:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Analog Input A, B, C, or D (Location 5-B2)
Frequency Input E or F (Location 5-B2)
Measurement of a Controller, MEAS (Location 5-G2)
Set point of a Controller, SET PT (Location 5-G1)
Nonlinear Controller, NONLIN (Location 5-G2)
Output of a Controller, OUTPUT (Location 5-G2)
Calculation, CALC (Location 5-C1)
NOTE Vertical slope of a curve is not allowed (for any one value of X there
can be only one value of Y).
Entries may be expressed in whole numbers or to tenths of a whole number.
The specification of the sequence of X, Y pairs is done at Location 5-D1.
Nonlinear Control
The controller error (difference between measurement and set point) may
be characterized over one of two selectable series of points at Location 5-G2
in the structure diagrams. This type of control is often used for difficult pH
applications when the set point is not changed and when set as a deadzone
for nonlinear filtering of error noise. See section immediately above for
more information on Characterization.
pH Display
The display of the measurement, local set point, or remote set point may be
displayed before or after the signal is characterized. If pH DISP is activated
(ON) the displays are before characterization. This feature is often used on
a pH application when it is important for the operator to read pH, but control be performed on concentration. Specify this feature at Location
5-E2 in the structure diagrams.
100
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
MI 018-885 February 1998
Serial Communications
The controller can be operated from either a computer workstation (W) or
from its panel (P). This can be changed by the W/P key on the front of the
controller if W/P is configured ON (Location 5-C2), workstation PRIORITY is configured P or BOTH (Location 5-D3), and the W/P function
SWITCH is configured to NONE (Location 5-D3). If the controller is to
be operated via a computer, W/P must be configured ON and several other
parameters must be configured as described in Table 4-14.
Table 4-14. Configuration of Serial Communication Parameters
Parameter
Configuration Method
ADDRESS:
Enter the device number (0 to 99) on the serial communication
port.
Enter the data transfer speed (2400,4800, 9600, or 19200 bits/
second) between the host and the controller.
Enter odd, even, or none.
Enter the length of time that communication is interrupted
before FLUNK action is implemented. However, a TIMEOUT of
0 equals no FLUNK feature.
Enter state of W/P desired if serial communication is lost.
Choices are W, P, and LAST W/P status before loss occurred.
To assure continuous operator control, set FLUNK to P if PRIORITY is set to W. When FLUNK is set to W or to LAST W/P,
the W flashes after TIMEOUT expires.
Specify W or P to select whether the workstation or panel can
switch controller operation from W to P and vice versa. Specify
BOTH if switching can be done by both the workstation and the
panel.
Enter state of W/P desired upon restart after a power failure.
An entry from the Gate Input List here enables an activation of
the specified switch to change the controller operation from W
to P or vice versa. A configuration of ON or to an entry from the
Gate Input List whose logic is in the True state fixes the control
in the WORKSTATION mode. Conversely, OFF or (False) fixes
the control in the PANEL mode.
BAUD:
PARITY:
TIMEOUT:
FLUNK:
PRIORITY:
STARTUP:
SWITCH:
NOTE A switch assignment other than NONE has priority over the W/P
key or the communication link. For example, if W/P is assigned through
Gate 1, the W/P key or a supervisory host command to change W/P status is ignored.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
101
Communications
Example
Serial communications will be used to supervise the controller at 2400 baud
and with address number 6. The controller should FLUNK to manual and
panel after a TIMEOUT of 10 minutes; that is, when the host has had no
communication with the controller for over 10 minutes.
1
Access CONFIG FUNC 1 and go to A/M (Location 5-G2).
2
Go to FLUNK and select M from the menu.
3
Access CONFIG W/P at Location 5-C2 and select ON.
4
Enter 06 in the ADDRESS block.
5
Select 2400 from the menu for BAUD.
6
Select EVEN, ODD, or NONE for PARITY as desired.
7
Go to TIMEOUT and confirm that the factory-configured value of
10.00 minutes is still in place. Change value if necessary.
8
Select P from the menu for FLUNK. The configuration of this
example is now complete.
Toggle
If TOGGLE is configured ON, the user may go from one of the User Interface modes (READ or SET) to the Normal Operation mode and return to
the function from which the User Interface was exited using the TAG key.
TOGGLE functions above and below the PASSCODE barrier. However,
this feature is particularly useful if the function is after the PASSCODE.
TOGGLE only applies if the controller is in PANEL (P) mode. Also, TOGGLE defaults to OFF in a power failure.
Lastly, if TOGGLE is configured and the user is in the firmware structure
below the PASSCODE but wants to go to a section of the structure above
the PASSCODE, he must do the following:
1
Press a long TAG (more than 0.3 second). Display will read EXIT
PASS NO.
2
Using an arrow key, change the NO to YES. Press ACK key. Display will show Normal Operation.
3
Pressing the TAG key again will bring you to READ in the firmware
structure and not to the function from which the user interface was
previously exited.
NOTE If NO is ACKnowledged in Step 2, the display will show Normal
Operation. However, the next use of the TAG key will return you to the
function from which the User Interface was exited.
Figure 4-23 expresses the Toggle feature pictorially. The configuration
parameter ALARM 3 ACTION was selected arbitrarily for the example in
this figure.
102
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
MI 018-885 February 1998
Figure 4-23. TOGGLE Feature
TOGGLE OFF
ALARM 3
ACTION
TAG
NORMAL
OPERATION
TAG
READ
TOGGLE ON
ALARM 3
ACTION
TOGGLE ON
(Moving from below to above passcode barrier)
ALARM 3
ACTION
LONG TAG
TAG
NORMAL
OPERATION
EXIT PASS
NO
NORMAL
OPERATION
TAG
TAG
ALARM 3
ACTION
ALARM 3
ACTION
EXIT PASS
YES
NORMAL
OPERATION
TAG
READ
Batch Control
You can configure the 762CNA to operate in discontinuous batch mode. If
so configured, the process starts and stops without causing controller
windup and subsequent overshoot if PRELOAD is correctly set as the measured variable re-enters the control range. Configure this feature ON or
OFF at Location 5-G3 in the structure diagrams. The PRELOAD adjustment is made in ALLTUNE/OPTUNE at Location 4-B1. Refer also to the
Output Limits section on page 98.
Integral Feedback
Integral feedback is used to prevent controller windup when the control
algorithm output cannot manipulate the valve. Refer to the Cascade Controller example on page 76 for a practical application of this function.
The SOURCE of the INTegral FeedBacK can be configured to be a signal
from the Signal Distribution List. In a typical control loop, the integral
feedback is sourced to the controller output (Cn OUT). This is done in INT
FBK at Location 5-G3 in the structure diagrams. The correct connection is
made automatically for cascade and auto select configurations.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
103
Rate of Change Alarms
A Rate of Change alarm is used when the change of a variable in an increment of time is important; i.e., the change in temperature per change in unit
time in a reactor. A Rate of Change alarm has one input variable. The
alarm levels are entered in percent and referenced to time. The units are percent per minute. When the attached monitored variable exceeds the alarm
level, an alarm condition occurs and the Boolean output associated with that
alarm is set to True. The time interval for trip points is fixed at one minute;
e.g., a level of 50% equals 50%/minute. The time between the alarm condition and activation of the alarm is typically 5 to 10 seconds. It takes less
time if the rate is way over the limit but longer if the rate is only slightly
over the limit.
The input variable is assigned from the Signal Distribution List using the
parameter ATTACH at Location 5-B2 in the structure diagrams.
Alarm levels and deadband have a different meaning for ROC alarms. For
an ROC alarm, alarm levels and deadband are interpreted as percent change
per minute. This may be thought of as an absolute alarm applied to dm/dt
instead of to m, where dm/dt is the rate of change in percent per minute.
The filter time is 6 seconds and dm/dt values are approximately 1% precise.
A minimum of 5%/minute deadband should be used on ROC alarms.
Lastly, Rate of Change alarms can not be configured for display.
104
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
MI 018-885 February 1998
Configuration Copy Accessory
A configuration copy accessory (Part L0122TU) is available from Foxboro.
With this accessory, additional controllers can be configured to match an
existing one without the need to go through the step-by-step configuration
procedure previously described.
Even if an exact duplicate configuration is not desired, the configuration
copy accessory can still be used. If the configuration of the second controller is to be similar to the first, the first one can be copied and the copy then
changed using the step-by-step procedures described in this Chapter. The
procedure used to copy a configuration is as follows:
MI 018-885
1
Depress latch under front panel to withdraw controller. Withdraw controller several inches from housing (power is removed
from unit).
2
Release the locking latch on the socket of the memory module
(NOVRAM) and lift the module out of its socket. Identify this
module so that it cannot be confused with the module to be configured.
3
Insert configuration copy accessory (See Figure 4-24) into this
socket with ribbon cable toward front of controller and lock latch of
socket.
4
Release both latches on copy accessory. Position configured memory
module so that the key is on bottom and insert module into left side
of accessory (labeled “ORIG”). Lock left accessory latch.
5
Insert unconfigured memory module similarly into right side of
accessory (labeled “COPY”). Lock right accessory latch.
6
Reconnect power by sliding controller back into housing with ribbon cable extending out the front of the housing. When lower display shows value of engineering units, new memory module is
configured. This takes only a few seconds.
7
Withdraw controller from housing. Release all three latches and
remove the two modules and copy accessory.
8
Plug original and newly configured memory modules back into their
controllers. Lock latches. Reinstall controllers into their housings.
9
Calibrate controller with newly configured memory module. See
Chapter 7 of this instruction.
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
105
Figure 4-24. Configuration Copy Accessory
FOXBORO
ORIG
COPY
Ribbon Cable
Plug into NOVRAM socket
Plug ORIG and COPY NOVRAMS into labelled sockets
106
762CNA Controller - 4 - Configuration
MI 018-885 February 1998
762C SINGLE
STATION
MICRO
Controller
February 1998
Ð
Preface
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Appendix A
Appendix B
Appendix C
Appendix D
Appendix E
Appendix F
Glossary
Index
• xiii
Quick Check • 1
Product Overview • 11
Installation • 23
Configuration • 49
Operation • 109
EXACT Tuning • 135
Calibration, Troubleshooting,
Maintenance • 159
Specifications • 183
Configuration Worksheets • 193
Structure Diagrams • 237
Parts List • 247
Dimensional Print • 247
Functional Diagram • 261
• 267
• 287
The Intelligent Automation People
108
762CNA Controller
MI 018-885 February 1998
Operation
5
The purpose of this section is to describe all features of the 762CNA Controller that are of interest to the process operator — how to read the displays, how to operate the keys, and how to perform various operator
functions.
The chapter is divided into the following major sections:
• Functions • 110
• Controls and Indicators • 113
• Structure Diagrams • 113
• Modes of Operation • 116
• SET OPTUNE • 116
• NORMAL Mode of Operation • 117
• Operation as an Auto/Manual Station
•
•
•
•
•
MI 018-885
• 128
Operation as a 3-variable Indicator Station • 129
Operation as an Auto-Selector Station • 130
Operation as a Cascade Control Station • 130
Totalizer Operation • 131
READ Mode Operation • 132
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 5 - Operation
109
Functions
The 762CNA provides two functions (with totalizers) that can operate as:
Two independent controllers
Single-station cascade controller
Auto selector controller
Single or dual auto/manual control station
Single or dual 3-variable indicating station
The various functions can be intermixed, subject to some configuration constraints.
•
•
•
•
•
Block Diagram
Figure 5-1 is a simplified block diagram that shows the inputs, outputs, and
functions available in a 762CNA instrument. Explanations of each item follow the diagram. For detailed specifications, refer to Appendix A – Specifications.
Figure 5-1. Block Diagram of a 762CNA Control Station
Panel Displays
RTD (100Ω Pt)
Analog
Outputs (2)
Frequency
Inputs (2)
Discrete Inputs
(2)
Input Signal Conditioning
Analog
Inputs (4)
Controller* Controller*
Function
Function
1
2
Four alarms
Calculations, Totalizer,
and Logic Functions
Operator Keypad
Discrete
Outputs (2)
RS-485 Serial Communication
* Auto/manual station or 3-bar Indicator functions are available
as alternates to the controller functions.
110
762CNA Controller - 5 - Operation
MI 018-885 February 1998
Alarms
Four alarms, assignable to any input or output signal, are provided. All
alarms are 2-level (high/high, high/low, low/low) and may be configured to
trigger on the present value of a signal, a difference between two signals, or
on the rate-of-change of a signal. They may also be set up as latching, nonlatching, or permissive alarms. Permissive alarms do not require operator
acknowledgment.
Signal
Conditioning
Input signals can be configured with any of a wide range of input signal
conditioning functions to match any measurement or display requirement.
Scaling gains and biases, square, square root, and characterized profiles, as
well as filtering, are also supported.
Calculation
Functions
If so configured, the variables used for indication and control can be computed values – the results of algebraic or Boolean calculations. Three multiterm calculation functions are provided.
Totalizers
Two 7-digit totalizer functions are available (except in any function block in
which EXACT is configured). The totalizers may be assigned to any internal
or external signal and may be set to count up to or down from a preset
value. When a totalizer reaches the target value, a logic event output is generated, which may be used as an input to a number of other functions. Reset
and hold logic is provided for each totalizer.
Inputs
MI 018-885
Type
No.
Description
Analog
4
Frequency
2
Discrete
2
4-20 mA non-isolated or 1-5 V dc (any combination). Using a
hardware option, you may connect a 100 Ω platinum RTD to
Analog Input 1.
Analog inputs can be assigned to any analog function.
1 to 9999 Hz. May be assigned to any analog function. May
also be combined into one up/down pulse input signal.
Non-isolated contact or transistor switch inputs. May be
assigned to any binary function.
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 5 - Operation
111
Outputs
Type
No.
Description
Analog
2
Discrete
2
4-20 mA non-isolated. Analog Output 2 can be changed to 1-5
V dc by moving a jumper. Analog outputs can be assigned to
any function (subject to configuration constraints). Isolation is
available as an option on Analog Output 1.
Non-isolated open collector NPN transistor switch outputs.
May be assigned to any binary function.
Data
Communication
Two-way data communication with remote computers is provided through
an RS-485 serial port. Using this feature, you can exercise supervisory control of the controller from a remote host computer, including upload/download of measurement, configuration, and control status information. A
single host can supervise up to 30 control stations on a single loop.
Addresses are available for 100 stations. An F6501A converter connects to
90 stations; an OPTO-22 isolator board to 30; and an I/A Series Instrument Gateway to 60 units in Version 4.0 or to 48 in Versions 2 and 3. The
major determining factor in defining the maximum number of stations is
speed of response between host and units.
EXACT
Control
The Foxboro-patented EXACT control function provides automatic adaptive tuning for either or both control loops, subject to totalizer configuration constraints. If the controller is configured with EXACT, the function
can be enabled or disabled through the keypad or any other switch signal
such as a contact input or the state of a gate or alarm.
Security
The unit may be configured to require you to enter a passcode before performing certain TUNE operations such as changing parameter values.
112
762CNA Controller - 5 - Operation
MI 018-885 February 1998
Controls and Indicators
Operator controls and indicators are located on the front panel. Figure 5-2
shows the panel arrangement and identifies the function of each element.
Figure 5-3 on page 115 shows the arrangement and functions of the keypad.
Figure 5-2. Panel Display (Faceplate 1 or 2)
Upper digital display
Lower digital display
Bargraph indicator
FIC 1002A
150.5 GPM
WP
Red LED Fault
Indicator (normally
not visible)
Workstation/Panel
Status
RL
Remote/Local
Set Point Status
AM
Auto/Manual
Status
Overrange indicator
Set Point Indicator
Left Bargraph
(Set Point)
Center Bargraph
(Measurement)
Alarm Indicator
Right Bargraph
(Output)
Underrange indicator
Keypad
MI 018-885
February 1998
W/P
R/L
A/M
SEL
TAG
ACK
762CNA Controller - 5 - Operation
113
Left Bargraph
In NORMAL, shows loop tag or scaled value of variable with
engineering units label. In READ and SET modes, shows a
category of parameter or a message.
In NORMAL, shows present value of variable identified by
bargraph indicator. When an alarm exists, displays ID of variable. In READ and SET, shows parameter or message detail.
Identifies variable being displayed on Lower Digital Display.
There are also “no indicator” positions. See “Bargraph Indicator Positions” on page 118.
On steady when variable is between 100% and 102%.
Flashes when variable is above 102%.
Shows present value of Variable #1 (usually set point).
Center Bargraph
Shows present value of Variable #2 (usually measurement).
Right Bargraph
Shows present value of Variable #3 (usually controller output).
Underrange Indicator
On steady when variable is between 0% and -2%. Flashes
when below -2%.
Operator entry keypad. (For details, refer to Figure 5-3.)
Upper Digital Display
Lower Digital Display
Bargraph Indicator
Overrange Indicator
Keypad
When ON, shows hardware error, such as watchdog timer
Red LED Fault Indicator timeout, low ac voltage or primary power.
Status indicator for Workstation (W) or Panel (P) control. W
flashes if communication fails when in W mode and flunk is
set to W. Neither W or P are lighted when W/P is configured
WP
OFF.
Status indicator for Local (L) or Remote (R) set point and for
Ratio (R) or Local (L) set point. Neither R or L are lighted
RL
when set point TYPE is configured as LOCAL.
Status indicator for Automatic (A) or Manual (M) control. Both
are on when OUTTRK is active. Flashes A, M, or AM when
open loop condition exists. An open loop occurs:
• When the inactive controller is selected in an auto-
114
AM
selector configuration.
• In a cascade primary loop, when the secondary is in
Manual, Local, or OUTTRK.
• When limits prevent the output from moving in
either direction, as when limits are crossed or
opposing.
Alarm Indicator
Flashes when active, steady when acknowledged. Off when
returned to normal after being acknowledged.
762CNA Controller - 5 - Operation
MI 018-885 February 1998
Keypad
Figure 5-3. Keypad
W/P
R/L
A/M
SEL
TAG
ACK
In NORMAL mode, press these buttons to increase or decrease value of set
point, ratio gain, or output by one increment. Press and hold to increase the
rate of change in value.
SEL
(Short
press)
Press to transfer control between computer Workstation and controller front
Panel when W/P switch priority is Panel and communications are enabled (W/
P = ON).
Press to transfer between Remote and Local (or Ratio and Local) set point
when set point TYPE is configured as R/L (or RATIO) and R/L SWITCH is set
to NONE.
Press to transfer between Auto and Manual control when A/M SWITCH is set
to NONE.
A short press (200 to 300 ms) selects the next variable for display on the
Lower Digital Display (alphanumeric). Also provides access to remote set
point, ratio, and totalized count, when so configured.
SEL
(Long
Press)
A long press (≥300 ms) toggles between Faceplates 1 and 2, provided they
are configured and active. If only one faceplate is configured, the key performs the same functions as a short press.
TAG
In NORMAL mode, press to go to READ mode. If TOGGLE feature is configured, press to go to last function from which READ or SET was exited. In
READ or SET mode, press to go to NORMAL mode.
In NORMAL mode, press to acknowledge an alarm. In READ or SET, press to
move one step through structure, or to accept a new parameter entry.
W/P
R/L
A/M
ACK
If none of the keys are operational, the keyboard enable/disable link is in the
disable position. See page 26.
Structure Diagrams
The 762CNA is a powerful instrument with many user-adjustable parameters, displays, and possible configurations. It is beneficial to navigate
through the various displays and parameter settings called the product structure using a map that tells you where you are in the structure, where you
want to go, and how to get there. The map is called a structure diagram. A
series of structure diagrams for the controller is included in Appendix C.
Please use these diagrams as an aid to understanding the operating procedures discussed in this chapter.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 5 - Operation
115
Modes of Operation
The 762CNA operates in one of three modes:
Mode
NORMAL
READ
SET
Description
In this mode, you can perform the usual configured functions such as
reading values of variables, changing set points or output values,
switching between auto and manual or remote and local, acknowledging alarms, transferring between faceplates, etc.
In this mode, you can read the value and status of parameters, variables, and if permitted, the current configuration.
In this mode, you can change values of parameters that have been
configured as operator-adjustable and, when past the passcode, values of non-operator-adjustable parameters and the configuration.
This section of the manual describes NORMAL and READ modes of operation. Refer to Section 4 – Configuration for detailed information on operating in the SET mode.
SET OPTUNE
The operator can set parameters in ALLTUNE by first entering a passcode.
He may also be permitted to adjust certain parameters in OPTUNE without entering a passcode. The parameter groups he can adjust are determined
by the configuration of SHOWOP, which is described in Chapter 4 – Configuration. The various parameter groups that can be selected by SHOWOP
are:
TUNE C1
C1 LIMIT
TUNE C2
C2 LIMIT
CONSTS
ALARMS
TOTALS
RD CFG
The steps necessary to perform the permitted SET OPTUNE functions can
be determined by referring to Structure Diagram 4 on page 241.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
116
762CNA Controller - 5 - Operation
MI 018-885 February 1998
NORMAL Mode Operation
When operating in NORMAL mode, you can:
• Read values of the three variables displayed on the bargraphs and, if the
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
unit is so configured, read the values of remote and local set points and
the present values of totalizers.
Change control status (transfer between Workstation/Panel, Remote/
Local, Ratio/Local, and Auto/Manual).
Change set point or ratio in Auto and Manual, or change output
in Manual, if the unit is configured to permit such changes.
Display/acknowledge alarms.
Enable/disable EXACT tuning, subject to configuration constraints.
Switch from one faceplate display to the other.
Switch from NORMAL mode to READ and SET modes and return.
Initiate, hold, or reset totalizers, if so configured.
Entering a Passcode
The unit will prompt you to enter an alphanumeric passcode before permitting you to perform certain restricted functions. The factory default is
(blank)(blank)(blank), which can be entered by pressing ACK three times.
(Refer to the structure diagrams in Appendix C for assistance in understanding the procedure described below.)
To enter a passcode (starting in NORMAL mode):
1
Press TAG. This places you in READ mode.
2
Press ∆ to go to SET.
3
Press ACK to go to OPTUNE.
4
Press ∆ to go to SECURE.
5
Press ACK to go to PASSCODE =. (With cursor under first digit
location, the digit flashes.)
6
Press ∆ repeatedly (or press/hold) until first digit of your passcode is
displayed.
7
Press ACK to accept first digit and move to next digit.
8
Press ∆ repeatedly (or press/hold) until second digit of your passcode
is displayed.
9
Press ACK to accept second digit and move to next digit.
10
Repeat entry steps for next digit.
When all digits have been entered correctly, the display shows ALLTUNE.
You may now proceed with your SET operation.
If the passcode is not accepted, the display shows the message, WRONG
PASSCODE. Press TAG to return to normal operation and start over.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 5 - Operation
117
Reading Values of Variables
The three bargraphs display the current values of the 3 variables – usually
assigned to set point, measurement, and output. The bargraphs indicate 0 to
100% of full scale, with each display segment equal to 2% of full scale.
To display the numerical value and measurement units of any one of the
three variables on the lower line of the digital display, press the SEL key as
many times as necessary to advance the bargraph indicator to the desired
variable.
Bargraph
Indicator
Positions
You can identify which variable is being displayed by observing the position
of the bargraph indicator. If the indicator is over a bargraph, that variable is
currently displayed on the Lower Digital Display.
Three indicator positions are always available for the bargraphs. In some situations, however, four positions – three variables and one no-indicator – are
available. In other situations, five positions – three variables and two no indicators – are available.
Position 4
Position 4, a no-indicator position, is used when the unit is configured for
remote set point or ratio operation. In remote set point operation, when
you use the SEL key to move the bargraph indicator to Position 4 (no indicator visible), the Lower Digital Display shows the value of the set point not
currently in use. This means that if the controller is in local mode, the Lower
Digital Display shows the value of the remote set point, the one not currently
being used. Similarly, if the unit is in remote mode, the Lower Digital Display shows the value of the local set point, which can be adjusted by the ∆
and ∇ keys. In both cases, the left bargraph shows the value of the set point
currently in use. Note that the top line of the display is not affected.
For situations in which you configure a local (no remote) set point plus a
totalizer, the Lower Digital Display shows the current value of the totalizer
when you move the bargraph indicator to Position 4 (no indicator visible).
Position 5
For situations in which you configure both a remote set point (or ratio) and
a totalizer, a second no indicator position, Position 5, becomes available.
Position 4 is then used for displaying the inactive set point value and Position 5 is used for displaying the totalizer value.
To determine which set point is currently being used, note which symbol (R
or L) is illuminated at the right of the panel. If the unit is configured for
local set point only, the R/L indicators are not visible.
For information on operation as a ratio controller, refer to Table 5-3 on
page 123.
Figure 5-4 on page 119 and Figure 5-5 on page 120 show faceplate displays
as they appear under the various operating situations described above.
The top line of the display for Position 5 is the totalizer tag which was configured in Location 5-B1 of the structure diagrams.
118
762CNA Controller - 5 - Operation
MI 018-885 February 1998
Figure 5-4. Faceplate Displays When Configured for Local Set Point and Totalizer
FIC 1002A
148.8 GPM
FIC 1002A
144.2 GPM
A
A
Bargraph indicator over
Left Bargraph. Display
shows local set point
value. No R, L, W, or P
visible. (Set point type
local only.) Auto mode.
FIC 1002A
52791 GAL
Bargraph indicator over
Mid Bargraph. Display
shows measurement
value. No R, L, W, or P
visible. (Set point type
local only.) Auto mode.
FIC 1002A
144.2 GPM
A
Bargraph indicator in
Position 4 (no indicator). Display shows
totalizer value. No R, L,
W, or P visible. (Set
point type local only.)
Auto mode.
MI 018-885
February 1998
M
Bargraph indicator over
Mid Bargraph. Display
shows measurement
value. No R, L, W, or P
visible. (Set point type
local only.) Manual
mode.
762CNA Controller - 5 - Operation
FIC 1002A
70.6
A
Bargraph indicator over
Right Bargraph. Display shows output value
in percent. No R, L, W,
or P visible. (Set point
type local only.) Auto
mode.
FIC 1002A
70.6
M
Bargraph indicator over
Right Bargraph. Display shows output value
in percent. No R, L, W,
or P visible. (Set point
type local only.) Manual
mode.
119
Figure 5-5. Faceplate Displays When Configured for Workstation/Panel and Local/Remote Set
Point and Totalizer
FIC 1002A
140.0 GPM
FIC 1002A
144.2 GPM
P
P
P
L
L
L
A
Local set point and panel
mode. Indicator over left
bargraph. Display and left
bargraph show local set
point value. Auto mode.
When in remote mode,
faceplate is the same
except that R replaces L
and display and left bargraph shows remote set
point value.
FIC 1002A
165.0 GPM
A
Local set point and
panel mode. Indicator
over mid bargraph. Display shows measurement value. Auto
mode. When in remote
mode, faceplate is the
same except that R
replaces L and display
and left bargraph shows
remote set point value.
FIC 1002A
144.2 GPM
P
P
L
A
Local set point and panel
mode. Indicator in Position 4 (no indicator). Left
bargraph shows local set
point. Display shows
remote set point value.
Auto mode.
120
FIC 1002A
70.6
Local set point and
panel mode. Indicator
over right bargraph.
Display shows output
value in percent. Auto
mode. When in remote
mode, faceplate is the
same except that R
replaces L and display
and left bargraph shows
remote set point value.
FIC 1002A
48132 GAL
P
R
R
A
A
Remote set point and
panel mode. Indicator in
Position 4 (no indicator).
Left bargraph shows
remote set point. Display
shows local set point
value. Auto mode.
762CNA Controller - 5 - Operation
A
Remote set point and
panel mode. Indicator in
Position 5 (no indicator). Display shows
totalizer value. Auto
mode.
MI 018-885 February 1998
Changing the Control Status
To switch between Auto and Manual modes, press the A/M key. To switch
between Remote and Local set points or between Ratio and Local modes,
press the R/L key. For these keys to be active, their respective switches must
be configured to NONE. Also, if serial communications are enabled, W/P
must be configured to P.
To switch between Workstation and Panel operation, press the W/P key. For
this key to be active, W/P must be configured ON and W/P PRIORITY
must be set to P or BOTH.
All transfers except R/L are bumpless. R/L transfer is bumpless if LOCTRK
is set. A/M, R/L, and W/P can be switched remotely via respective switches.
NOTE When the controller is placed in Manual, the bargraph indicator
moves over the right bargraph (output). When placed in Auto, it moves
over the middle bargraph (measurement).
Changing Set Point, Output, and Variables
To increase or decrease local set point:
1
With controller in local mode, press SEL to select the bargraph
display. If the indicator is not over the Left Bargraph, press SEL
repeatedly until it is positioned over the Left Bargraph.
2
Press the ∆/∇ keys to change the value. To increase the rate of change
in the value, press/hold the key.
Table 5-1 describes how the arrow keys affect controller variables with different positions of the bargraph indicator in both automatic and manual
modes, when R/L is not configured.
Table 5-2 on page 122 defines similar functions when R/L and a totalizer
are configured.
Table 5-3 on page 123 defines operation in ratio mode.
Table 5-1. Effect of ∆/∇ Keys with R/L Not Configured
MI 018-885
Auto/Manual
Status
Indicator
Above Bargraph
Variable Adjusted by
∆/∇ Keys
Auto
Manual
Any Bargraph
Set Point
Set Point
Set Point
Measurement
Output
Output
Output
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 5 - Operation
Comments
Output will not
change.
Set point will not
change
Set point will not
change
121
Changing Set Point, Output, and Variables (cont.)
When the unit is configured for the Remote/Local set point function and
you have selected remote set point operation, you can use the ∆/∇ keys to
adjust the local set point and the output, subject to certain restrictions. The
restrictions are described in Table 5-2.
Table 5-2. Operation of Remote/Local Controller with Totalizer
Status Setting
A/M
R/L
Identifier Above
A
R
Set Point
Measurement
Output
1
No Indicator
1, 3
No Indicator
2
Set Point
Measurement
Output
2
No Indicator
2, 3
No Indicator
1
Set Point
Measurement
Output
1
No Indicator
1, 3
No Indicator
2
Set Point
Measurement
Output
2
No Indicator
2, 3
No Indicator
L
M
R
L
1
Contents of Lower
Digital Display
Variable Adjusted by
∆/∇ Keys
Remote Set Point
Measurement
Output
Local Set Point
Totalizer
Local Set Point
Measurement
Output
Remote Set Point
Totalizer
Remote Set Point
Measurement
Output
Local Set Point
Totalizer
Local Set Point
Measurement
Output
Remote Set Point
Totalizer
No Adjustment
“
“
Local Set Point
No Adjustment
Local Set Point
Local Set Point
Local Set Point
No Adjustment
“
No Adjustment
Output
Output
Local Set Point
No Adjustment
Local Set Point
Output
Output
No Adjustment
“
1. Set point indicator shows remote set point.
2. Set point indicator shows local set point.
3. This position is present only if a totalizer is configured.
122
762CNA Controller - 5 - Operation
MI 018-885 February 1998
Changing Set Point, Output, and Variables (cont.)
When the unit is configured for the Ratio/Local function and you have
selected ratio operation, you can use the ∆/∇ arrow keys to adjust the local
set point, output, and ratio gain, subject to certain restrictions. The restrictions are described in Table 5-3.
Table 5-3. Operation of Ratio Controller with Totalizer
Status Setting
A/M
R/L
A
R (Ratio)
L (Local)
M
R (Ratio)
L (Local)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Bargraph Identifier
Position
2
Set Point
Measurement
Output
2
No Indicator
4
No Indicator
3
Set Point
Measurement
Output
3
No Indicator
4
No Indicator
2
Set Point
Measurement
Output
2
No Indicator
4
No Indicator
3
Set Point
Measurement
Output
3
No Indicator
4
No Indicator
Contents of Lower
Digital Display
1
Ratioed Variable
Measurement
Output
Ratio Gain
Totalizer
Local Set Point
Measurement
Output
1
Ratioed Variable
Totalizer
1
Ratioed Variable
Measurement
Output
Ratio Gain
Totalizer
Local Set Point
Measurement
Output
1
Ratioed Variable
Totalizer
Variable Adjusted by
∆/∇ Keys
5
Ratio Gain
5
Ratio Gain
5
Ratio Gain
5
Ratio Gain
No Adjustment
Local Set Point
Local Set Point
Local Set Point
Ratio Gain
No Adjustment
5
Ratio Gain
Output
Output
5
Ratio Gain
No Adjustment
Local Set Point
Output
Output
5
Ratio Gain
No Adjustment
Ratioed Variable is product of the ratio signal, ratio gain, and range.
Set point bargraph shows ratioed variable.
Set point bargraph shows local set point.
This position is present only if a totalizer is configured.
If ratio is sourced to faceplate and ratio gain is not cascaded from controller output.
Displaying/Acknowledging Alarms
Alarm information (horn symbol alarm indicator) is displayed regardless of
which faceplate is in use. If the unit is so configured, alarm points can be
displayed in the bargraphs. Typical displays for an absolute measurement
high/low alarm with alarm levels indicated are shown in Figure 5-6.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 5 - Operation
123
High/High
and Low/
Low Alarms
Displays for high/high and low/low types of alarms are similar to those illustrated for a high/low alarm except for different placement of the alarm
points. With rate-of-change alarms, however, no indication appears on the
bargraphs. When a rate-of-change alarm is active, only the alarm indicator
on the faceplate flashes. When you press the ACK key to acknowledge the
alarm, the Lower Digital Display shows the status of the latest active alarm.
By pressing ACK repeatedly, you can cycle through the status of all alarms
and the current value of the selected variable.
Latching
Alarms
If a latching alarm condition occurs, the alarm indicator flashes until you
press the ACK key. At this point, the alarm indicator goes out if the alarm
condition has ended. If the condition persists, it changes from flashing to
steady. The steady alarm indication continues as long as the alarm condition
exists.
Nonlatching
Alarms
If a nonlatching alarm condition occurs, the alarm indicator flashes until you
press the ACK key or the alarm condition ends. When the alarm is acknowledged, the alarm indicator stops flashing and becomes steady. When the
alarm condition ends, the alarm indicator goes out.
Acknowledging
Alarms
After you acknowledge an alarm, the condition causing the alarm is identified by a flashing message in the lower line of the alphanumeric display. The
message continues to flash as long as the alarm condition exists, or until you
press the ACK key again. When you press the ACK key a second time, the
message disappears and the value of the previously selected bargraph is
again displayed.
Multiple
Alarms
If more than one alarm condition exists, you can identify each condition in
turn by pressing the ACK key repeatedly. After all active alarm conditions
have been identified, the previously selected bargraph value is displayed.
The alarm indicator, however, continues to be illuminated. You can again
display the identifications of the alarm conditions by repeatedly pressing the
ACK key. If an alarm condition no longer exists, it is removed from the
alarm queue.
Audible
Warning
Alarms may be assigned to one or two contact outputs to drive a horn bus.
With a latching alarm, the alarm contact output resets when the alarm condition is ACKnowledged and the alarm condition returns to normal. With
a nonlatching alarm, the alarm contact resets when the alarm condition is
ACKnowledged or the alarm condition returns to normal, whichever is first.
With a permissive alarm, no visual indication is provided. However, the
alarm contact is active.
In addition to connecting to a contact output, the boolean output of the
alarm, can be used anywhere any other signal in the Gate Input List can be
used.
124
762CNA Controller - 5 - Operation
MI 018-885 February 1998
Figure 5-6. Alarm Displays, High Alarm on Absolute Measurement (Level 1, Latched)
NORMAL
FIC 1002A
150.5 GPM
Bargraph indicator
High Alarm Point
Output
Measurement
Low Alarm Point
Set Point
ACTIVE HIGH
FIC 1002A
181.0 GPM
Flashes
Measurement
High Alarm Point
Low Alarm Point
Flashes until acknowledged
ACKNOWLEDGED
FIC 1002A
ALARM 1 L1
Measurement
Set Point
Display first shows status of latest active alarm.
Press ACK to cycle through status of all alarms
and current value of selected variable. Alarm 1,
Level 1 triggered the alarm activity shown.
Flashes
High Alarm Point
Low Alarm Point
Steady
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 5 - Operation
125
Changing Alarm Settings
If you are authorized to do so, you can increase and decrease alarm settings
from OPTUNE (Refer to the Structure Diagram on page 241). You can
also do this from ALLTUNE if you have entered the passcode.
To change the alarm setting for Alarm 1 Level 2, refer to Structure Diagram
shown on page 241 and execute the following procedure:
126
1
Starting in NORMAL mode, press TAG to go to READ, then ∇
to go to SET mode.
2
If not configured for alarms to be present in OPTUNE, press ∇ to go
to SECURE. Then press ACK to display PASSCODE =?. Enter
passcode and press ACK to move to ALLTUNE. Go to Step 4.
3
Press ACK to go to OPTUNE, if configured for alarms to be present
in OPTUNE.
4
Press ACK to go to TUNE C1.
5
Press ∇ repeatedly until display shows ALARMS.
6
Press ACK to go to ALARM 1.
7
Press ACK to go to LEVEL 1 =?.
8
Press ∆/∇ keys to adjust LEVEL 1. Press ACK to enter setting.
9
Press ACK to go to ALARM 1 LEVEL 2. The lower display will
show the current setting for ALARM 1 LEVEL 2.
10
Press ∆/∇ keys to increase or decrease the LEVEL 2 setting. When
desired value is displayed, press ACK to accept the setting.
11
Press ACK to go to ALARM DEADBAND.
12
Press ∆/∇ keys to increase or decrease deadband. Press ACK to enter
setting.
13
Press TAG to return to NORMAL operation.
762CNA Controller - 5 - Operation
MI 018-885 February 1998
Enabling/Disabling EXACT Tuning
EXACT adaptive tuning is described in detail in Chapter 6. If the unit is so
configured, you can enable or disable the function.
To enable or disable EXACT self-tune mode, execute the procedure illustrated in the flow diagram of Figure 5-7. The EXACT switch must be configured NONE in order to gain access in ALLTUNE.
The default configuration for the EXACT SWITCH parameter is “None” as
shown in Appendix B, page 197. With this configuration, EXACT is automatically turned off during power-up, during a power interruption, and
when exiting from the CONFIGURATION mode. To make EXACT active
at all times, set the EXACT SWITCH parameter to “On.” To control
EXACT from an external source, assign the EXACT SWITCH parameter to
an external contact.
Figure 5-7. Flow Diagram for Enabling/Disabling EXACT Tuning
NORMAL
TAG
READ
SET
ACK (if authorized by SHOWOP)
ACK
OPTUNE
SECURE
TUNE C1
ACK
ACK
Enter Passcode
ACK
PASSCODE
ALLTUNE
ACK
PF =
4 Times
EXACT
ACK
STATE
ACK
ACK
ON
ACK
TAG to
return to
NORMAL
OFF
Switching Faceplate Displays
If Controller Function 2 is configured, press/hold the SEL key to switch the
display to Faceplate #2. To switch back to Faceplate #1, press/hold SEL
again.
Switching Modes
From the keypad, you can switch from NORMAL mode to READ mode
by pressing TAG.
To switch from READ mode to SET mode, press the ∇ key.
To return to NORMAL mode at any time, press TAG.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 5 - Operation
127
Operation as an Auto/Manual Station
Either or both functions of the 762CNA can be configured as Auto/Manual
Stations. When an A/M Station is configured, operation is essentially the
same as when a controller is configured, except that no control algorithm is
computed. This means that all features and configuration options other
than a control algorithm are available for use.
When in Auto mode, the output is equal to its configured source value. The
measurement input is then displayed on the middle bargraph and the output
on the right bargraph. The left bargraph displays an assigned value, if configured. Use the SEL key to view the value on the lower digital display. The
factory default is a blanked bargraph.
In Manual mode, the output is determined by use of the ∆/∇ keys as in a
controller. If dual functions are configured, use the “Switching Faceplate
Displays” procedure described on the previous page.
128
762CNA Controller - 5 - Operation
MI 018-885 February 1998
Operation as a 3-Variable Indicator Station
Either or both functions of the 762CNA can be configured as 3-variable
indicators. When a 3-variable indicator, sometimes called a 3-bar indicator,
is configured, the faceplate display is as shown in Figure 5-8.
Figure 5-8. 3-Variable Indicator Station (Faceplate 1 or 2)
Upper digital display
Lower digital display
Bargraph indicator
FI I03A
I50.5 GPM
Red LED Fault
Indicator (Normally
not visible)
Overrange indicator
Workstation/Panel
Status
P
Left Bargraph
Mid Bargraph
Alarm Indicator
Right Bargraph
Underrange indicator
Keypad
W/P
R/L
A/M
SEL
TAG
ACK
In a 3-variable indicator, the Upper Digital Display shows the loop tag identification of the variable being displayed in the Lower Digital Display and
the selected bargraph. As you move the bargraph indicator to the next bargraph by pressing the SEL key, the loop tag and displayed value change
accordingly.
Since A/M and R/L functions are not applicable, the symbols do not appear
on the faceplate and the associated keys are not operative. The WP symbols
and the W/P key are operative only if configured. Depending on the setting,
either W or P appears on the faceplate.
Since the bargraphs display the present values of their associated variables,
the values cannot be adjusted with the ∆/∇ keys. Operating procedures for
alarms are the same as when a controller is configured.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 5 - Operation
129
Operation as an Auto-Selector Station
When the unit is configured as a single-station auto-selector, two controllers
alternately control a single output. Control shifts smoothly from one to the
other depending on how the loops are configured and operated. Selection
can be high select, low select, or event-driven (via GATE 4). Feedback from
the output is provided to prevent windup in the controller that is currently
not selected for control.
When viewing the faceplate of the unselected controller, the operator sees a
flashing AM indicator.
Operation as a Cascade Control Station
When the unit is configured as a single-station cascade control station, Controller 1 is configured as the primary controller and Controller 2 is the secondary or slave controller. The output of Controller 1, therefore, is used as
the remote set point or ratio gain for Controller 2. The output of Controller
2 controls the valve or other actuator.
The AM status indicator flashes to indicate an open loop condition in a cascade primary loop when the secondary is in Manual, Local, or OUTTRK.
130
762CNA Controller - 5 - Operation
MI 018-885 February 1998
Totalizer Operation
As described earlier in this chapter, you can observe the present value of a
totalizer by pressing SEL to move the bargraph indicator to a position in
which the value is displayed on the Lower Digital Display. (This is the
fourth or fifth press of the SEL key, depending on whether or not the fourth
position is used to display an inactive set point.)
To observe the preset value or current value of the totalizer, enter the READ
mode by pressing TAG. Then use the Structure Diagrams and the keypad to
move to PRESETn, where you can read the preset value or to TOTALn,
where you can read the current value. The sequence is illustrated in
Figure 5-9.
If you want to change the state of a totalizer (RESET, HOLD, COUNT),
adjust the totalizer value or preset value, and you are authorized to do so,
use the OPTUNE or ALLTUNE mode.
Procedures for moving around in the product structure using the keypad
and Structure Diagrams are described in Chapter 4 – Configuration.
Figure 5-9. Reading the Value of Totalizer Preset
TAG
NORMAL
READ
ACK
VALUES
ACK
INPUTS
TOTALS
NOTE:
To return to NORMAL, press TAG at
any time.
(2 times)
ACK
TOTAL1=
PRESET1
TOTAL2=
PRESET2
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 5 - Operation
131
READ Mode Operation
In the READ mode, you can display process parameters, and if access is
allowed via SHOWOP RD CFG, the configuration. Figure 5-10 is a flow
diagram that shows how to read the various parameters and values.
Figure 5-10. Structure Diagram for READ Mode Functions
NORMAL
TAG
READ
ACK
VALUES
ACK
ACK
INPUTS
IN1 =
F2 =
CONFIG
SIGNALS
ACK
A=
CALC 3 =
VERSION
TOTALS
TOTAL2 =
PRESET 2
ACK
NOTE:
Items appear only if configured.
Otherwise, they are skipped.
CONTACTS
ACK
NOTE:
To return to NORMAL, press TAG at
any time.
ACK
ACK
ACK
A-F, AOUT 1,
AOUT 2, C1 OUT,
C2 OUT, CALC 1,
CALC 2, CALC 3
ACK
ACK
ACK
ACK
J=
ACK
ACK
GATE 1-9
GATE 0 =
ACK
ALARM 1
G-J
CI 1, CI 2,
CO1, CO2
CI 1 =
GATE 9 =
ALARMS
ACK
G=
CO 2 =
GATES
IN1, IN2, IN3,
IN4, FI, F2
ACK
ACK
TOTAL1 =
PRESET 1
CONSTS
ACK
ACK
ACK
LEVEL 1 =
LEVEL 2 =
ALARM 4
LIMITS
132
ACK
762CNA Controller - 5 - Operation
DB =
ACK
ACK
CI SPHL
CI SPHL=
C2 OUTLL
C2 OUTLL =ACK
C1 SPHL,
C1 SPLL,
C1 OUTHL,
C1 OUTLL,
C2 SPHL,
C2 SPLL,
C2 OUTHL,
C2 OUTLL
MI 018-885 February 1998
762C SINGLE
STATION
MICRO
Controller
February 1998
Ð
Preface
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Appendix A
Appendix B
Appendix C
Appendix D
Appendix E
Appendix F
Glossary
Index
• xiii
Quick Check • 1
Product Overview • 11
Installation • 23
Configuration • 49
Operation • 109
EXACT Tuning • 135
Calibration, Troubleshooting,
Maintenance • 159
Specifications • 183
Configuration Worksheets • 193
Structure Diagrams • 237
Parts List • 247
Dimensional Print • 255
Functional Diagram • 261
• 267
• 287
The Intelligent Automation People
134
762CNA Controller
MI 018-885 February 1998
EXACT
Tuning
6
This chapter describes the Foxboro patented EXACT adaptive tuning
system, a feature of the 762CNA controller.
The chapter is divided into the following major sections:
• Technical Description
• 136
• Using EXACT Tuning with 762C Controllers • 144
• Tutorial Example • 150
• Tables and Structure Diagrams • 155
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 6 - EXACT Tuning
135
Technical Description
EXACT (EXpert Adaptive Controller Tuning) is a patented mechanism for
automatically adjusting controller parameters to maintain optimal control of
your process at all times. EXACT is more efficient than manual tuning and
provides a means of managing processes that are otherwise difficult to control. In addition, a “pretune” feature permits you to achieve optimal settings
of six key parameters quickly even when initial values vary widely from the
target.
Benefits of EXACT Tuning
Benefits of using EXACT tuning are:
• Accelerates process startup
• Optimizes controller tuning in the presence of noise, variable dynamics,
process nonlinearities, deadtime, set-point changes, and load variations
• Matches tuning to current operating conditions
• Frees skilled personnel to do other tasks
• Reduces operating expenses through more efficient process control.
• Does not require a mathematical model of your process
The EXACT algorithm determines the response of your particular process
to an upset — a change in load or set point — and calculates new tuning
parameters automatically. This technique closely emulates the actions an
expert control engineer takes in tuning a controller. EXACT tuning, however, checks the process five times every second, 24 hours a day, to determine whether a parameter change should be made.
EXACT Steps
The basic steps performed by an EXACT controller are:
1
Wait for a significant process upset (magnitude greater than twice
the noise level).
2
Determine the actual response of the process to the upset.
3
Calculate optimal values of P, I, and D, using the STUN self-tune
algorithm.
4
Return to normal operation, using the new values.
The EXACT algorithm has 18 numeric parameters, of which eight can be
set by the user. The remaining ten are determined by the process itself and
are, therefore, continually updated. Initially, the eight user-adjustable
parameters are set at factory defaults, which represent safe, general purpose
values.
136
762CNA Controller - 6 - EXACT Tuning
MI 018-885 February 1998
EXACT Steps (cont.)
Even if the values of key parameters are unknown or the default values are
wrong for your process, you can calculate new values automatically, using
the EXACT pretune feature. The pretune procedure, using the PTUN algorithm, starts with the factory-set defaults and calculates optimum values of
the six parameters by determining the response of the process to an intentionally introduced process upset, called a “bump.” The magnitude of the
bump is user-adjustable.
Determining Process Response (Pattern Recognition)
The pattern to be recognized by the EXACT algorithm is the variation of
error versus time, where error is defined as the difference between measurement and set point. The general goal, which is to minimize error, may be
defined in various ways. For some processes, the goal is to minimize the
peak magnitude of error (overshoot). For others, it is to achieve maximum
reduction of successive error peaks (damping). For others, it is to reduce
steady-state error to zero in the shortest possible time. The various goals are
defined by the terms overshoot, damping, and period.
Figure 6-1. Pattern Recognition Characteristics
E1
E1
Load Change
+
-
E3
Time
Period (T)
Error
Error
Set Point Change
+
-
E3
Time
E2
E2
Overshoot = E2/E1
Damping = (E3-E2)/(E1-E2)
The EXACT pattern recognition approach is unique — its algorithm does
1,2,3
Instead, it uses direct
not require a mathematical model of the process.
feedback of actual process performance to determine the action required.
The self-tuning PID algorithm monitors the closed-loop recovery of the
process following a disturbance to set point or load. It then automatically
calculates P, I, and D to minimize process recovery time, subject to userspecified damping and overshoot limits.
1. Rohrs, C. E., Valavani, L., Athans, M., and Stein, G., “Robustness of Adaptive Control
Algorithms in the Presence of Unmodeled Dynamics,” MIT Industrial Liaison Program,
Publication No. 01-016, 1983.
2. Fjeld, M. and Wilhelm, R. G., Jr., “Self-Tuning Regulators - The Software Way,” Control Engineering, November 1981, P. 99.
3. Clarke, D. W., “The Application of Self-Tuning Control,” Trans Inst MC Vol. 5. No. 2,
April-June 1983, P. 59.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 6 - EXACT Tuning
137
Determining Process Response (cont.)
For most processes, however, damping and overshoot are not independent;
the period of oscillation must be included to define the shape of the pattern.
The period can be nondimensionalized by using the controller I and D val1
ues to produce ratios similar to those proposed by Ziegler-Nichols and
2
Shinskey . The ratios I/period and D/period define the lead and lag phase
angles of the controller response. P, I, and D computations are therefore
based upon the period of oscillation and are constrained by the user-set
damping and overshoot parameters (see Figure 6-1).
Calculating PID Values (STUN Algorithm)
Figure 6-2 is a state diagram of the EXACT self-tune algorithm, called
STUN. The current status of the control process is shown on the two-line
display on the face of the 762CNA controller. If corrective action is currently being taken, you can display either the reason the current step is being
implemented, or the name of the last corrective step completed.
Figure 6-2. STUN Algorithm State Diagram
Third peak found
Verify 3
Locate 3
Third peak not found
Verify 2
Third peak not found
Adapt
Locate 2
Verify 1
Second peak not found
Second peak not found
Locate 1
Quiet
Settle
1. Ziegler, J. G. and Nichols, N. B., “Optimum Settings for Automatic Controllers”, Trans
ASME, November 1942.
2. Shinskey, F. G., Process Control Systems, McGraw-Hill, New York, NY, 2nd Edition,
1979, pp. 96-99.
138
762CNA Controller - 6 - EXACT Tuning
MI 018-885 February 1998
Locating
Peak 1
In normal operation, set point and measurement are close to each other and
the algorithm is in the QUIET state (error is too small to activate the selftune algorithm). However, when a disturbance appears in the process that
causes the error to exceed twice the noise band, the algorithm “wakes up”
and begins to “watch” the error in anticipation of a peak. While waiting for
the first peak, the state is defined as LOCATE 1. Once a peak occurs, the
algorithm stores the magnitude of the peak and starts a timer to record the
elapsed time to the next peak, which is defined as the period of oscillation.
ZieglerNichols
Method
Ziegler-Nichols developed a tuning procedure that involved adjusting I and
D until I/period equals 0.5 and D/period equals 0.12. However, it has since
been found that much better tuning and quicker convergence result when
the ratios of I/period and D/period are changed by the algorithm. A process
with a dominant deadtime requires smaller ratio values than one with a
dominant lag. If the response is overdamped and distinct peaks are not
found, I and D are adjusted by applying expert rules.
Verifying
Peak 1
Before searching for Peak 2, the algorithm verifies that the first is a true
peak (during the VERIFY 1 state). If a new extreme value occurs during
this verification state, it then becomes the first peak and the timer is
restarted.
Locating
Peaks 2
and 3
After Peak 1 occurs and is verified, the algorithm uses the same method to
locate and verify Peaks 2 and 3.
Damping,
Overshoot,
and Period
The peak information is then expressed in the previously-defined terms of
“overshoot”, “damping”, “I/period”, and “D/period.” Validity is determined for this information based upon the height of the peaks relative to
the nominal noise band and the time between peaks relative to the period of
a nominal damped sinusoid.
When the loop is properly tuned, the values of P, I, and D remain essentially
unchanged from disturbance to disturbance. However, if the disturbance
changes shape or if the process changes, EXACT will automatically determine new values.
Calculating
P, I, D
MI 018-885
Up to this point, the controller is operating as a fixed parameter PID controller. However, it has observed the loop response to a disturbance. The
algorithm then uses the response information to calculate new values of P, I,
and D (during the ADAPT state). The first step in calculating new P, I, and
D values uses the period information to set I and D directly and damping or
overshoot error to adjust P. The interaction between P, I, and D, however,
requires this algorithm to be slightly more sophisticated — P must be further adjusted to compensate for the changes in I and D values.
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 6 - EXACT Tuning
139
Settling
State
The self-tuning cycle is complete when the newly calculated P, I, and D values are set into the controller. The algorithm then goes through a settling
state that allows a smooth transition into locating a new first peak, if necessary. The SETTLE state is only used to assure that the next peak found is a
true peak. Switching the controller from MANUAL to AUTO or initially
activating the self-tuning feature forces the algorithm into the SETTLE
state.
Calculating Initial Parameters (PTUN Algorithm)
If the control characteristics of the process are not known, optimum values
for six key parameters (PF, IF, DF, NB, WMAX, and DFCT) can be calculated by the pretune (PTUN) algorithm. Before enabling this feature, however, the controller must be in MANUAL, with the measurement steady and
near the set point.
Introducing
Process
Upset
PTUN uses the factory-set (or user-adjusted) values of these six parameters
as the starting values. The mechanism of the pretune function is to introduce a small process upset (output change) and determine the response of
the process to this upset. The resultant process reaction curve provides data
for the PTUN algorithm to calculate optimum values of the six parameters.
The size of the process upset is provided by a parameter called BUMP.
After the procedure is finished, these optimum values are entered into the
memory of the controller. In this way, the self-tune algorithm then starts
with more correct values of P, I, and D, and thus, the measurement is stabilized faster. (PTUN-calculated values of PF, IF, and DF are the initial values
of P, I, and D for the STUN algorithm.)
Computing
IF, DF, WMAX
A typical process reaction curve (see Figure 6-3) identifies the effective process dead time and process sensitivity. The estimate of dead time is used to
determine integral time (IF), derivative time (DF), and the maximum wait
time (WMAX).
Figure 6-3. Typical Process Response to Step Change in Controller Output
Measurement
Process Sensitivity
Time
Td = Effective Dead Time
140
762CNA Controller - 6 - EXACT Tuning
MI 018-885 February 1998
Computing
PF, NB, DFCT
The proportional band (PF), integral time (IF), derivative time (DF), and
wait time (WMAX) are calculated from both the sensitivity of the process
reaction curve and the dead time. The nominal noise band (NB) is determined by observing the measurement and estimating the peak-to-peak
amplitude that is of higher frequency content than the closed loop can
remove. If the noise content is high, the derivative factor (DFCT) is
reduced, since derivative action is not effective in a high noise environment.
Usually DFCT is set to 1.
4 Pretune
Phases
The four main phases of pretune are shown in Figure 6-4. As they occur,
they are shown on the display of the controller. The process upset occurs
with a step change in controller output at point 1. The algorithm waits for
steady state during 2 (the messages PTUN = SMALL 1 and PTUN =
WAIT 2 will be displayed), calculates the control parameters, and returns
the controller output to its starting value at point 3 (PTUN = PID 3). If
the process is an integrating type or if it has high gain, point 3 is reached
when the measurement changes by 10% of its span or the bump size,
whichever is larger. Finally, the noise band and derivative factor are calculated during 4 (PTUN = NB 4). When the process is completed, the message PTUN = FINISH will appear.
Measurement
Figure 6-4. Pretune States
3
2
1
4
Time
User-adjustable Parameters
In configuring a 762CNA controller, you can leave any of the user-adjustable parameters at the factory-set values, change them to new values, or use
the pretune function (PTUN) to calculate optimum settings of six key userset parameters (PF, IF, DF, NB, WMAX, and DFCT). Factory-set default
values and acceptable maximum and minimum values for each parameter
are listed in Table 6-6, “EXACT Parameter Limits and Values,” on
page 156.
Initial
Values of P,
I, and D (PF,
IF, and DF)
MI 018-885
The PF, IF, and DF parameters are the PID values used by the controller
when EXACT tuning is either not configured or not enabled. They also are
the starting values for P, I, and D used by the self-tune algorithm, STUN.
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 6 - EXACT Tuning
141
If you have little or no knowledge of the PID values required for your process and choose not to run PRETUNE, you can start with the factory-set
values. EXACT eventually corrects any unreasonable initial values.
Noise Band
(NB)
Virtually every process measurement has the potential of being “noisy.” The
term, noise, is used because the measurement data contains no information
useful for loop tuning. To avoid an attempt to extract tuning information
when none is present, the self-tune algorithm must know the peak-to-peak
magnitude of this noise. Self-tuning begins whenever the error exceeds
twice the noise band. The magnitude of the noise band is also used by the
self-tune algorithm to determine whether or not an observed peak is noise.
Derivative
Factor
(DFCT)
In some processes, such as those with large dead time or high measurement
noise, derivative action is not beneficial. In others, it is very helpful.
The DFCT Derivative Factor provides a mechanism for you to attenuate or
amplify the influence of derivative to period ratio. By varying this factor,
you can change the value of the adapted derivative term. Setting this factor
to 0.0 transforms the controller into a PI controller; setting it to 1.0 produces normal derivative action. For processes that require a large amount of
derivative action (such as a double integral process), DFCT can be increased
to as much as 4.0.
Maximum
Wait Time
(WMAX)
The self-tune algorithm requires an estimate of the time scale of the process.
This parameter defines the maximum time that the algorithm waits for the
second peak before deciding the response is non-oscillatory (see Figure 6-5).
WMAX should be set greater than half the maximum period of oscillation T
(refer to Figure 6-6) and less than eight times the minimum period of oscillation T, or T/2 <WMAX< 8T.
ERROR
Figure 6-5. Maximum Wait Time (WMAX)
WMAX
TIME
142
762CNA Controller - 6 - EXACT Tuning
MI 018-885 February 1998
Figure 6-6. Period of Oscillation (T)
ERROR
T/2 < WMAX < 8T
T
TIME
Change
Limit (CLM)
You may want to limit the maximum and minimum values of P and I calculated by EXACT. The CLM parameter is the factor by which PF and IF are
multiplied and divided to set these limits. Division is used to set the lower
limit; multiplication for the upper limit. For example, if PF equals 100 and
CLM equals 4, P calculated by EXACT will be limited to values between 25
and 400%.
Output
Cycling
Limit (LIM)
EXACT monitors the controller output when it is oscillating at a frequency
higher than that to which the loop can respond. If the average peak-to-peak
amplitude exceeds LIM for over three minutes, the controller is automatically detuned by increasing P and reducing D. This feature is useful for processes that have very little dead time and that require a high controller gain.
For this type of process, the value of LIM should be reduced.
Target
Damping
(DMP) and
Overshoot
(OVR)
Since neither damping nor overshoot can generally be set independently, the
algorithm uses the larger deviation from target. Generally, damping minus
its target is the greater since the overshoot target is usually chosen as 50%,
while the damping target is usually 10% to 20%. See Figure 6-7.
Figure 6-7. Damping and Overshoot
ERROR
E1
E3
E2
MI 018-885
February 1998
OVR =
E2
E1
DMP =
E3 E2
E1 E2
TIME
762CNA Controller - 6 - EXACT Tuning
143
BUMP
Parameter
The PTUN function uses the BUMP parameter to introduce a small process upset for generating data for input to STUN. The value entered determines the magnitude and direction of the upset. The BUMP value,
however, should not be so large that it drives the output off scale. For
example, if the output is at 6% of scale, with the measurement steady and
near the set point, a BUMP value of -8% would drive the output off scale
(to -2%). Therefore, its value is automatically decreased to -6%. If the
BUMP value is too small to activate the pretune algorithm, the error message PTUN = SMALL 1 will not disappear. In this case, the BUMP should
be increased and PTUN rerun.
Using EXACT Tuning with 762C Controllers
Table 6-5, “EXACT Parameters,” on page 155 defines the parameters used
by EXACT. Table 6-6, “EXACT Parameter Limits and Values,” on page 156
defines limits and default values for each. In both tables, the parameters are
listed in the same sequence in which they appear in the display.
Use of Structure Diagrams
Structure diagrams illustrate graphically the sequence in which displays
appear on the face of the 762CNA controller as you press various keys. A
structure diagram is a map of the product structure that enables you to
move easily from one parameter or display to another.
To enter the structure from normal operating mode, press TAG. You can
then move around within the structure by using ACK, SEL, and the ∆/∇
keys. To leave the structure and return to normal operation, press TAG at
any time.
While you are in the structure (after pressing TAG), use ACK to accept a
displayed value or to move to the right or to the next item in the diagram.
Use SEL to step to the left or backward in minor increments. Use the ∆/∇
keys to display a different value in a sequence or to move directly up or
down to a different location in the structure. Key functions are described in
more detail in Table 6-1.
Figure 6-8, which is an excerpt from Structure Diagram 4 (see page 241),
shows the part of the 762CNA configuration sequence that pertains to
EXACT.
144
762CNA Controller - 6 - EXACT Tuning
MI 018-885 February 1998
Keys Used with EXACT
Table 6-1. Keys Used with EXACT
Key
Function
TAG
Press to move from normal operation to the product structure.
When in the product structure, press TAG to return to normal operation.
Press to accept a displayed value or to move the next item in the
structure (to the right or down in the structure).
Press to increase the value displayed by one increment, to display
the next item in a series of items, or to move upward in the structure
to the next item. Press/hold to increase the rate of change of a
value.
Press to decrease the value displayed by one increment, to display
the next item in a series of items, or to move down in the structure
to the next item. Press/hold to increase the rate of change of a
value.
Press to move backward in the structure in minor increments.
ACK
∆
∇
SEL
Responding to a ? Prompt
If a question mark appears in the alphanumeric display (on the right side of
the lower line), it means that an additional user action or data entry is
required.
When a question mark appears, you should perform one of the following:
• Press the ACK key to acknowledge that the parameter shown is the
desired one.
• Press the ∆ or ∇ key to display a different parameter. Press again and again
until desired parameter is displayed. Then press ACK to accept the
parameter.
• Press the ∆ or ∇ key to change the value. Press ACK to accept the value.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 6 - EXACT Tuning
145
Figure 6-8. Structure Diagram for EXACT
TAG
READ ?
SET ?
ACK OPTUNE
SECURE
TUNE C1
ACK (if configured in SHOWOP)
ACK
ACK
ACK
PASSCODE
ALLTUNE
PF
•
•
•
EXACT
Repeat until EXACT appears.
(The sequence depends on how SHOWOP is configured.)
ACK
ACK
STATE
ON
Use these to turn EXACT
(STUN)on or off. (Press
OFF
ACK to accept selection).
STATE
RD EXACT
ENT
STUN
P
I
D
Use these to read status
and values of EXACT
PK 1
parameters.
PK 2
PK 3
TPK 1
TPK 2
TPK 3
ERR
USER SET
PTUNE
NB
WMAX
DMP
OVR
CLM
DFCT
LIM
BUMP
STATE
Use these to set
user-adjustable
EXACT parameters
Use these to turn PTUNE
on or off. (Press ACK to
accept selection.)
ON
OFF
RD PTUNE
Use this to read
PTUNE status messages
146
762CNA Controller - 6 - EXACT Tuning
MI 018-885 February 1998
Configuring EXACT
You enter all EXACT parameters into controller memory by stepping the
display through the structure diagram to USER SET and then selecting/
entering the values. To step the display to a desired location in the structure
diagram, repeatedly press either the ACK or ∆/∇ keys until the desired message appears on the display, using the Structure Diagram as a map.
EXACT configuration consists of entering three Yes/No decisions and 8
numerical parameter entries. The process itself determines 10 additional
parameters.
In configuring EXACT, you must make the following decisions:
1
Should EXACT be configured into controller?
2
Should the operator be allowed to read values and status of parameters and change those that are adjustable — without using security
passcode?
3
Do you intend to use the PTUNE pre-tuning function to calculate
initial parameter values?
You must also enter values (or use the factory-set default values) for the following parameters:
NB*
WMAX*
DMP
OVR
CLM
DFCT*
LIM
BUMP
Noise Band
Maximum waiting time for peaks
Damping
Overshoot
Clamp (sets limits for P and I influences)
Derivative factor
Cycling limit
Magnitude and sign of PTUN upset
*These values can be automatically determined by using PTUN.
For a detailed description of the procedure for making these entries, refer to
the Tutorial Example that follows on page 150. For a description of the
complete configuration process, refer to “” on page 49.
Note that you can change any of the Yes/No decisions or the values of the 8
adjustable parameters at any time.
Status Messages
When EXACT is configured and enabled, self-tuning occurs automatically
whenever the measurement deviates from the set point by an amount
greater than twice the value of the noise band (NB) parameter.
If you step the display to RD EXACT ENT during the STUN correction
process, a status message appears. The message shows the reason why a
specific corrective action was taken. See Table 6-4, “Messages – RD
EXACT ENT,” on page 149 for a list of these messages.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 6 - EXACT Tuning
147
Status Messages (cont.)
If you step the display to RD EXACT STUN during the correction process,
a different sequence of messages will appear. Each message displays the status of the specific correction action currently taking place. See Table 6-3 for
a list of these messages.
Messages — Read EXACT Pretune
Table 6-2. RD EXACT PTUNE
Display
Meaning
RD PTUNE
RD PTUNE = OFF
RD PTUNE
= IN AUTO?
RD PTUNE
= SMALL 1
Specific step in operation of pretune function.
Pretune function has not been switched on.
Pretune function is ready. Put controller in AUTO.
RD PTUNE
= WAIT 2
RD PTUNE
= PID 3
RD PTUNE
= NB 4
RD PTUNE
= FINISH
RD PTUNE
= INC WRONG
RD PTUNE
= NOISE
Phase 1. Small (<2.5%) change in measurement. (If message
lasts longer than twice process dead time, value of BUMP is too
small.)
Phase 2. Waiting for steady state.
Phase 3. New values of P, I, and D calculated. Output is
returned to initial value.
Phase 4. Measured noise band.
Pretune function finished. Values of the 6 key EXACT parameters have been calculated and put into memory.
Pretuning not completed because controller output action
(INC/INC or INC/DEC) is configured wrong.
Pretuning not completed because value of noise band (NB) is
too small.
Messages — Read EXACT Self-tune
Table 6-3. RD EXACT STUN
148
Display
Meaning
RD EXACT STUN
STUN = QUIET
STUN = LOCATE
1, 2, or 3
STUN = VERIFY
1, 2, or 3
STUN = ADAPT
STUN = SETTLE
STUN = MANUAL
STUN = INACTIVE
Status of specific corrective action taking place.
No corrective action is taking place (error is <2NB).
A peak (1, 2, or 3) has been located.
The located peak (1, 2, or 3) has been verified.
P, I, and/or D has been adjusted.
Waiting for next peak.
Self-tuning is operational, but controller is in MAN.
EXACT is temporarily disabled due to a configured condition
that affects the closed-loop control.
762CNA Controller - 6 - EXACT Tuning
MI 018-885 February 1998
Messages — Read EXACT Entries
Table 6-4. Messages – RD EXACT ENT
Display
Meaning
RD EXACT ENT
Reason why specific corrective action was taken. (This parameter is updated every time P, I, and/or D is adjusted.)
Only one significant (with respect to noise band) peak was
found.
Measurement is approximately critically damped.
2 peaks found.
3 peaks found. If peaks are significant, response period is
used to adjust proportional and derivative actions.
Error signal (measurement deviation from set point) was overdamped.
Response may appear overdamped if WMAX is set too low. If
so, algorithm will tighten control settings (decrease P and I,
and increase D). This can lead to instability.
Error signal has suspicious shape that may be caused by multiple disturbances. P, I, and/or D were slightly adjusted based
on this suspicious shape.
Error signal response occurred faster than expected, based on
WMAX time. No corrective action was taken. (If response was
correct, WMAX should be reduced to allow EXACT algorithm
to operate; WMAX should be smaller than 8 times minimum
period of oscillation.)
A large set point change occurred after algorithm had located
or verified a peak. Additional corrective action did not occur
because algorithm went immediately into SETTLE (waiting for
the next peak) state. (“Large” set point change means value
larger than peak being observed.)
Error signal was observed but P, I, and/or D were not changed
because process was out of control range. (For example,
measurement is low, but output is already at high limit.)
Algorithm attempted to change P and I to values larger than
settings of PF and IF modified by CLM. These values are set
at CLM limits. (If required, settings of PF, IF, or CLM can be
changed.)
EXACT algorithm has been initialized. (This can occur when
power is turned on, or when first switching from MAN to
AUTO.)
ENT = 1 PEAK
ENT = 2 PEAKS
ENT = 3 PEAKS
ENT = DAMPED
ENT = SUSPECT
ENT = FAST
ENT = SP CHANGE
ENT = OOR
ENT = CLAMPED
ENT = INIT
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 6 - EXACT Tuning
149
Tutorial Example
The following example describes the procedure for setting up and using
EXACT tuning for achieving optimal control of a process loop. Before starting, you should decide the following:
1
Do you want to use PTUN to generate initial parameter values?
2
If not, do you want to use factory default values for all parameters or
do you want to enter your own values? If you want to enter your
own values, please have them ready to enter when requested.
A flow chart of the functional steps in the procedure is illustrated in Figure
6-9. The detailed steps of the procedure follow the general flow diagram.
150
762CNA Controller - 6 - EXACT Tuning
MI 018-885 February 1998
Figure 6-9. General Flow Diagram for Configuring EXACT
START
Turn EXACT OFF
Is EXACT OFF?
Yes
Using PTUN?
Yes
No
Planning
to use factory
defaults?
Place in MANUAL
Yes
No
Turn on PTUN
Enter
parameter
values
Place in AUTO
Bring MEAS
and SET
close
No
MEAS and
SET close?
Yes
PTUN Done?
Turn on
EXACT
No
Yes
Place in MANUAL
Place in AUTO
DONE
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 6 - EXACT Tuning
151
Tutorial Example (cont.)
NOTE The following is intended only as an example of the use of EXACT
and does not include such items as configuring passcodes. For such information, refer to the general procedures described in “” on page 49. Also,
the example assumes that FUNC 1 is configured as an EXACT controller,
TUNE C1 is present in the OPTUNE menu, and Totalizer 2, although
available, is disabled.
To configure EXACT for a typical control loop, execute the following procedure:
1
2
152
Is EXACT off? If yes, go to Step 2. If not, do the following:
a
From normal operation, press TAG to go to READ.
b
Press ∇ to go to SET.
c
Press ACK three times to go to PF.
d
Press ∇ three times to go to EXACT.
e
Press ACK to go to STATE.
f
Press ACK.
g
If OFF appears, press ACK to accept. If not, press ∇ to display
OFF. Then press ACK to accept.
h
The display will show RD EXACT.
i
Go to Step 2.
Are you planning to use PTUN? If not, go to Step 3. If yes, do the
following:
a
Press ∇ repeatedly until the display shows PTUNE.
b
Press ACK to step to STATE ?
c
Press ACK again to step to STATE = ?
d
Press ACK. The current status is then displayed.
e
If ON, press ACK to accept the value. If OFF, press ∇ until
PTUNE = ON appears.
f
Press ACK to step to PTUN READ ?
g
Press ACK again to display RD PTUNE = ?
h
Press ACK repeatedly until IN AUTO appears.
i
Press A/M to accept. This places the controller in AUTO.
j
The display will then show a sequence of status messages. When
the message PTUN = FINISH appears, press TAG to place the
controller into MAN.
k
Go to Step 5.
762CNA Controller - 6 - EXACT Tuning
MI 018-885 February 1998
Tutorial Example (cont.)
3
Since you are not planning to use PTUN, you either have to enter
new parameter values or use the factory-set defaults. If you plan to
use defaults, go to Step 5. If you want to enter new values, go to
Step 4.
4
To enter new parameter values, do the following:
5
a
Press TAG to step to READ.
b
Press ∇ to move to SET.
c
Press ACK three times to move to PF.
d
Press ∇ four times to move to EXACT.
e
Press ACK to move to STATE.
f
Press ∇ twice to move to USER SET.
g
Press ACK to step to NB?
h
Use the SEL key to select the digit to be changed. Use the ∆/∇
keys to change the value of the digit.
i
Press ACK to accept value and move to the next digit.
j
When you have entered all digits correctly, press ACK to accept
the value.
k
Press ACK to step to the next parameter. Execute the data entry
steps for this parameter and press ACK to move to the next.
l
When you have entered all parameters, press TAG. Proceed to
Step 5.
Verify that measurement and set point are close to each other and
that the process is stable. If not OK, wait before proceeding further.
If the process is OK, turn EXACT ON. To do this execute the following:
a
Step the display to EXACT STATE ?.
b
Press ACK to display STATE = _____.
c
If display shows STATE = ON, press ACK to accept. If display
shows STATE = OFF, press ∇ until display shows STATE =
ON.
d
Press ACK to accept.
e
Press TAG to place the controller in AUTO.
The controller is now in AUTO with EXACT enabled and operating in the
STUN mode. To observe the status of the STUN process, execute the following procedure:
MI 018-885
1
Press TAG to move to READ.
2
Press ∇ to move to SET.
3
Press ACK three times to move to PF.
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 6 - EXACT Tuning
153
Tutorial Example (cont.)
4
Press ∇ four times to move to EXACT.
5
Press ACK to move to STATE.
6
Press ∇ to move to RD EXACT.
7
press ACK to move to STATE.
8
Press ∇ twice to move to STUN.
9
Press ACK to display the current step (one of the messages shown in
Table 6-3).
When the calculation process is complete, press TAG to return.
154
762CNA Controller - 6 - EXACT Tuning
MI 018-885 February 1998
EXACT Parameter Tables
Table 6-5. EXACT Parameters
Parameter
Meaning
PF, IF, DF
Values of proportional, integral, and derivative actions that the controller uses when EXACT tuning is not configured (or not enabled).
These are also used as initial values for P, I, and D, below.
EXACT STATE Should EXACT tuning be enabled (ON or OFF)?
EXACT
The 18 parameters (below) that comprise EXACT algorithm.
P,
Latest updated values of proportional, integral, and derivative
I,
actions that the controller is using. (Original starting values came
D
from MODES PF, IF, and DF, above.)
PK1, PK2,
Actual magnitudes of most recent series of error peaks. Error
PK3
expressed as amount of deviation of measurement from set point.
TPK1, TPK2,
Actual time intervals between most recent series of error peaks
TPK3
(from upset to Peak 1, Peak 1 to Peak 2, Peak 2 to Peak 3).
ERR
Error. Deviation of measurement from set point.
NB
Noise Band. Error band (±) within which process will be controlled
by last values of P, I, and D. When error exceeds 2xNB, corrective
action will start (EXACT starts to look for peaks).
WMAX
Maximum waiting time between Peak 1 and Peak 2.
DMP
Damping. Desired amount of damping of measurement signal.
OVR
Overshooting. Desired amount of measurement overshooting.
CLM
Clamp. Factor by which PF or IF values are either multiplied or
divided by to establish maximum and minimum EXACT values of P
and I.
DFCT
Derivative Factor. Factor by which D is multiplied.
LIM
Limit. If output cycles for more than three minutes, controller is
detuned by increasing P and decreasing D.
BUMP
Bump (upset) value for pretuning (PTUN) function, expressed as
±% of output.
RD EXACT
The status of the various affected parameters during corrective
action.
RD EXACT ENT Reason why specific action was taken. Ten messages are available; see Table 6-3, “RD EXACT STUN,” on page 148.
RD EXACT
Self-tuning. Specific step just completed during corrective action.
STUN
Eight messages are available for 762CNA controller. See Table 63, “RD EXACT STUN,” on page 148 for a detailed list.
EXACT PTUNE Pretuning function. Method of obtaining initial values of six key
EXACT parameters, if details are not known about process.
PTUNE STATE Should pretune function be enabled (ON or OFF)?
PTUNE
Specific pretuning step just completed. Nine messages are availRD PTUNE
able; see Table 6-2, “RD EXACT PTUNE,” on page 148.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 6 - EXACT Tuning
155
Parameter Limits and Values
Table 6-6. EXACT Parameter Limits and Values
Parameter Limits
Parameter*
Min
Max
Default Value
PF
IF
DF
EXACT
EXACT STATE
EXACT
P
I
D
PK1
PK2
PK3
TPK1
TPK2
TPK3
ERR
NB
WMAX
DMP
OVR
CLM
DFCT
LIM
BUMP
RD EXACT
RD EXACT ENT
RD EXACT STUN
EXACT PTUNE
PTUNE STATE
PTUNE RD PTUNE
1%
0.01 min/rep
0 min
8000%
200 min/rep
100 min
200%
2.00 min/rep
0.0 min
ON
OFF
OFF
1%
0.01
0
–102%
–102%
–102%
8000%
200 min
100 min
+102%
+102%
+102%
<WMAX
WMAX
>WMAX
+102%
30%
200 min
1
1
100
4
80%
+50%
**
**
**
–102%
0.5%
0.5 min
0.1
0
1.25
0
2%
-50%
User
Configuration
↑
|
|
Values are
determined
by process
|
|
|
|
↓
5 minutes
0.2
0.5
10
1
80%
8%
(10 messages)
(11 messages)
INIT
MANUAL
(No Entry)
(No Entry)
ON or OFF
(9 Messages)
OFF
OFF
OFF***
(No Entry)
* After EXACT is configured, specify the parameters listed above. These parameters can also be specified in OPTUNE if
the controller is so configured.
** Starting values of P, I, and D are same as PF, IF, and DF (at top of table). EXACT will then continually update these
values.
*** PTUN STATE is normally OFF. When you start to use pretune function, you are prompted to turn it ON. After function is completed, it automatically resets to OFF.
156
762CNA Controller - 6 - EXACT Tuning
MI 018-885 February 1998
762C SINGLE
STATION
MICRO
Controller
February 1998
Ð
Preface
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Appendix A
Appendix B
Appendix C
Appendix D
Appendix E
Appendix F
Glossary
Index
• xiii
Quick Check • 1
Product Overview • 11
Installation • 23
Configuration • 49
Operation • 109
EXACT Tuning • 135
Calibration, Troubleshooting,
Maintenance • 159
Specifications • 183
Configuration Worksheets • 193
Structure Diagrams • 237
Parts List • 247
Dimensional Print • 255
Functional Diagram • 261
• 267
• 287
The Intelligent Automation People
158
762CNA Controller
MI 018-885 February 1998
Calibration,
Troubleshooting,
Maintenance
7
This chapter is divided into the following major sections:
• Calibration • 160
• Troubleshooting • 173
• Maintenance • 176
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 7 - Calibration, Troubleshooting, Maintenance
159
Calibration
Frequency of Calibration
The inputs and outputs have been calibrated in the factory to an accuracy of
±0.1%. Normally these functions do not require recalibration unless:
• Components have been changed.
• RTD or frequency (if present) measurement range has been changed.
• Controller configuration (in NOVRAM) was copied from another
controller.
Calibration Equipment Accuracy
All calibration equipment (milliammeter, voltmeter, etc.) should have an
accuracy of better than ±0.1%. If you use the measurement transmitter as
the calibrating milliampere input signal source, the transmitter must be in
calibration.
Calibration Connections
The calibrating signal for current and voltage inputs (IN 1, IN 2, IN 3,
IN 4) can be generated internally in the controller or connected externally at
the 32-pin terminal board at the rear of the housing. RTD input and measurement of outputs (OUT 1 and OUT 2) are done at the 32-pin terminal
board.
Calibration Procedures
NOTE Calibration and a Display Test, contained within the product struc-
ture, are conducted via the keypad on the front panel. To leave the Normal Operating mode to do these functions and return to Normal
Operation, press the TAG key. Use the ∆ and ∇ keys to move the display
up or down and the ACK key to move the display forward horizontally in
the product structure. Use the SEL key to move the display in minor
increments back through the product structure.
The ∆ and ∇ keys are also used to adjust values that are shown on the lower
alphanumeric display line. The digits are entered from right to left. If a ∆
or ∇ key is continuously pressed, numbers in the next highest significant
digit will change. Releasing and then pressing the key repeatedly causes
the numbers to change by one unit (in normal counting sequence) with
each depression.
160
762CNA Controller - 7 - Calibration, Troubleshooting, Maintenance MI 018-885 February
Preliminary
Procedures
Access the CONFIGuration or TEST parameter in the product structure
using the TAG, ∇, and ACK keys on the front panel following Figure 7-1.
Use the ∆ and ∇ and ACK keys and Figure 7-2 as you conduct calibration or
display tests as described in this section of your instruction.
Figure 7-1. Structure Diagram 1
Normal Operation
TAG
READ
ACK
SET
SET
OPTUNE
SET
SECURE
ACK
PASSCODE ACK
SECURE
ALLTUNE
SECURE
SHOWOP
SECURE
CONFIG
SECURE
CALIB
Continued
on
Diagram 2
SECURE
TEST
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 7 - Calibration, Troubleshooting, Maintenance
161
Figure 7-2. Structure Diagram 2
SECURE
CALIB
CALIB
INPUTS
INPUTS
ANALOG
ANALOG
INTERNAL
INTERNAL
ANALOG
EXTERNAL
EXTERNAL
IN 1 ZR
EXTERNAL
IN 1 FS
EXTERNAL
IN 2 ZR
EXTERNAL
IN 2 FS
EXTERNAL
IN 3 ZR
EXTERNAL
IN 3 FS
EXTERNAL
IN 4 ZR
EXTERNAL
IN 4 FS
INPUTS
FREQ
FREQ
F1
FREQ
F2
CALIB
OUTPUTS
OUTPUTS
OUT 1
OUTPUTS
OUT 2
SECURE
TEST
162
TEST
DISPLAY
F1
ZERO
ZERO
F1
FS
FS
F2
ZERO
ZERO
F2
FS
FS
OUT 1
ZERO
ZERO
OUT 1
FS
FS
OUT 2
ZERO
ZERO
OUT 2
FS
FS
888888888
888888888
762CNA Controller - 7 - Calibration, Troubleshooting, Maintenance MI 018-885 February
Current or
Voltage
Inputs (IN 1,
IN 2, IN 3,
and IN 4)
The source of the calibrating signal (from either an internal or external
source) determines if the EXTERNAL or INTERNAL calibration is used.
INTERNAL
Calibration
To perform an internal calibration, do the following:
EXTERNAL
Calibration
To perform an external calibration, do the following:
1
1
Using the ACK key, move to INPUTS ANALOG and then to
ANALOG INTERNAL in the product structure. Calibration
input signals (corresponding to 4 and 20 mA or 1 and 5 V) are
generated internally. When the ACK key is pressed, calibration is
completed during an 8-second countdown for all four inputs
(whether used or not). Accuracy of the internal input signal is
±0.25% of span.
Connect an adjustable input source (4 to 20 mA or 1 to 5 V, as
applicable) to terminals of input being calibrated (Input 1, 2, 3,
or 4) as shown in Figure 7-3.
NOTE If the external calibrating signal is in error, the controller will still
use this value as 0 or 100% input. However, if the signal error exceeds
±4.5%, an error message (TOO HIGH or TOO LOW) will flash and the
opportunity to recalibrate will be displayed again.
2
Turn on controller power. Adjust input source to 4.000 mA or
1.000 V, as applicable for 0% input signal.
Figure 7-3. Terminal Connections for External Current or Voltage Inputs
32-Position
Terminal Block
Input
Source
+
IN 1 +
IN 2 +
IN 3 +
IN 4 -
MI 018-885
2
4
5
7
21
23
18
20
3
Using the ACK key, move to INPUTS ANALOG and then to ANALOG INTERNAL. Using the ∇ key, go to ANALOG EXTERNAL.
4
Using the ACK key to move to EXTERNAL IN 1 ZR.
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 7 - Calibration, Troubleshooting, Maintenance
163
EXTERNAL
Calibration
(cont.)
RTD Input
5
Press ACK key to implement 0% input signal. A 8-second countdown will elapse to allow controller to average input. IN 1 FS will
now appear on lower line.
6
Adjust input source to 20.000 mA or 5.000 V, as applicable for
100% input signal.
7
Press ACK key to implement 100% input signal. A 8-second countdown will elapse to allow controller to average input.
8
Prompting on display for Input 2 (and then Inputs 3, and 4) is same
as that for Input 1. Complete this procedure for all four inputs.
This calibration procedure is similar to the EXTERNAL calibration in the
preceding section, except that the calibrating signals are resistances from a
decade box and only applies to INPUT 1. These resistances are applied to
the terminals for absolute-temperature or for temperature-difference calibration as shown in Figure 7-4.
Figure 7-4. Terminal Connections for RTD Input Calibration
Absolute Temp
Temp Difference
Ref
Meas
Decade Boxes
Terminal
Block
Terminal
Block
9
9
10
10
11
11
With absolute-temperature measurement, the resistances corresponding to
0 and 100% inputs can be determined from the IEC 100 or SAMA 100
curve, whichever is applicable. With temperature-difference measurement,
the 0 and 100% resistances listed in the applicable curve must be modified
for use in the calibration procedure. This modification is required to minimize errors due to the noncompensation of the measurement. See “Controller Range Conversion” on page 166 for this modification.
If the temperature range is being changed, the jumpers and potentiometers
on the RTD printed wiring assembly (inside the controller) must be
adjusted for the new range before calibrating the input. See “Controller
Range Conversion” on page 166.
164
762CNA Controller - 7 - Calibration, Troubleshooting, Maintenance MI 018-885 February
Frequency
Inputs
(F1 and F2)
OUT 1 and
OUT 2
This calibration requires no external connections. The calibration is accomplished entirely from the front panel keyboard.
1
Using the ACK and ∇ keys, move to INPUTS FREQ in the product structure.
2
Using the ACK key, proceed to FREQ F 1 (for F 1 calibration) or
the ACK and ∇ keys to proceed to FREQ F 2 (for F 2 calibration).
Follow the prompting which is summarized below.
3
Press ACK key. The lower display line shows ZERO ?. Press ACK
key again and ZERO will move to top line.
4
Note that the default value for F1and F2 ZERO is 0. Use ∆ and ∇
keys to enter on lower display line frequency corresponding to 0%
input. Press ACK key to implement 0% calibration.
5
The lower display line now shows FS (full scale). Press ACK key (FS
will move to top line). Note that the default value for F1 full scale is
2000 and for F2 full scale is 1000. Use ∆ and ∇ keys to enter on
lower display line frequency corresponding to 100% (full scale)
input. The maximum full-scale input is 9999 Hz. Press ACK key to
implement 100% calibration.
6
If F 1 was just calibrated, F 2 will now appear on lower line. If F 2
is to be calibrated, repeat procedure beginning with Step 3.
1
If OUT 1 is being calibrated, connect a 0 to 20 mA milliammeter
to terminals 26 and 27 on the 32-pin terminal block. If OUT 2 is
being calibrated, connect a 0 to 20 mA milliammeter or a 0 to
5 V dc voltmeter (as applicable) to terminals 8 and 6. See Figure
7-5.
NOTE If output does not calibrate, check jumper positions for 1-5 V dc or
4-20 mA. Refer to“Positioning Links” on page 26.
Figure 7-5. Terminal Connections for Output Calibration
Terminal Block
+
26
OUT 1 27
+
OUT 2-
2
MI 018-885
February 1998
8
6
Using the ACK and ∇ keys, move to CALIB OUTPUTS in the
product structure. If OUT 1 is being calibrated, proceed to OUTPUTS OUT 1 by pressing the ACK key. If OUT 2 is being calibrated, proceed to OUTPUTS OUT 2 with the ACK and ∇ keys.
Follow display prompts as summarized below.
762CNA Controller - 7 - Calibration, Troubleshooting, Maintenance
165
OUT 1 and
OUT 2
(cont.)
3
Press ACK key. The lower display line shows ZERO. Press ACK
key again and ZERO will move to upper display line. Use ∆ and ∇
keys to adjust meter reading to 0% controller output. For OUT 1,
reading should be 4.000 mA. For OUT 2, reading should be
4.000 mA (4 to 20 mA output) or 1.000 V (1 to 5 V output). Press
ACK key to implement this value. FS (full scale) will appear on
lower display line.
4
Use ∆ and ∇ keys to adjust meter reading to 100% controller output.
For OUT 1, reading should be 20.000 mA. For OUT 2, reading
should be 20.000 mA (4 to 20 mA output) or 5.000 V (1 to 5 V
output). Press ACK key to implement this value.
Controller Range Conversion
Use the applicable procedures described below to change the input range of
the controller.
Conversion
from 4 to 20
mA to
1 to 5 V
Range
1
Remove power from controller.
2
Remove rear housing assembly (containing 32-pin terminal block)
by removing four screws.
3
Snip out the resistor associated with the input range being changed.
See Figure 7-6 for identification of resistors.
4
Replace rear housing assembly and restore power.
Figure 7-6. Location of Input Range Resistors
Input Range Resistors (4).
Cut leads to remove from
circuit.
AI3
AI2
Printed wiring board
at rear of housing
(inside view).
AI4
AI1
Connectors
166
762CNA Controller - 7 - Calibration, Troubleshooting, Maintenance MI 018-885 February
Conversion
from 1 to 5 V
to 4 to 20
mA Range
1
If power source is connected to controller, disconnect it.
2
Solder new input resistor, part number NO986FK (wire wound
250 ohm ±0.1%, 2 W) externally at the 32-pin terminal block
between the “+” and “-” input signal leads of the input range being
changed. See Figure 7-7.
3
Restore power.
Figure 7-7. Addition of Input Range Resistors
Solder
23
Input 3
Analog Input
Leads
Input 2
21
Input 4
7
20
Input 1
18
5
4
2
Terminal Board
Conversion
of RTD Input
Range
Use IEC 100 or SAMA 100 curves (refer to Foxboro TI 005-028 or
TI 005-274), whichever is applicable, to determine resistances corresponding to the desired temperature range limits.
Preliminary
Steps
To make the conversion, first perform the following steps:
MI 018-885
1
Remove controller from housing and place in special housing,
part number L0122TZ (available from Foxboro), designed to
facilitate calibration while the unit is powered.
2
Connect one decade box (for absolute-temperature measurement) or
two decade boxes (for temperature-difference measurement) to the
32-pin terminal block as shown in Figure 7-4.
3
On RTD printed wiring assembly, connect 0 to 12 V voltmeter to
pins 9 (+) and 1 (-). Use miniature hook clips or internal pin connectors to make connections. See Figure 7-8.
4
On PWA, connect Jumpers J1, J3, and J4 as specified in Figure 7-8
and Table 7-1 through Table 7-3. (Jumper J4 is used only with temperature-difference measurement.)
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 7 - Calibration, Troubleshooting, Maintenance
167
Figure 7-8. RTD Printed Wiring Assembly
0 to 12 V Voltmeter
1 (-)
P9
P1
P2
P8
P3
P4
P7
P5
P6
9 (+)
Zero Elevation
Jumper (J3)
Zero Pot.
(R27)
P15
P16 P17
Temp. Difference.
Jumper (J4)
P12
P13 P10
Span Pot. (R28)
P11
P14
Span Jumper (J1)
Table 7-1. RTD Span Jumper Positions
Temperature Span Limits
Jumper
Position
°F
°C
(J1)
200 and 300
300 and 500
500 and 900
900 and 1800
111 and 167
167 and 278
278 and 500
500 and 1000
P10 - P11
P10 - P12
P10 - P13
P10 - P14
Table 7-2. RTD Zero Elevation Jumper Positions
Lower Range Value
Temperature
Jumper
Position
°F
°C
(J3)
Above 1170
800 to 1170
450 to 800
125 to 450
-180 to +125
-325 to -150
Above 630
425 to 630
230 to 425
55 to 230
-120 to +55
-200 to -100
P1 P3 P5 P5 P3 P1 -
P2
P4
P6
P7
P8
P9*
*With temperature-difference measurement, put jumper in P1 - P9 position.
168
762CNA Controller - 7 - Calibration, Troubleshooting, Maintenance MI 018-885 February
Table 7-3. RTD Temperature Difference Jumper Positions
Absolute
Temperature
Measurement
Reference
Temperature
Jumper
Position
(J4)
Greater than Lower Range Value
Less than Lower Range Value
P15 - P16
P16 - P17
5
On PWA, turn ZERO and SPAN Potentiometers (R27 and R28) to
middle of their adjustments (about 15 turns in from either end of
adjustment).
6
Restore power to controller. Continue with applicable procedure
(absolute temperature or temperature difference) that follows.
To perform an absolute temperature measurement, do the following:
1
Complete the Preliminary Steps described above.
NOTE Note In Steps 2 and 3 below, E1 and E2 must be between -4 and
+12 V. If either is outside of these limits, adjust ZERO Potentiometer
(R27) so that the value is between these limits.
2
Set decade box to resistance corresponding to URV (upper-range
value). Record reading of voltmeter; this is E2 in equation in Step 4.
3
Set decade box to resistance corresponding to LRV (lower range
value). Record reading of voltmeter; this is E1 in equation in Step 4.
4
Calculate E3 in equation
4 × E2
E3 = -------------------E2 – E1
MI 018-885
5
Set decade box at URV, and adjust SPAN Potentiometer (R28) so
that voltmeter reads E3.
6
Set decade box at LRV, and adjust ZERO Potentiometer (R27) so
that voltmeter reads 1.000 ±0.004 V.
7
Set decade box at URV. If voltmeter does not read 5±0.01 V, adjust
SPAN Potentiometer (R28) to get correct reading. Repeat Steps 6
and 7 until both readings are satisfactory.
8
Remove power, disconnect voltmeter and decade box, remove controller from special housing and replace in original housing, reconnect decade box, restore power.
9
Calibrate Input IN 1 (see “RTD Input” on page 164).
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 7 - Calibration, Troubleshooting, Maintenance
169
Temperature
Difference
Measurement
To perform a temperature difference measurement, do the following:
1
Ascertain that new range meets following limitations:
a
b
2
Reference temperature (TREF) cannot be higher than midpoint
between LRV and URV.
Temperature difference (∆T) cannot be less than 200 °F(111 °C).
Complete “Preliminary Steps” (above).
NOTE In Steps 4 and 5 below, E1 and E2 must be between -4 and +12 V.
If either is outside of these limits, adjust ZERO Potentiometer (R27) so
that value is between these limits.
3
Set reference decade box to resistance corresponding to lower-range
value (RLRV). Set measurement decade box to resistance corresponding to upper-range value (RURV).
4
Record voltmeter reading; this is E2 in equation in Step 6.
5
Set both decade boxes at RLRV. Record voltmeter reading; this is
E1 in equation in Step 6.
6
Solve for E3 in equation
4 × E2
E3 = -------------------E2 – E1
7
Set each decade box to value specified in Step 3. Adjust SPAN
Potentiometer (R28) so that voltmeter reads E3.
8
Set both decade boxes to RREF. Adjust ZERO Potentiometer
(R27) so that voltmeter reads Y, where
TREF – TLRV
Y = 1 + ------------------------------------TURV – TLRV
170
762CNA Controller - 7 - Calibration, Troubleshooting, Maintenance MI 018-885 February
Example:
TLRV = -50 °F, TURV = 150 °F, and TREF = 50 °F
[Note that TREF is at middle (50%) of span]
50 – ( -50 )
Y = 1 + --------------------------- × 4 = 3V
150 – ( -50 )
Calculating
Calibrating
Resistances
for Temp.
Difference
Measurement
9
Remove power, disconnect voltmeter and decade boxes, unplug controller from rear housing assembly, reinstall rear housing assembly in
housing, replace controller in housing, reconnect decade boxes,
restore power.
10
Calibrate Input IN 1 (See “RTD Input” on page 164). Use R0%
and R100% calculated in the equations below as the calibrating
resistances for zero and full-scale, respectively.
Temperature-difference is an uncompensated, nonlinear measurement.
When calibrating the RTD input, modify the RURV and RLRV values used
in the procedure above to minimize the error due to this nonlinearity, as
shown in the equations:
( TREF – TLRV )
R0% = RREF – ( RURV – RLRV ) × -----------------------------------------( TURV – TLRV )
( TREF – TLRV )
R100% = RREF – ( RURV – RLRV ) × -----------------------------------------( TURV – TLRV )
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 7 - Calibration, Troubleshooting, Maintenance
171
Output 2 Selection
Output 2 is jumper selectable as 1 to 5 V dc nominal into 2 kΩ minimum or
4 to 20 mA nominal into 500 Ω maximum. See Table 7-4 for jumper position and Figure 7-9 for jumper location.
Table 7-4. Output 2 Jumper Positions
Output
Jumper Position
4 to 20 mA
1 to 5 V
P52 - P53
P52 - P54
Figure 7-9. Output 2 Jumper Location
P53
P52
P54
172
762CNA Controller - 7 - Calibration, Troubleshooting, Maintenance MI 018-885 February
Troubleshooting
Test Display
This TEST checks that all portions of the display can be illuminated. It is
accessed by going to SECURE CALIB in the menu structure (See
Figure 7-1) and pressing the ∇ key. The display will show SECURE TEST.
Press the ACK key. The display will change to TEST DISPLAY. Press the
ACK key again. If any segment of the display (except the controller fault
indicator) is not illuminated, that segment is malfunctioning. Press ACK to
return to Normal mode after the test.
Error
Messages
Certain problems will generate error messages on the display. These messages are described below:
NOVRAM COPY FAIL: Copy function was not successfully executed.
Make sure NOVRAMS and copy accessory are properly seated and try
again.
NOVRAM ALL FAIL*: Memory module failures. Both original (master)
and copy failed.
NOVRAM MSTR FAIL*: Memory module failure.
WRONG NOVRAM*: Memory module is for a 760, 761, or other controller or contains corrupt data.
*Replace NOVRAM if these errors occur.
Display
Problems
Symptom: Display becomes unstable and flashes on and off.
Possible Cause: Input voltage may have dropped below minimum level.
Symptom: Display goes blank.
Possible Cause: Input voltage may have dropped below minimum level.
Symptom: Display blank and controller fault indicator flashes.
Possible Cause: NOVRAM may not be properly seated or is damaged.
Configuration
Problems
Compare the actual configuration of the parameter in question against the
desired configuration as recorded on the Configuration Worksheet. If the
worksheet is not available, place the NOVRAM in another controller. If the
problem is present in the second controller, it is most likely a configuration
problem. The copy accessory can often be used to save a corrupted
NOVRAM. Copy a good NOVRAM onto the corrupted NOVRAM.
If the controller oscillates when in automatic, and if the output and measurement stop oscillating when placed in manual, the controller may not be
tuned properly.
If the controller tuning parameters wind up when EXACT is configured and
left on, switch EXACT off or the controller to manual and the output to a
safe state.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 7 - Calibration, Troubleshooting, Maintenance
173
Diagnostic
Checks
CAUTION
You can check Analog Output 1 and 2, 1 and 5 V voltage references, and
the four analog inputs in the diagnostic mode. You can also check the Contact Inputs and Outputs. To enter this mode, remove the controller from
its housing and insert jumper, part number B0138LY (available from
Foxboro) on pins P2 and P51. See Figure 7-10. Place controller in housing
on bench and supply power. The display will briefly flash the message
“EXACT CONTROL” and then go dark. Pressing various keys will cause
different patterns to appear on the digital and bargraph displays, including
all segments ON and all segments OFF.
Never perform diagnostic checks while controller is connected to a process.
The checks may change output values.
Figure 7-10. Location of Diagnostic Jumper
Jumper B0138LY
P2
P51
174
762CNA Controller - 7 - Calibration, Troubleshooting, Maintenance MI 018-885 February
Diagnostic
Checks
(cont.)
Now that you are in the diagnostics mode, you can run eight diagnostic
checks (one with each of the keys on the front panel). See Table 7-5. Read
the current at Output 1 on a milliammeter connected at terminals 26(+)
and 27(-) and the current or voltage (depending on the position of the output jumper) at Output 2 at terminals 8(+) and 6(-). If the current or voltage reading does not match the expected value for the parameter being
tested, there is a problem. The last four checks require an input. Connect
inputs at terminals shown in Figure 7-3.
Table 7-5. Diagnostics
Key
Tested Parameter
∆
Full Scale
(approx. 23 mA or 5.75 V)
Zero (0 mA or 0 V)
5 V Reference
(20 mA or 5 V)
1 V Reference
(4 mA or 0 V)
Analog Input 4
Analog Input 3
Analog Input 1
Analog Input 2
∇
W/P
SEL
R/L
TAG
A/M
ACK
In the Diagnostic Mode, Contact Inputs are repeated to the Contact Outputs. Contact Inputs and Outputs are connected at the terminals shown in
Table 7-6.
Table 7-6. Contact Input and Output Terminals
Signal
Terminal
CI 1
Common
CI 2
CO 1
Common
CO 2
29
30
28
32
30
31
Return to Normal Operating Mode by removing power from your bench
housing, removing the diagnostic jumper, and replacing controller into its
original housing.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 7 - Calibration, Troubleshooting, Maintenance
175
Maintenance
General Information
The maintenance of the 762CNA Controller is limited to miscellaneous
tests and checks, and replacement of the parts listed below. For part numbers, see Appendix D.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
WARNING
Front panel assembly
NOVRAM and associated three memory chips (ROMs)
Transformer assembly
Rear panel assembly
Display Cable
RTD temperature measurement and output Isolation Boards
Surge Suppressor
Miscellaneous mechanical parts
This product has many components that have critical safety characteristics.
Component substitution may impair the electrical safety of this equipment
and its suitability for use in Class I, Division 2 hazardous locations. DO
NOT substitute components. Replace components only with identical factory supplied components.
Attempts by the user to repair the printed wiring assemblies could result in
damage and voiding of the warranty. The recommended repair procedure is
replacement of the printed wiring assembly (PWA) or return of the PWA to
the factory for repair.
It is recommended that the controller be removed from its housing to a service bench for replacement of parts.
Removal and Replacement of Parts
Figure 7-11 is essentially self-explanatory in showing how parts are removed
and reinstalled. Refer to the applicable sections immediately following for
additional details.
176
762CNA Controller - 7 - Calibration, Troubleshooting, Maintenance MI 018-885 February
. . ..............
..
Figure 7-11. Controller Assembly Diagram
PANEL
REAR PANEL
ASSEMBLY
TRANSFORMER
ASSEMBLY
FUSE
LATCH
FRONT PANEL
ASSEMBLY
RTD PWA
NOVRAM (X9)
ISOLATION PWA
NUMERIC PROCESSOR FIRMWARE (lower)(X8)
NUMERIC PROCESSOR FIRMWARE (upper)(X7)
DISPLAY PROCESSOR FIRMWARE (X5)
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 7 - Calibration, Troubleshooting, Maintenance
177
Replacement of Fuse
If the controller faceplate has no illumination (including the fault indicator),
it may indicate that either the power supply external to the controller has
been interrupted or the fuse inside the controller has opened.
If the external power supply is intact, check the fuse and, if necessary, replace
it with the applicable slow-blow fuse in Table 7-7. To expose the fuse, withdraw the controller from its housing. The fuse is located on the side at the
rear of the chassis.
Table 7-7. Fuses
Front Panel
Assembly
Replacement
Supply Voltage
Current
Fuse Part No.
24 V ac or V dc
120 V ac
220, 240 V ac
2A
0.5 A
0.3 A
C3510KX
C3510KP
P0156BM
Before removing the front panel, note the routing of the two cables (display
and keypad) and how they plug into their sockets on the printed wiring
assembly.
When removing the front panel, first lower the latch cover under the keypad. Then remove the four screws holding the panel to the housing. Ease
the top of the panel out of the housing and tilt the panel forward to about
45°, and then ease the bottom out of the housing and out of the latch lever.
Precautions
When
Replacing
ROMs
The ROMs, which are MOS devices, are very susceptible to damage from
electrostatic discharge, and precautions must be taken to protect them from
potentials greater than 100 V. Procedures have been established for the storage and handling of these products to prevent electrostatic buildup, and the
user should follow recommended practices.
The ROMs (and the NOVRAM) are packed in a special conductive bag.
They should be stored in this bag until they are to be installed. Because the
NOVRAM is subject to more handling than the ROMs, it is supplied in a
conductive holder for additional protection.
Transformer
Assembly
Replacement
178
The transformer assembly can be replaced by using the following procedure:
1
Remove the signal cable.
2
Remove the four transformer assembly mounting screws and slide
the assembly out of the rear of the chassis.
3
Remove the power cable.
4
Reverse the procedure to install the new transformer assembly.
762CNA Controller - 7 - Calibration, Troubleshooting, Maintenance MI 018-885 February
RTD Input
or Isolated
Output PWA
Replacement
Replacement of
Other Parts
MI 018-885
These optional PWAs are installed side-by-side on the main component
PWA (See Figure 7-11).
Observe the following details when either option is a field installation:
1
Remove jumper(s) from socket(s) of PWA being installed. Save
jumper(s) so it can be reinstalled later if option is to be removed.
2
Plug PWA into its socket and insert mounting screws. Secure PWA
in place.
The procedures to remove and reinstall other replaceable parts will be obvious from Figure 7-11. Before removing a plug-in cable note its routing for
correct reinstallation.
February 1998
762CNA Controller - 7 - Calibration, Troubleshooting, Maintenance
179
180
762CNA Controller - 7 - Calibration, Troubleshooting, Maintenance MI 018-885 February
762C SINGLE
STATION
MICRO
Controller
February 1998
Preface
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Ð
• xiii
Quick Check • 1
Product Overview • 11
Installation • 23
Configuration • 49
Operation • 109
EXACT Tuning • 135
Calibration, Troubleshooting,
Maintenance • 159
Appendix A Specifications • 183
Appendix B Configuration Worksheets • 193
Appendix C Structure Diagrams • 237
Appendix D Parts List • 247
Appendix E Dimensional Print • 255
Appendix F Functional Diagram • 261
Glossary
• 267
Index
• 287
The Intelligent Automation People
182
762CNA Controller
MI 018-885 February 1998
Specifications
A
Functional Specifications
Table A-1. Functional Specifications — Standard Product
Item
No.
Specification
Analog Input Signals (proportional):
Analog Inputs
4
Any combination of the input types listed below. All
total
input signals are converted ten times per second
and can be characterized and/or combined in a variety of calculations.
4 to 20 mA dc
4 to 20 mA dc input (through 250Ω input resistor
Current Input
across terminals) is standard.
1 to 5 V dc
Can accept 1 to 5 V dc by removing the input resisVoltage Input
tors from the input terminals.
Thermocouple Input
1
May be substituted for any Analog Input. Lineariza(requires 893 or ITT-10
tion of displayed value is provided, as follows:
Temperature
T/C Type
Temperature Range
Transmitter or
Type J
–20 to +760 °C (–4 to +1400 °F)
equivalent)
Type K
–20 to +1380 °C (–4 to +2500 °F)
Type E
–130 to +540 °C (–200 to +1000°F)
1
May be substituted for Analog Input 1 by using a
Resistance Temperahardware option. Platinum, per IEC 100 or SAMA*
ture Detector (RTD)
100 (RC 21-4) temperature curves. Linearization of
Input, Direct or Temperdisplayed value is provided, as follows:
ature Difference MeaIEC 100
SAMA 100
surement. (Can use up
Range –200 to +850 °C
200 to +600 °C
to 4 RTDs on any input
(–330 to +1560 °F) (–330 to +1100 °F)
by using 894 transmitSpan
110 to 1000 °C
110 to 800 °C
ters for each.)
(198 to 1800 °F)
(198 to 1440 °F)
Frequency Inputs(proportional):
1 to 9999 Hz
2
Input pulse rates, voltage levels, and field power are
Frequency Input
total
compatible with Foxboro E83 Series Vortex Flowmeter, and with Foxboro 81 and 82 Series Turbine
Flowmeter having a preamplifier input. Input impedance is 250 Ω.
*Scientific Apparatus Manufacturers Association
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - A - Specifications
183
Table A-1. Functional Specifications — Standard Product (Continued)
Item
No.
1 to 9999 Hz Pulse Up/
Pulse Down Inputs
1 Pair The two frequency inputs may combined into one
1-9999 Hz pulse-up/pulse-down pair of inputs driven
by an external contact closure or voltage pulse.
Contact close/open times and pulse voltage level
are compatible with older stepping motor devices.
Contact Inputs:
Two Discrete Inputs
Control Functions:
Standard Algorithms
Other Control
Functions
Specification
Two non-isolated contact or transistor switch inputs,
5 V dc nominal open circuit voltage, 1 mA maximum
current. Used for remote status changes such as
A/M, R/L, W/P, EXT ACK, and tracking functions.
For each controller, the standard algorithms are P, I,
PD, PI, PID, and EXACT control. They may also be
configured for: nonlinear extender, ratio set point,
measurement and set point tracking, output tracking,
remote/local set point, output multiplication or summing, integral feedback, external limits for output,
simple batch control, and cascade operation.
Input bias, adjustable gain, and output bias available
for every input.
Characterizers (two available, 8 segments each,
assignable).
10 Boolean Gates, Logic {DIRECT and NOT (single
input); OR, NOR, AND, NAND, XOR, and XNOR
(dual input). Inputs selectable from contact inputs,
alarm output states, status indicator outputs, EXACT
state, gate outputs, and three fixed states.}
Signal Conditioning (square, square root, characterizer).
Split range outputs (configurable for both 4-20 mA
outputs)
Auto Selector
Totalizer
Output Signals:
Two Non-isolated
Analog Outputs
Two controllers with a single selected output. The
choice of lower, higher, or logic-selected output is
available. One common or two independent auto/
manual functions are possible.
Up to two 7-digit totalizers are available. Totalizers
can be set to integrate up to or down from a preset
value and produce a logic event output. Any internal
or external signal can be totalized.
Output 1: 4-20 mA nominal into 500 Ω maximum;
isolation provided as an option.
Output 2: 4-20 mA nominal into 500 Ω maximum, or
1-5 V dc nominal into 2 kΩ minimum, jumper selectable. Can be assigned by user for measurement,
set point, control, or conditioned input signals.
184
762CNA Controller - A - Specifications
MI 018-885 February 1998
Table A-1. Functional Specifications — Standard Product (Continued)
Item
No.
Two Discrete Outputs
Alarms
Specification
Two non-isolated open collector transistor (NPN)
switch outputs. For status indication of A/M, R/L,
W/P, and alarms. Can also be configured as the destination for any two of the Boolean Gate Outputs.
Contact ratings are 50 V dc maximum, 250 mA maximum. Leakage current is 100 µA maximum.
Four dual-level alarms are available, each with
adjustable dead band and one Boolean output.
Each alarm is configurable for Absolute, Deviation,
Rate-of-Change, High/Low, High/High, Low/Low,
Latching, Nonlatching, or Permissive. Each alarm
can be configured to act on any one of a number of
user-selected points.
Can be configured to indicate alarm status by a combination of alphanumeric display, the bar graphs, an
alarm symbol, and the contact outputs.
Calculations
Transmitter Power
Supply
Execution Rate
Toggle Mode
Dynamic
Compensation
The alarm deadband is adjustable between 0 and
100% of span.
There are three calculation functions, designated
CALC 1, CALC 2, and CALC 3. The variables in
each calculation can be any combination of direct
inputs to the controller, configured constants, and
results of other calculation blocks. The available
operators are +, –, /, *, >, <, √, and ten Boolean
gates. Open and close brackets are also available
for grouping variables.
Nominal 28 V dc power supply with a 250Ω limiting
resistor at each transmitter connection. Provides
field power for two 4-20 mA transmitters with a maximum series resistance of 350Ω in each current loop,
including the 250Ω input resistor.
Ten times per second.
If configured, the TOGGLE mode allows a user to
toggle (switch) between a menu level and the normal front panel display with a single keystroke.
The result of CALC 3 may be passed through the
dynamic compensator function prior to distribution.
This block provides lead/lag and dead time functions, each with its individual follow switch. Functionally, dead time precedes lead/lag.
Dead time allows the input to be delayed by a configured time before making it available at the output,
thus allowing the output to lead or lag the input by
the configured time. Both functions can be enabled
or by-passed selectively by using the follow
switches.
The impulse can be positive, negative, or bipolar
and is part of the lead/lag function.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - A - Specifications
185
Table A-1. Functional Specifications — Standard Product (Continued)
Item
No.
Dynamic
Compensation Adjustment Limits
Memory
Input Filter
Signal Distribution
Power Consumption
Specification
Dead Time: 0 and 200 minutes
Lead/lag Time: 0 and 200 minutes
All configuration and operating parameters (not status data) are stored in a nonvolatile RAM having a
ten year data retention capability. Should a power
failure occur, essential control settings and last operating conditions are saved indefinitely. No batteries
are used.
Second order Butterworth filters. Adjustable from
0 to 10 minutes in 0.01 minute intervals. May be
used with any input proportional signal.
Thirty-six signals are available for internal routing.
They are the conditioned and scaled inputs, unconditioned inputs, control inputs, control outputs, and
calculation results.
12 VA maximum with 4 to 20 mA outputs.
Physical Specifications
Table A-2. Physical Specifications – Standard Product
Item
Specification
Display
Vacuum fluorescent lamps in a glass enclosure having a
glass frit seal and tin plated copper pinouts. Horn symbol for alarms is red; bargraphs and alphanumeric characters are blue/green.
Signal Connections (on rear Two 16-position terminal blocks with compression termi2
panel)
nals for wire sizes up to 3.3 mm (12 AWG).
Power Connections (on rear 3-position terminal strip with 8-32 screw connections.
panel)
Mounting
Controller mounts through a panel. Refer to Appendix E
for cutout dimensions.
Approximate Mass
2.8 kg (6.2 lb)
186
762CNA Controller - A - Specifications
MI 018-885 February 1998
Operating and Storage Conditions
Table A-3. Operating and Storage Conditions
Normal
Operating
Condition
Limits
Reference
Operating
Conditions
Influence
Ambient
Temperature
Relative
Humidity
Supply
Voltage
23±2°C
(73±3°F)
50±10%
Supply
Frequency
Vibration
24,120,220 and
240 V ac, ±1%
24 V dc, ±1%
50/60 Hz, ±0.1
Hz
Negligible
-10 and
+60°C(15 and
140°F)
5 and 95%
noncondensing
V ac, +10, -15%
V dc, +10, -15%
Operative
Limits
Transportation
and Storage Limits
-10 and +60°C * -40 and +70°C
(15 and 140°F) (-40 and +160°F)
5 and 95%
0 and 100%
noncondensing noncondensing
V ac, +15, -20% NA
V dc, +10, -15%
50/60 Hz,
47 and 63 Hz
±3 Hz
5 and 200 Hz at -an acceleration
of 2.5 m/s/s
NA
10 m/s/s (1g) for
1 hour when in
shipping container
Mechanical Negligible
--A 42-inch drop
Shock
when in shipping
container
*Lower operative limit extends to -20°C (-5°F) with Enclosure Heater option.
Electrical Safety Specifications
Table A-4. Electrical Classification
Testing Laboratory,
Types of Protection, and
Area Classification
CSA for use in Ordinary
Locations.
CSA for Class I, Division 2,
Groups A, B, C, and D.
FM for Class I, Division 2,
Groups A, B, C, and D.
Application Conditions
Electrical Safety
Design Code
Controllers without a hous- CS-E/CG-A
ing are not approved.
Controllers without a hous- CS-E/CN-A
ing are not approved. Temperature Code T5.
CS-E/FN-A
Temperature Code T5.
Controllers without a housing are not approved.
NOTE These controllers have been designed to meet the electrical safety
descriptions listed in the table above. For detailed information or status of
testing laboratory approvals/certifications, contact Foxboro.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - A - Specifications
187
Performance Specifications
Accuracy at Numeric Display
Parameter
Accuracy
Set Point
Input
Analog
RTD (Direct Measurement)
Output
Linearization
RTD
Thermocouple
±0.1% of span
±0.1% of span
±0.5% °C
±0.5% of span
±0.5 °C, reading only
±0.5 °C, reading only
Resolution
Display:
±0.1% of span
Bargraph:
±2% of span
Frequency Response
Analog input to output conversion is flat to 3 Hz.
Supply Voltage Effect
±0.1% of span (maximum) for a +10% or –15% change in ac or dc voltage
within normal operating conditions.
Output Noise
0.25% maximum, peak-to-peak.
Ambient Temperature Effect
Maximum error in percent of span, except as noted, for a 30 °C (55 °F)
change in temperature within normal operating limits is:
Parameter
Set Point
Local
Remote
Input
Analog
Frequency
RTD
Output
Maximum Error
less than 0.1%
less than 0.5%
less than 0.5%
less than 0.25%
less than 0.5 °C
less than 0.5%
Humidity Effect
Maximum error in any conversion, calculation, or setting is ±0.1% of span
for a change from reference conditions to 95% R.H. at 30 °C (85 °F) wet
bulb.
188
762CNA Controller - A - Specifications
MI 018-885 February 1998
Optional Features and Accessories
Table A-5. Optional Features and Accessories
Feature
Specification
This option provides an isolated 4-20 mA nominal signal (500 Ω
load maximum) on Output No. 1. Specify by selecting Option suffix “-1”.
Platinum RTD
This option provides for accepting a platinum RTD on input numInput
ber 1. Calibrated per IEC 100 or SAMA 100 temperature curves.
Each curve is linearized for digital readout over the ranges and
spans listed below:
IEC 100 (Direct or ∆T Measurement)
Range: –200 to +805 °C (–330 to +1560 °F)
Span: 110 to 1000 °C (198 to 1800 °F)
SAMA 100 (Direct or ∆T Measurement)
Range: –200 to +600 °C (–330 to +1100 °F)
Span: 110 to 800 °C (198 to 1440 °F)
Specify by selecting Model Code Optional Suffix “-2”.
Configuration
All of the operating configuration data is stored in a NOVRAM.
Copy Accessory
The copy accessory permits the entire contents of the NOVRAM
module to be quickly copied to another NOVRAM, either a spare,
or one from another controller. Specify Part Number L0122TU for
the copy accessory, and Part Number K0141LN for a spare
NOVRAM.
Surge Suppressor A surge suppressor is available as an option for use with serial
communication input when external wiring is located near transient producing sources such as meters, solenoids, high voltages, etc. Specify Auxiliary Specification (AS) SURSUP.
Diagnostic Jumper A diagnostic jumper, part number B0138LY, is available for use in
controller troubleshooting. Installing the jumper on the main PWA
enables checking the two analog outputs, four analog inputs, 1
and 5 V voltage references, and the discrete inputs and outputs.
Factory
Unless otherwise specified, the unit is shipped with a Factory
Preconfiguration
Default configuration consisting of a single measurement input, a
local set point, PID control, and scale ranges of 0 to 100 percent.
Many optional factory preconfigurations are available. Select the
preconfiguration that most closely meets your needs and then
make changes in the field as needed to meet your specific needs.
It usually is necessary to change, at minimum, the loop tag, the
scale ranges, and the PID controller tuning parameters to suit
process requirements.
Optional factory preconfiguration is offered without additional
charge. To order, refer to the Model Code and specify the AS for
the configuration that most nearly meets your needs. The AS is
shown in the loop tag display to assist in initial field identification.
Output Isolation
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - A - Specifications
189
190
762CNA Controller - A - Specifications
MI 018-885 February 1998
762C SINGLE
STATION
MICRO
Controller
February 1998
Preface
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Ð
• xiii
Quick Check • 1
Product Overview • 11
Installation • 23
Configuration • 49
Operation • 109
EXACT Tuning • 135
Calibration, Troubleshooting,
Maintenance • 159
Appendix A Specifications • 183
Appendix B Configuration Worksheets • 193
Appendix C Structure Diagrams • 237
Appendix D Parts List • 247
Appendix E Dimensional Print • 255
Appendix F Functional Diagram • 261
Glossary
• 267
Index
• 287
The Intelligent Automation People
192
762CNA Controller
MI 018-885 February 1998
Configuration
Worksheets
B
This appendix contains information that will help you configure your controller.
Table B-5 contains the actual configuration worksheets. Figure B-1 defines
the content of the worksheets. Tables B-1, B-2, B-3, and B-4 contain reference data needed for making configuration entries.
This appendix also contains diagrams of optional factory preconfiguration
options that may have been specified. The Auxiliary Specification (AS) reference code used to specify a preconfiguration option is initially displayed in
the looptag position on the controller faceplate to assist you in initial field
identification.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
193
Figure B-1. Definition of Worksheet Contents
“Map-locator” that identifies the specific structure diagram sheet in
Appendix C that contains the parameter and also the XY coordinates of the
location of the parameter on that
sheet. The first digit is the sheet number; the second is the XY location.
Limits of each
parameter.
Prompts to parameters in the order in
which they are displayed when you
step through the
menu structure.
Structure
diagram
Location
Space for you to
record your specific
configuration.
Standard factory configuration as shipped
from Foxboro. Factory
Preconfiguration Options
will differ.
Parameter
Prompt/Parameter Limits
Standard
Factory
Configuration
Additional information and space for
your notations.
User
Configuration
Remarks
and Notes
CONFIG SETPT
5-G1
SETPT
----
TYPE
5-H1
LOCAL, R/L,
RATIO
(R/L)
----
RL LOGIC
----
LOCTRK
See Table B-2.
SWITCH
See Table B-2.
NONE
STARTUP
R, L
L
-99.9 and +102%
0.0
SOURCE
See Table B-1.
D
(RATIO)
----
5-H1
RL LOGIC
----
LOCTRK
See Table B-2.
SWITCH
See Table B-2.
NONE
STARTUP
R, L
L
OUTBIAS
-99.9 AND +102%
0.0
SIGNAL
----
INBIAS
-99.9 AND +102%
SOURCE
See Table B-1
194
NONE
0.0
RANGE
0-1.0 and 0-5.0
0-1.0
SOURCE
FCEPLATE,
ROUTED
FCEPLATE
(ROUTED)
If LOCAL, ACK key
takes you to MEAS
TRK.
NONE
INBIAS
5-G1
5-G1
LOCAL
See Table B-1.
IN2
MEAS TRK
See Table B-2.
NONE
FORMAT
LINEAR, SQ
ROOT,
SQUARED,
CHAR 1, CHAR 2
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
MI 018-885 February 1998
Table B-1. Signal Distribution List
Name
Signal
Name
A
Conditioned Analog Input IN1
C2 OUT
Signal
Controller 2 Output
B
Conditioned Analog Input IN2
ASELOUT
Selected Output of Auto Selector
C
Conditioned Analog Input IN3
AOUT 1
Analog Output 1
D
Conditioned Analog Input IN4
AOUT 2
Analog Output 2
E
Conditioned Input F1
CALC 1
Output of Calculation 1
F
Conditioned Input F2
CALC 2
Output of Calculation 2
G
Constant
CALC 3
Output of Calculation 3
H
Constant
IN1
Analog Input 1
I
Constant
IN2
Analog Input 2
J
Constant
IN3
Analog Input 3
C1 MEAS
Controller 1 Measurement
IN4
Analog Input 4
C1 LOCSP
Controller 1 Local Set Point
F1
Frequency Input 1
C1 REMSP
Controller 1 Remote Set Point
F2
Frequency Input 2
C1 SETP
Controller 1 Set Point
TOTAL 1
Totalizer 1 (Lower 2 bytes of 3-byte number)
C1 OUT
Controller 1 Output
TOTAL 2
Totalizer 2 (Lower 2 bytes of 3-byte number)
C2 MEAS
Controller 2 Measurement
100 PCT
Constant with value of 100%
C2 LOCSP
Controller 2 Local Set Point
0 PCT
Constant with value of 0 %
C2 REMSP
Controller 2 Remote Set Point
None
No Source
C2 SETP
Controller 2 Set Point
Table B-2. Gate Input List
Name
Source
True State
CI1
Contact Input 1
Closed
Name
Source
True State
CI2
Contact Input 2
Closed
AUTOSEL
Auto Select Output
State
False = C2 OUT
True = C1 OUT
ALARM 1
ALARM 2
State of Alarm 1
In Alarm
GATE 0
Output of Gate 0
True
State of Alarm 2
In Alarm
GATE 1
Output of Gate 1
True
ALARM 3
State of Alarm 3
In Alarm
GATE 2
Output of Gate 2
True
ALARM 4
State of Alarm 4
In Alarm
GATE 3
Output of Gate 3
True
C1 A/M
State of Controller 1 Automatic or
Manual
Automatic
GATE 4
Output of Gate 4
True
C1 R/L
State of Controller 1 Remote or
Local
Remote
GATE 5
Output of Gate 5
True
C2 A/M
State of Controller 2 Automatic or
Manual
Automatic
GATE 6
Output of Gate 6
True
C2 R/L
State of Controller 2 Remote or
Local
Remote
GATE 7
Output of Gate 7
True
W/P
State of Workstation or Panel
Workstation
GATE 8
Output of Gate 8
True
COMMFAIL
Communications Timeout
Timed Out
GATE 9
Output of Gate 9
True
C1 EXACT
State of EXACT, Controller 1
Enabled
ON
Fixed State Input
Always
C2 EXACT
State of EXACT, Controller 2
Enabled
OFF
Fixed State Input
Never
TOTAL 1
State of Totalizer 1
Totalizer reached
preset value
NONE
Function Switch not
used
N/A
TOTAL 2
State of Totalizer 2
Totalizer reached
preset value
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
195
Table B-3. List of Characters
Character
9 through 0
.(decimal)
-(minus)
blank
A through Z
_(underline)
\
@
?
>
=
<
/
,(comma)
+
*
)
(
’(apostrophe)
(test)*
√ (sq root)
°(degree)
*All character segments lighted
Table B-4. Characterization Curve Planning Table
CHAR 1
CHAR 2
X01 = _____
X02 = _____
X03 = _____
X04 = _____
X05 = _____
X06 = _____
X07 = _____
X08 = _____
X09 = _____
196
Y01 = _____
Y02 = _____
Y03 = _____
Y04 = _____
Y05 = _____
Y06 = _____
Y07 = _____
Y08 = _____
Y09 = _____
X01 = _____
X02 = _____
X03 = _____
X04 = _____
X05 = _____
X06 = _____
X07 = _____
X08 = _____
Y09 = _____
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
Y01 = _____
Y02 = _____
Y03 = _____
Y04 = _____
Y05 = _____
Y06 = _____
Y07 = _____
Y08 = _____
Y09 = _____
MI 018-885 February 1998
Table B-5. Configuration Worksheets
Location Prompt/Parameter
Parameter Limits
Standard
Factory
User
Configuration Configuration
Remarks/Notes
TUNE C1
4-A1
4-B1
4-C1
4-C2
4-B1
MI 018-885
SECURE ALLTUNE
----
ALLTUNE TUNE C1
----
PF
1 and 8000%
200
IF
0.01 and 200 min/repeat
2.0
DF
0 and 100 minutes
0.0
SPLAG
0.00 and 1.00
1.00
EXACT
----
STATE
ON, OFF
RD EXACT
----
If configured I ONLY at
Loc. 5-B1, ACK key
takes you to C1 LIMIT
OFF
ON/OFF choice is available only if EXACT
NONE is configured at
Location 5-G3
STATE
message (ON,OFF)
OFF
(no entry)
ENT
message
INIT
(no entry)
STUN
message
OFF
(no entry)
P
1 and 8000%
From TUNEC1
PF
I
0.01 and 200 repeats/min.
From TUNEC1
IF
D
0 and 100 min.
From TUNEC1
DF
PK 1
-102 and +102%
----
PK 2
-102 and +102%
----
PK 3
-102 and +102%
----
TPK 1
<WMAX
----
TPK 2
WMAX
----
TPK 3
>WMAX
----
ERR
-102 and +102%
----
USER SET
----
NB
0.1 and 30%
2.0
WMAX
0.1 and 200 minutes
5.00
DMP
0.1 and 1
0.2
OVR
0 and 1
0.50
READ only
CLM
1.25 and 100
10.00
DFCT
0 and 4
1.00
LIM
2 and 80%
80.0
BUMP
-50 and +50%
8.0
PTUNE
----
STATE
ON, OFF
OFF
RD PTUNE
message (ON, OFF)
OFF
BIAS
-99.9 and +102%
50.0
Only if configured P/PD
BALANCE
0.00 and 200 minutes
2.0
Only if configured P/PD
(1st order lag)
PRELOAD
-99.9 and 102%
0.0
Only if BATCH is configured ON
BYPASS
ON, OFF
OFF
February 1998
(no entry)
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
197
Table B-5. Configuration Worksheets (Continued)
Location Prompt/Parameter
Parameter Limits
Standard
Factory
User
Configuration Configuration
Remarks/Notes
TUNE C1 LIMIT
4-A1
C1 LIMIT
----
4-B1
SP HILIM
-2 and +102%
102.0
SP LOLIM
-2 and +102%
-2.0
OUT HLIM
-2 and +102%
102.0
OUT LLIM
-2 and +102%
-2.0
SECURE ALLTUNE
----
4-B1
Batch limits if BATCH is
configured ON at Location 5-G3
TUNE C2
4-A1
ALLTUNE TUNE C2
4-B1
4-C1
4-C2
198
PF
1 and 8000%
200
IF
0.01 and 200 min./repeat
2.0
DF
0 and 100 minutes
0.0
SPLAG
0.00 and 1.00
1.00
EXACT
----
STATE
ON, OFF
RD EXACT
----
If configured I ONLY at
Location 5-B1, ACK key
takes you to C1 LIMIT
OFF
ON/OFF choice is available only if EXACT
NONE is configured at
Location 5-G3
STATE
message (ON,OFF)
OFF
(no entry)
ENT
message
INIT
(no entry)
STUN
message
OFF
(no entry)
P
I and 8000%
From TUNEC2
PF
I
0.01 and 200 min/repeat
From TUNEC2
IF
D
0 and 100 minutes
From TUNEC2
DF
PK 1
-102 and +102%
----
PK 2
-102 and +102%
----
PK 3
-102 and +102%
----
TPK 1
<WMAX
----
TPK 2
WMAX
----
TPK 3
>WMAX
----
ERR
-102 and +102%
----
USER SET
----
NB
0.1 and 30%
2.0
WMAX
0.1 and 200 minutes
5.00
DMP
0.1 and 1
0.2
OVR
0 and 1
0.50
CLM
1.25 and 100
10.00
DFCT
0 and 4
1.00
LIM
2 and 80%
80.0
BUMP
-50 and +50%
8.0
PTUNE
---
STATE
ON, OFF
OFF
RD PTUNE
message (ON, OFF)
OFF
READ only
(no entry)
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
MI 018-885 February 1998
Table B-5. Configuration Worksheets (Continued)
Location Prompt/Parameter
Parameter Limits
Standard
Factory
User
Configuration Configuration
4-B1
BIAS
-99.9 and +102%
50.0
Only if configured P/PD
BALANCE
0.00 and 200 minutes
2.0
Only if configured P/PD
(1st order lag)
PRELOAD
-99.9 and 102
0.0
Only if BATCH is configured ON
BYPASS
ON, OFF
OFF
Remarks/Notes
TUNE C2 LIMIT
4-A1
C2 LIMIT
----
4-B1
SP HILIM
-2 and +102%
SP LOLIM
-2 and +102%
-2.0
OUT HLIM
-2 and +102%
102.0
OUT LLIM
-2 and +102%
-2.0
102.0
Batch limits if BATCH is
configured ON at
Loc. 5-G3
TUNE CONSTS
4-A2
ALLTUNE CONSTS
----
G
-99.9 and +102%
50.0
H
-99.9 and +102%
50.0
I
-99.9 and +102%
50.0
J
-99.9 and +102%
50.0
TUNE ALARMS
4-A2
ALLTUNE ALARMS
4-B2
ALARM 1
----
LEVEL 1 =
-99.9 and +102%
102.0
LEVEL 2 =
-99.9 and +102%
-2.0
DB =
0 and 100
2.0
ALARM 2
LEVEL 1 =
-99.9 and +102%
102.0
LEVEL 2 =
-99.9 and +102%
-2.0
DB =
0 and 100
2.0
ALARM 3
LEVEL 1 =
-99.9 and +102%
102.0
LEVEL 2 =
-99.9 and +102%
-2.0
DB =
0 and 100
2.0
ALARM 4
LEVEL 1 =
-99.9 and +102%
102.0
LEVEL 1 =
-99.9 and +102%
-2.0
DB =
0 and 100
2.0
TUNE TOTALS
4-A3
ALLTUNE TOTALS
----
4-B3
TOTAL 1 =
0 and 9999999
PRESET 1 =
0 and 9999999
0
T1 STATE
RESET, HOLD, COUNT
COUNT
TOTAL 2 =
0 and 9999999
0
PRESET 2 =
0 and 9999999
0
T2 STATE
RESET, HOLD, COUNT
COUNT
0
SHOWOP
2
MI 018-885
SHOWOP
----
TUNE C1
YES, NO
C1 LIMITS
YES, NO
YES
TUNE C2
YES, NO
YES
C2 LIMITS
YES, NO
YES
February 1998
YES
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
199
Table B-5. Configuration Worksheets (Continued)
Parameter Limits
Standard
Factory
User
Configuration Configuration
ALARMS
YES, NO
YES
CONSTS
YES, NO
YES
TOTALS
YES, NO
YES
RD CFG
YES, NO
YES
ONE FUNC
Location Prompt/Parameter
Remarks/Notes
CONFIG STRATEGY
5-A1
CONFIG STRATEGY
----
5-B1
ONE FUNC
----
CASCADE
----
AUTO SEL
----
TYPE
LO SELECT, HI SELECT,
GATE 4
LO SELECT
TRK MAN
YES, NO
NO
TWO FUNC
----
For LO SELECT or HI
SELECT only
CONFIG FUNC1
5-A1
CONFIG FUNC1
5-B1
PI, PID
----
PI, PID
See CONFIG DISPLAY
EXACT
See CONFIG DISPLAY
A/M STN
See CONFIG A/M STN
DISPLAY
3 BAR IND
See CONFIG 3 BAR IND
I ONLY
See CONFIG DISPLAY
P, PD
See CONFIG DISPLAY
CONFIG FUNC2
5-A1
CONFIG FUNC2
5-B1
PI, PID
----
PI, PID
See CONFIG DISPLAY
EXACT
See CONFIG DISPLAY
A/M STN
See CONFIG A/M STN
DISPLAY
3 BAR IND
See CONFIG 3 BAR IND
I ONLY
See CONFIG DISPLAY
P, PD
See CONFIG DISPLAY
CONFIG TOTAL 1
5-A1
5-B1
CONFIG TOTAL 1
YES, NO
(YES)
----
NO
If EXACT is configured,
jumps to TOTAL 2
Enter up to 9 characters
TAG
See Table B-3
TOTAL
SOURCE
See Table B-1
A
CNT/SEC
0.1 and 2000
1.0
DEC PT
0 and 7
0
HOLD
See Table B-2
NONE
RESET
See Table B-2
NONE
TYPE
COUNT UP, COUNT DN
COUNT UP
CONFIG TOTAL 2
YES, NO
NO
If EXACT is configured,
jumps to CONFIG
INPUTS
(YES)
---Enter up to 9 characters
CONFIG TOTAL 2
5-A1
5-B1
200
TAG
See Table B-3
TOTAL
SOURCE
See Table B-1
A
CNT/SEC
0.1 and 2000
1.0
DEC PT
0 and 7
0
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
MI 018-885 February 1998
Table B-5. Configuration Worksheets (Continued)
Parameter Limits
Standard
Factory
User
Configuration Configuration
HOLD
See Table B-2
NONE
RESET
See Table B-2
NONE
TYPE
COUNT UP, COUNT DN
COUNT UP
Location Prompt/Parameter
Remarks/Notes
CONFIG INPUTS
5-A2
CONFIG INPUTS
5-B2
A
----
OUTBIAS =
-99.9 and +102%
0.0
GAIN =
-9.999 and +9.999
1.000
INBIAS =
-99.9 and +102%
0.0
FORMAT =
LINEAR, SQ ROOT,
LINEAR
SQUARED, CHAR 1, CHAR 2
FILTER =
0 and 10 minutes
B
----
MI 018-885
----
0.00
OUTBIAS =
-99.9 and +102%
0.0
GAIN =
-9.999 and +9.999
1.000
INBIAS =
-99.9 and +102%
0.0
FORMAT =
LINEAR, SQ ROOT,
LINEAR
SQUARED, CHAR 1, CHAR 2
FILTER =
0 and 10 minutes
C
----
0.00
OUTBIAS =
-99.9 and +102%
0.0
GAIN =
-9.999 and +9.999
1.000
INBIAS =
-99.9 and +102%
0.0
FORMAT =
LINEAR, SQ ROOT,
LINEAR
SQUARED, CHAR 1, CHAR 2
FILTER =
0 and 10 minutes
D
----
0.00
OUTBIAS =
-99.9 and +102%
0.0
GAIN =
-9.999 and +9.999
1.000
INBIAS =
-99.9 and +102%
0.0
FORMAT =
LINEAR, SQ ROOT,
LINEAR
SQUARED, CHAR 1, CHAR 2
FILTER =
0 and 10 minutes
0.00
FREQ I/P
FREQ, PULSED
FREQ
E
----
OUTBIAS =
-99.9 and +102%
0.0
GAIN =
-9.999 and +9.999
1.000
INBIAS =
-99.9 and +102%
0.0
FORMAT =
LINEAR, SQ ROOT,
LINEAR
SQUARED, CHAR 1, CHAR 2
FILTER =
0 and 10 minutes
F
----
0.00
OUTBIAS =
-99.9 and +102%
0.0
GAIN =
-9.999 and +9.999
1.000
INBIAS =
-99.9 and +102%
0.0
FORMAT =
LINEAR, SQ ROOT,
LINEAR
SQUARED, CHAR 1, CHAR 2
FILTER =
0 and 10 minutes
February 1998
0.00
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
0.00 minute is no filter
0.00 minute is no filter
0.00 minute is no filter
0.00 minute is no filter
0.00 minute is no filter
0.00 minute is no filter
201
Table B-5. Configuration Worksheets (Continued)
Location Prompt/Parameter
Parameter Limits
Standard
Factory
User
Configuration Configuration
Remarks/Notes
CONFIG ALARMS
5-A2
5-B2
202
CONFIG ALARMS
----
Configure TYPE,
ACTION, FORM and
then ATTACH input
ALARM 1
----
TYPE
HI/HI, HI/LO, LO/LO, OFF
OFF
ACTION
LATCHING, NON LAT, PERMISVE
NON LAT
FORM
ABS, DEV, ROC
ABS
(DEV REF)
See Table B-1
NONE
ATTACH
See Table B-1
NONE
ALARM 2
----
TYPE
HI/HI, HI/LO, LO/LO, OFF
OFF
ACTION
LATCHING, NON LAT, PERMISVE
NON LAT
FORM
ABS, DEV, ROC
ABS
(DEV REF)
See Table B-1
NONE
ATTACH
See Table B-1
NONE
ALARM 3
----
TYPE
HI/HI, HI/LO, LO/LO, OFF
OFF
ACTION
LATCHING, NON LAT, PERMISVE
NON LAT
FORM
ABS, DEV, ROC
ABS
(DEV REF)
See Table B-1
NONE
ATTACH
See Table B-1
NONE
ALARM 4
----
TYPE
HI/HI, HI/LO, LO/LO, OFF
OFF
ACTION
LATCHING, NON LAT, PERMISVE
NON LAT
FORM
ABS, DEV, ROC
ABS
(DEV REF)
See Table B-1
NONE
ATTACH
See Table B-1
NONE
EXT ACK
See Table B-2
NONE
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
MI 018-885 February 1998
Table B-5. Configuration Worksheets (Continued)
Location Prompt/Parameter
Parameter Limits
Standard
Factory
User
Configuration Configuration
Remarks/Notes
CONFIG GATES
5-A3
CONFIG GATES
5-B3
GATE 0
----
LOGIC
DIRECT, NOT
DIRECT
INPUT 1
See Table B-2
NONE
GATE 1
----
MI 018-885
----
LOGIC
DIRECT, NOT
DIRECT
INPUT 1
SeeTable B-2
NONE
GATE 2
----
LOGIC
DIRECT, NOT
DIRECT
INPUT 1
See Table B-2
NONE
GATE 3
----
LOGIC
DIRECT, NOT
DIRECT
INPUT 1
See Table B-2
NONE
GATE 4
----
LOGIC
DIRECT, NOT
DIRECT
INPUT 1
See Table B-2
NONE
GATE 5
----
LOGIC
OR, NOR, AND, NAND, XOR,
XNOR
AND
INPUT 1
See Table B-2
NONE
INPUT 2
See Table B-2
NONE
GATE 6
----
LOGIC
OR, NOR, AND, NAND, XOR,
XNOR
AND
INPUT 1
See Table B-2
NONE
INPUT 2
See Table B-2
NONE
GATE 7
----
LOGIC
OR, NOR, AND, NAND, XOR,
XNOR
AND
INPUT 1
See Table B-2
NONE
INPUT 2
See Table B-2
NONE
GATE 8
----
LOGIC
OR, NOR, AND, NAND, XOR,
XNOR
AND
INPUT 1
See Table B-2
NONE
INPUT 2
See Table B-2
NONE
GATE 9
----
LOGIC
OR, NOR, AND, NAND, XOR,
XNOR
AND
INPUT 1
See Table B-2
NONE
INPUT 2
See Table B-2
NONE
February 1998
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
203
Table B-5. Configuration Worksheets (Continued)
Location Prompt/Parameter
Parameter Limits
Standard
Factory
User
Configuration Configuration
Remarks/Notes
CONFIG CALC
5-C1
5-D1
CONFIG CALC
----
CALC 1 =
----
A
CALC 2 =
----
A
CALC 3 =
----
A
DYNC
0N, 0FF
0FF
If OFF, ACK key takes
you to CHAR 1
(0N)
If ON, CALC 3 is dynamically compensated
DEADTIME
----
TIME
0 and 200 minutes
0.00
FOLLOW
See Table B-2.
OFF
LEADLAG
----
GAIN =
0 and 9.999 minutes
1.000
BIAS =
-99.9 and +102%
0.0
TIME =
0 and 200 minutes
0.00
IMPULSE
NONE, BIPOLAR,
POSITIVE, NEGATIVE
NONE
OFF
5-D2
FOLLOW
See Table B-2
5-C1
CHAR 1
----
5-D1
Select up to 9 characters
from Table 4-13
POINTS
1 and 9
2
X1, X2, etc.
-99.9 and +102%
0.0, 100.0
See
Table B-4
Display will alternate
between CHAR 1 Xn
and CHAR 1 Yn
Y1, Y2, etc.
-99.9 and +102%
0.0, 100.0
See
Table B-4
Display will alternate
between CHAR 1 Xn
and CHAR 1 Yn
5-C1
CHAR 2
----
5-D1
POINTS
1 and 9
2
X1, X2, etc.
-99.9 and +102%
0.0, 100.0
See
Table B-4
Display will alternate
between CHAR 2 Xn
and CHAR 2 Yn
Y1, Y2, etc.
-99.9 and +102%
0.0, 100.0
See
Table B-4
Display will alternate
between CHAR 2 Xn
and CHAR 2 Yn
CONFIG OUTPUTS
5-C2
5-D2
CONFIG OUTPUTS
----
CO 1
See Table B-2
NONE
CO 2
See Table B-2
NONE
SPLT RNG
YES, NO
NO
SPLIT PT
0 and 100%
50
DEADBAND
0 AND 10
5
LOW ACT
INC/INC, INC/DEC
INC/DEC
INC/INC
(YES)
HI ACT
INC/INC, INC/DEC
5-C2
AOUT 1
----
5-D2
REVERSE
YES, NO
NO
SOURCE
See Table B-1
NONE
5-C2
AOUT 2
----
5-D2
REVERSE
YES, NO
NO
SOURCE
See Table B-1
NONE
204
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
Only if output is assignable
Only if output is assignable
MI 018-885 February 1998
Table B-5. Configuration Worksheets (Continued)
Location Prompt/Parameter
Parameter Limits
Standard
Factory
User
Configuration Configuration
---
OFF
0
Remarks/Notes
CONFIG W/P
5-C2
CONFIG W/P
(ON)
5-D2
5-D3
ADDRESS
0 and 99
BAUD
2400, 4800, 9600,19200
4800
PARITY
ODD, EVEN. NONE
NONE
TIMEOUT
0 and 200 minutes
10.0
FLUNK
W, P, LAST W/P
P
PRIORITY
W, P, BOTH
P
STARTUP
W, P
P
SWITCH
See Table B-2
NONE
3 characters
Three blanks
ON, OFF
OFF
If 0.00, function never
times out
Never set to W when
PRIORITY is set to W
CONFIG PASSCODE, TOGGLE
5-C2
CONFIG NEW PASS
=
Select characters from
Table B-3
VERIFY =
CONFIG TOGGLE
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
205
Table B-5. Configuration Worksheets (Continued)
Location Prompt/Parameter
Parameter Limits
Standard
Factory
User
Configuration Configuration
Remarks/Notes
CONFIG DISPLAY
CNTL 1
5-E1
CONFIG DISPLAY
CNTL 2
----
TOP LINE
TAG, VARIABLE
TAG
(TAG)
See Table B-3
762 MICRO
TYPE
LINEAR, TEMP
LINEAR
LINEAR
----
ENG UNTS
See Table B-3
URV
-999 and +9999
Enter up to 9 characters
(VARIABLE)
5-F1
Enter up to 4 characters
LRV
-999 and +9999
TEMP
----
SCALE
IEC 100, SAMA 100,
T/C J, T/C K, T/C E
IEC 100
ENG UNTS
DEG F, DEG C
DEG C
URV
Depends on SCALE
LRV
Depends on SCALE
5-E1
SOURCE
See Table B-1
NONE
5-E2
MEAS, SP
TYPE
LINEAR, TEMP
LINEAR
LINEAR
----
ENG UNTS
See Table B-3
PCT
URV
-999 and +9999
100.0
0.0
5-F2
LRV
-999 and +9999
5-E2
TEMP
----
5-F2
SCALE
IEC 100, SAMA 100,
T/C J, T/C K, T/C E
5-E2
5-E2
Enter up to 4 characters
IEC 100
ENG UNTS
DEG F, DEG C
DEG C
URV
Depends on SCALE
100.0
LRV
Depends on SCALE
0.0
OUTBAR
----
SOURCE
See Table B-1
RATIO
----
ENG UNTS
See Table B-3
URV
-999 and +9999
100.0
LRV
-999 and +9999
0.0
----
See Remarks
C1 OUT for Controller 1
C2 OUT for Controller 2
PCT
ALARMS
----
MEAS ALM
YES, NO
NO
OUT ALM
YES, NO
NO
PH DISP
ON, OFF
OFF
CONFIG SETPT
5-G1
5-H1
206
SETPT
----
TYPE
LOCAL, R/L, RATIO
LOCAL
(R/L)
----
RL LOGIC
----
LOCTRK
See Table B-2
SWITCH
See Table B-2
NONE
STARTUP
R, L
L
If LOCAL, ACK key
takes you to MEAS TRK
OFF
INBIAS
-99.9 and +102%
0.0
SOURCE
See Table B-1
B
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
MI 018-885 February 1998
Table B-5. Configuration Worksheets (Continued)
Standard
Factory
User
Configuration Configuration
Location Prompt/Parameter
Parameter Limits
5-G1
(RATIO)
----
5-H1
RL LOGIC
----
LOCTRK
See Table B-2
OFF
SWITCH
See Table B-2
NONE
STARTUP
R, L
L
OUTBIAS
-99.9 AND +102%
0.0
SIGNAL
----
CNTL 1
5-G1
INBIAS
-99.9 AND +102%
SOURCE
See Table B-1
Remarks/Notes
CNTL 2
0.0
RANGE
0-1.0 and 0-5.0
0-1.0
SOURCE
FCEPLATE, ROUTED
FCEPLATE
(ROUTED)
See Table B-1
IN2
MEAS TRK
See Table B-2
OFF
FORMAT
LINEAR, SQ ROOT,
LINEAR
SQUARED, CHAR 1, CHAR 2
CONFIG MEAS
5-G2
MEAS
----
FORMAT
LINEAR, SQ ROOT,
LINEAR
SQUARED, CHAR 1, CHAR 2
SOURCE
See Table B-1
A
CONFIG A/M
5-G2
A/M
STARTUP
A, M
M
FLUNK
A, M, LAST A/M
M
SWITCH
See Table B-1
NONE
CONFIG NONLIN, ACTION
5-G2
NONLIN
CHAR 1, CHAR 2, NO
NO
ACTION
INC/DEC, INC/INC
INC/DEC
CONFIG OUTPUT
5-G3
5-G3
MI 018-885
OUTPUT
----
FORMAT
LINEAR, SQ ROOT,
LINEAR
SQUARED, CHAR 1, CHAR 2
MODIFIER
OUTMUL, OUTSUM, NO
NO
OUTMUL
See Table B-1
B
OUTSUM
See Table B-1
B
OUTTRK
----
SWITCH
See Table B-2
OFF
SOURCE
See Table B-1
IN 2
EXTLIM
----
HIGH
----
SWITCH
See Table B-2
OFF
SOURCE
See Table B-1
IN 2
LOW
----
SWITCH
See Table B-2
OFF
SOURCE
See Table B-1
IN 2
STARTUP
VALUE, LAST VAL
LAST VAL
(VALUE)
-2 and +102%
0.0
February 1998
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
Do not use OUTMUL if
BATCH is ON
207
Table B-5. Configuration Worksheets (Continued)
Location Prompt/Parameter
Parameter Limits
Standard
Factory
User
Configuration Configuration
Remarks/Notes
CONFIG EXACT, BATCH, INT FBK
5-G3
EXACT SW
SeeTable B-2
NONE
BATCH
ON, OFF
OFF
INT FBK
See Table B-1
C1 OUT
CONFIG 3BARIND
Ind. 1
8-A1
8-B1
8-C1
LFT BAR
TAG
SeeTable B-3
BAR 1
TYPE
LINEAR, TEMP
LINEAR
LINEAR
----
ENG UNTS
See Table B-3
URV
-999 and +9999
LRV
-999 and +9999
TEMP
----
8-C1
SCALE
IEC 100, SAMA 100,
T/C J, T/C K, T/C E
IEC 100
ENG UNTS
DEG F, DEG C
DEG C
URV
Depends on SCALE
LRV
Depends on SCALE
SOURCE
See Table B-1
8-A1
MID BAR
----
8-B1
TAG
See Table B-3
BAR 2
TYPE
LINEAR, TEMP
LINEAR
LINEAR
----
8-C1
ENG UNTS
See Table B-3
PCT
URV
-999 and +9999
100.0
0.0
LRV
-999 and +9999
8-B1
TEMP
----
8-C1
SCALE
IEC 100, SAMA 100,
T/C J, T/C K, T/C E
ENG UNTS
DEG F, DEG C
DEG C
URV
Depends on SCALE
100.0
0.0
LRV
Depends on SCALE
SOURCE
See Table B-1
8-A1
RT BAR
----
8-B1
TAG
See Table B-3
BAR 3
TYPE
LINEAR, TEMP
LINEAR
LINEAR
----
ENG UNTS
See Table B-3
PCT
URV
-999 and +9999
100.0
0.0
LRV
-999 and +9999
8-B1
TEMP
----
8-C1
SCALE
IEC 100, SAMA 100,
T/C J, T/C K, T/C E
Enter up to 4 characters
Enter up to 9 characters
Enter up to 4 characters
IEC 100
ENG UNTS
DEG F, DEG C
DEG C
URV
Depends on SCALE
100.0
0.0
LRV
Depends on SCALE
8-B1
SOURCE
See Table B-1
8-A2
ALARMS
----
8-B2
LBAR ALM
YES, NO
NO
MBAR ALM
YES, NO
NO
RBAR ALM
YES, NO
NO
208
Enter up to 9 characters
IEC 100
8-B1
8-C1
Enter up to 9 characters
Enter up to 4 characters
8-B1
8-B1
Ind. 2
----
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
MI 018-885 February 1998
Table B-5. Configuration Worksheets (Continued)
Location Prompt/Parameter
Parameter Limits
Standard
Factory
User
Configuration Configuration
Remarks/Notes
CONFIG A/M STN DISPLAY
Station 1
9-A1
9-B1
9-C1
DISPLAY
----
TOP LINE
TAG, VARIABLE
TAG
(TAG)
See Table B-3
762 MICRO
(VARIABLE)
----
TYPE
LINEAR, TEMP
LINEAR
----
ENG UNTS
See Table B-3
URV
-999 and +9999
LRV
-999 and +9999
Enter up to 9 characters
LINEAR
Enter up to 4 characters
9-B1
TEMP
----
9-C1
SCALE
IEC 100, SAMA 100,
T/C J, T/C K, T/C E
IEC 100
ENG UNTS
DEG F, DEG C
DEG C
URV
Depends on SCALE
LRV
Depends on SCALE
9-B1
SOURCE
See Table B-1
9-A1
SETP
----
9-B1
9-C1
TYPE
LINEAR, TEMP, NONE
(LINEAR)
----
NONE
LINEAR
ENG UNTS
See Table B-3
PCT
URV
-999 and +9999
100.0
0.0
LRV
-999 and +9999
9-B1
(TEMP)
---
9-C1
SCALE
IEC 100, SAMA 100,
T/C J, T/C K, T/C E
IEC 100
ENG UNTS
DEG F, DEG C
DEG C
URV
Depends on SCALE
100.0
LRV
Depends on SCALE
0.0
MEAS
----
9-A1
9-B1
9-C1
TYPE
LINEAR, TEMP
LINEAR
----
ENG UNTS
See Table B-3
PCT
URV
-999 and +9999
100.0
0.0
LRV
-999 and +9999
TEMP
----
9-C1
SCALE
IEC 100, SAMA 100,
T/C J, T/C K, T/C E
IEC 100
ENG UNTS
DEG F, DEG C
DEG C
URV
Depends on SCALE
100.0
LRV
Depends on SCALE
0.0
9-A2
OUTBAR
----
SOURCE
See Table B-1
ALARMS
----
Enter up to 4 characters
LINEAR
9-B1
9-A2
Station 2
Enter up to 4 characters
C1 OUT
MEAS
YES, NO
NO
OUT
YES, NO
NO
CONFIG A/M STN SETPT
9-A3
9-B3
MI 018-885
SET PT
----
TYPE
LOCAL, R/L
(R/L)
----
RL LOGIC
----
February 1998
LOCAL
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
209
Table B-5. Configuration Worksheets (Continued)
Location Prompt/Parameter
LOCTRK
9-A3
Parameter Limits
Standard
Factory
User
Configuration Configuration
See Table B-2
OFF
SWITCH
See Table B-2
NONE
STARTUP
R, L
L
INBIAS
-99.9 and +102%
0.0
SOURCE
See Table B-1
B
MEAS TRK
See Table B-2
NONE
FORMAT
LINEAR, SQ ROOT,
SQUARED CHAR 1, CHAR 2
LINEAR
Remarks/Notes
CONFIG A/M STN MEAS, A/M
9-D1
MEAS
----
FORMAT
LINEAR, SQ ROOT,
SQUARED CHAR 1, CHAR 2
LINEAR
SOURCE
See Table B-1
A
A/M
---
STARTUP
A, M
M
FLUNK
A, M, LAST A/M
M
SWITCH
See Table B-2
NONE
CONFIG A/M STN OUTPUT
9-D2
OUTPUT
---
SOURCE
See Table B-1
FORMAT
LINEAR, SQ ROOT,
LINEAR
SQUARED, CHAR 1, CHAR 2
MODIFIER
OUTMUL, OUTSUM, NO
NO
OUTMUL
See Table B-1
B
OUTSUM
See Table B-1
B
9-D3
OUTTRK
---
9-E3
SWITCH
See Table B-2
OFF
SOURCE
See Table B-1
IN 2
9-E2
9-D3
EXTLIM
---
9-E3
HIGH
---
SWITCH
See Table B-2
OFF
SOURCE
See Table B-1
IN 2
LOW
---
SWITCH
See Table B-2
OFF
SOURCE
See Table B-1
IN 3
9-D3
STARTUP
VALUE, LAST VAL
LAST VAL
9-E3
(VALUE)
-2 and +102%
0.0
210
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
MI 018-885 February 1998
Factory Preconfiguration Diagrams
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
211
212
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
MI 018-885 February 1998
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
213
214
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
MI 018-885 February 1998
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
215
216
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
MI 018-885 February 1998
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
217
218
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
MI 018-885 February 1998
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
219
220
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
MI 018-885 February 1998
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
221
222
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
MI 018-885 February 1998
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
223
224
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
MI 018-885 February 1998
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
225
226
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
MI 018-885 February 1998
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
227
228
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
MI 018-885 February 1998
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
229
230
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
MI 018-885 February 1998
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
231
232
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
MI 018-885 February 1998
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
233
234
762CNA Controller - B - Configuration Worksheets
MI 018-885 February 1998
762C SINGLE
STATION
MICRO
Controller
February 1998
Preface
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Ð
• xiii
Quick Check • 1
Product Overview • 11
Installation • 23
Configuration • 49
Operation • 109
EXACT Tuning • 135
Calibration, Troubleshooting,
Maintenance • 159
Appendix A Specifications • 183
Appendix B Configuration Worksheets • 193
Appendix C Structure Diagrams • 237
Appendix D Parts List • 247
Appendix E Dimensional Print • 255
Appendix F Functional Diagram • 261
Glossary
• 267
Index
• 287
The Intelligent Automation People
236
762CNA Controller
MI 018-885 February 1998
Structure
Diagrams
C
This appendix contains the structure diagrams for the 762C Controller. By
following this appendix, you can locate the parameter you wish to read or
change.
• Access to the structure from Normal Operation is achieved by pressing
the TAG key. This brings you to the first item in the structure, READ.
• The ∆ and ∇ keys move you vertically within a connected group of param-
eters in the diagram.
• The ACK key moves you horizontally through a group of parameters and
then on to the next group.
• The SEL key moves you back through the diagram in minor increments.
At various points in the diagrams you will find arrows and numbered balloons. These direct you to subsequent pages in the diagram. Also, some sections are marked with an asterisk (*) with a note to repeat for a similar
entry. This is done to keep the diagrams as brief as possible.
Throughout the text of Chapter 4, Configuration and in Appendix B, Configuration Worksheets, you will find location designators (e.g., 5-B2). These
direct you to the parameter you are looking for in the diagram. In the example given, the 5 refers to the diagram beginning with Balloon number 5 in
the upper left hand corner (Structure Diagram 5). The designation B2 refers
to map coordinates on that page. Therefore, a reference to configure
ALARM 1 is 5-B2.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - C - Structure Diagrams
237
A
1
B
C
1
5
Location 5 - B2
2
2
3
3
4
4
A
B
C
= Diagram number
= Category or subdivision which appears
in the upper or lower digital (alphanumeric) display
A - C =Horizontal axis diagram coordinate
1 - 4 =Vertical axis diagram coordinate
Example: Location 5-B2 refers to diagram with balloon 5
in the upper left corner of the diagram and coordinates B
(horizontal) and 2 (vertical) within that diagram.
238
762CNA Controller - C - Structure Diagrams
MI 018-885 February 1998
Structure Diagram 1 – READ
A
B
READ
VALUES
C
D
E
IN 1
INPUTS
IN 2
IN 3
IN 4
F1
1
1
F2
A
SIGNALS
REP B-F
*
AOUT 1
AOUT 2
C1 OUT
C2 OUT
ASEL OUT
CALC 1
CALC 2
CALC 3
TOTALS
2
2
TOTAL 1 =
PRESET 1
TOTAL 2 =
PRESET 2
CONSTS
G
REP H-J
CONTACTS
*
CI 1
CI 2
CO 1
CO 2
GATES
GATE 0
REP 1-9
ALARMS
LIMITS
CONFIG
VERSION
LEVEL1
ALARM 1
REP 2-4
3
*
C1 SPHL
*
LEVEL2
3
DB
C1 SPLL
5
NUM PROC
DIS PROC
NOVRAM
C1 OUTHL
C1 OUTLL
C2 SPHL
C2 SPLL
C2 OUTHL
C2 OUTLL
SET
OPTUNE
SECURE
4
PASSCODE
4
ALLTUNE
SHOWOP
CONFIG
CALIB
TEST
* REP = Repeat for similar entry
A
MI 018-885
February 1998
B
C
762CNA Controller - C - Structure Diagrams
D
4
2
5
3
4
DISPLAY
E
239
Structure Diagrams 2 and 3
2
3
CALIB
SHOWOP
INPUTS
TUNE C1
YES
NO
C1 LIMITS
YES
NO
TUNE C2
YES
NO
C2 LIMITS
YES
NO
ALARMS
YES
NO
CONSTS
YES
NO
TOTALS
YES
NO
RD CFG
YES
NO
ANALOG
INTERNAL
EXTERNAL
IN1 ZR
IN1 FS
REP 2-4
ZERO
F1
FREQ
FS
REP 2
OUTPUTS
OUT 1
*
ZERO
FS
REP 2
*
* REP = Repeat for similar entry
240
762CNA Controller - C - Structure Diagrams
MI 018-885 February 1998
Structure Diagram 4 – ALLTUNE (OPTUNE), 5 – Configuration, 6 – Signal Distribution List, and 7 – Gate Input List
A
B
5
4
ALLTUNE
(OPTUNE)
TUNE C1
B
A
C
CONFIG
STRATE GY
ONE FUNC
CASCA DE
A UTO SEL
TWO FUNC
PF
TY PE
IF
DF
FUNC 1
PI,PID
EXA CT
A /M S TN
3BA R IND
I ONLY
P,PD
SPLAG
EXACT
STATE
ON
OFF
RD EXACT
STATE
ENT
STUN
BIAS
PRELOAD
BYPASS
C1 LIMIT
ON
OFF
*
C2 LIMIT
*
FUNC 2
1
TOTAL 1
S OURCE
*
HOL D
RES ET
TYP E
PK 3
TPK 1
TPK 2
TPK 3
ERR
INPUTS
*
FILTER
REP E- F
2
ALA RMS
REP 2-4
TY PE
*
A CTIO N
ON
OFF
FO RM
RD PTUNE
ATTA CH
J
ALARMS
ALARM 1
EX T A CK
LEVEL1
LEVEL2
G ATE S
LO GIC
GATE 0
INPUT 1
TOTALS
*
REP 1-4
GATE 5
TOTAL 1
REP 6-9
3
PRESET 1
3
T1 STATE
HOLD
COUNT
REP 2
A
*
B
*
L OG IC
*
3
RESET
INP UT 1
INPUT 2
* REP = Repeat for similar entry
C
CHAR 2
DE ADTIM E
TIME
FOL LOW
LEA DLA G
G AIN
PO INTS
X1
Y1
RE P 2-9
A
TY PE
OUTPUTS
S PLT RNG
L INE AR
S Q ROO T
S QUARE D
CHAR 1
CHAR 2
HI/HI
HI/LO
L O/LO
O FF
*
Y ES
SP LIT P T
NO
DE ADB AND
AO UT 2
RE VERS E
Y ES
NO
6
ON
OFF
DIRECT
NO T
SCAL E
NEW PAS S
V ERIFY
TO GG LE
ON
O FF
6
7
ENG UNTS
RATIO
ME ASTRK
FO RMAT
DE G F
URV
LRV
ME AS , SP
TYP E
LINEA R
MEA S
BA UD
SCAL E
IEC 100
S AMA 1 00
T/C J
T/C K
T/C E
OUTBA R
S OURCE
6
A /M
DE G F
DE G C
RATIO
ENG UNTS
URV
LRV
AL ARMS
240 0
4 800
96 00
19 .2 K
ME AS A LM
YE S
NO
O UT AL M
YE S
O DD
E VEN
NONE
P H DISP
PRIORITY
W
P
BOTH
W
P
7
7
SWITCH
C
7 62 CN A/76 2C SA /7 43 CB C on tro ll er
A pp en di x C - Str uc tu re Dia gr am s
SIGNA L
INB IA S
SOURCE
6
A
L
R
B
6
D
E
C
RA NGE
LINEAR
SQ RO OT
SQ UARED
CHAR 1
CHAR 2
F
S OURCE
FCEPL ATE
ROUTED
G
6
H
I
J
C1 RE MSP
C1 SETP
INC/INC
INC/DEC
FO RMAT
MO DIFIER
O UTTRK
STARTUP
EX ACT S W
S TARTUP
C1 LOCS P
EX TLIM
S TARTUP
= Repeat for similar entry
SW ITCH
O UTB IA S
7
7
C1 MEA S
ACTION
W
P
LAS T W/P
7
LINEAR
SQ RO OT
S QUA RED
CHAR 1
CHAR 2
1
L
R
6
CHAR 1
CHAR 2
NO
ON
O FF
LO C TRK
M
NONL IN
O UTP UT
RL L OGIC
7
7
A
SW ITCH
URV
6
S TARTUP
FLUNK
LRV
6
LO C TRK
STARTUP
SO URCE
SOURCE
NO
FLUNK
*
FO RMAT
ENG UNTS
URV
LRV
7
RL L OGIC
SWITCH
TIMEO UT
7
LO CAL
R/L
DEG C
NO NE
B IP OLA R
PO SITIV E
NE GATIV E
E NG UNTS
7
7
TY PE
INBIAS
IEC 10 0
S AMA 10 0
T/C J
T/C K
T/C E
7
BATCH
ON
O FF
INT FB K
6
A
M
LA ST A/M
C1 O UT
C2 ME AS
C2 LOCS P
7
C2 RE MSP
2
C2 S ETP
C2 OUT
A SEL OUT
A OUT 1
A OUT 2
CA LC 1
L INE AR
S Q ROO T
S QUARE D
CHA R 1
CHA R 2
CA LC 2
CA LC 3
6
SWITCH
SO URCE
7
IN 2
6
IN 3
IN 4
F1
6
HIGH
SWITCH
SO URCE
7
L OW
SWITCH
SO URCE
7
VA LUE
LAS T VAL
7
CI 1
CI 2
ALA RM 1
ALA RM 2
ALA RM 3
A LA RM 4
C1 A /M
C1 R/L
C2 A /M
C2 R/L
W/P
CO MM FAIL
C1 E XA CT
C2 E XA CT
TO TAL 1
TO TAL 2
A UTO SE L Note 1
GATE 0
GATE 1
GATE 2
GATE 3
GATE 4
GATE 5
GATE 6
GATE 7
GATE 8
GATE 9
ON
OFF
NO NE
IN 1
O UTMUL
O UTSUM
NO
F2
TO TAL 1
6
TO TAL 2
1 00 P CT
0 P CT
NO NE
6
3
Note 1 : Tr ue = C1 O UT;
7
False = C2 O UT
D
E
H
G
F
A
MI 0 18 -88 5/0 18 -8 89 /0 18 -9 00
H
A DDRESS
PA RITY
B
INC/INC
INC/DEC
Y ES
NO
CO 2
6
OR
NOR
AND
NAND
XO R
XNOR
INC/INC
INC/DEC
HI ACT
RE VERS E
W/P
S OURCE
TE MP
LOW A CT
AO UT 1
CO 1
RE F
E NG UNTS
URV
LRV
TE MP
TIME
IMPULS E
*
SO URCE
LATCHING
NONLAT
PE RMIS VE
AB S
DEV
ROC
G
SE T PT
LINEAR
BIAS
FOL LOW
7
DB
REP 2-4
COUNT UP
CO UNT DN
*
A LARM 1
2
STATE
CHAR 1
7
7
FREQ
PULS ED
FREQ I/P
BUMP
PTUNE
G
H
I
ON
O FF
INB IA S
FO RMAT
REP B- D
2
DY NC
G AIN
NB
WMAX
DMP
OVR
CLM
DFCT
LIM
TAG
VA RIA BLE
CALC 3
6
OUTBIAS
A
TOP L INE
CAL C 2
DE C P T
TO TAL 2
F
CAL C 1
CNT/SEC
PK 1
PK 2
USER SET
CONSTS
DIS PL AY
8
TAG
Y ES
NO
E
YE S
NO
*
1
P
I
D
SP HILIM
SP LOLIM
OUT HILIM
OUT LLIM
TUNE C2
TRK MAN
CA LC
BALANCE
1
9
L O SEL ECT
HI SE LE CT
GATE 4
D
C
B
Structure Diagram 8 – 3-Bar Indicator, 9 – A/M Station, 6 – Signal Distribution List, and 7 – Gate Input List
B
A
8
LFT BAR
A
C
DISPLAY
TYPE
URV
LRV
1
SCALE
6
SOURCE
MID BAR
RT BAR
ENG UNTS
*
IEC 100
SAMA 100
T/C J
T/C K
T/C E
1
SOURCE
1
2
ENG UNTS
URV
LRV
TEMP
SCALE
6
LBAR ALM
YES
NO
RBAR ALM
YES
NO
SOURCE
STARTUP
A
M
FLUNK
A
M
LAST A/M
ENG UNTS
URV
LRV
LINEAR
TEMP
2
MEAS
OUTBAR
*
SCALE
IEC 100
SAMA 100
T/C J
T/C K
T/C E
ENG UNTS
DEG F
DEG C
NONE
6
OUTPUT
SWITCH
7
SOURCE
6
LINEAR
SQ ROOT
SQUARED
CHAR 1
CHAR 2
A
B
MODIFIER
OUTMUL
OUTSUM
NO
OUTTRK
SWITCH
SOURCE
EXTLIM
HIGH
SWITCH
SOURCE
7
LOW
SWITCH
SOURCE
7
LRV
= Repeat for similar entry
ALARMS
MEAS
C
OUT
SET PT
TYPE
MEASTRK
3
FORMAT
A
MI 0 18 -88 5/0 18 -8 89 /0 18 -9 00
7 62 CN A/76 2C SA /7 43 CB C on tro ll er
A pp en di x C - Str uc tu re Dia gr am s
LOCAL
R/L
YES
NO
YES
NO
RL LOGIC
LOC TRK
7
INBIAS
LINEAR
SQ ROOT
SQUARED
CHAR 1
CHAR 2
SOURCE
7
SWITCH
7
STARTUP
L
R
6
*
B
= Same as for SETP except
no type selection NONE
C
STARTUP
D
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
C1 MEAS
C1 LOCSP
C1 REMSP
C1 SETP
C1 OUT
C2 MEAS
C2 LOCSP
C2 REMSP
C2 SETP
C2 OUT
ASEL OUT
FORMAT
URV
2
*
6
1
LRV
TYPE
SETP
LINEAR
SQ ROOT
SQUARED
CHAR 1
CHAR 2
DEG F
DEG C
A/M
YES
NO
MBAR ALM
IEC 100
SAMA 100
URV
URV
*
E
FORMAT
T/C J
T/C K
T/C E
ENG UNTS
DEG F
DEG C
LRV
ALARMS
LINEAR
ENG UNTS
TEMP
D
MEAS
TAG
TOP LINE
VARIABLE
LINEAR
TYPE
C
B
6
9
TAG
2
6
6
7
6
VALUE
LAST VAL
E
6
3
6
AOUT 1
AOUT 2
CALC 1
CALC 2
CALC 3
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
IN 4
F1
F2
TOTAL 1
TOTAL 2
100 PCT
0 PCT
NONE
7
CI 1
CI 2
ALARM 1
ALARM 2
ALARM 3
ALARM 4
C1 A/M
C1 R/L
C2 A/M
C2 R/L
W/P
COMM FAIL
C1 EXACT
C2 EXACT
TOTAL 1
TOTAL 2
AUTOSEL Note 1
GATE 0
GATE 1
GATE 2
GATE 3
GATE 4
GATE 5
GATE 6
GATE 7
GATE 8
GATE 9
ON
OFF
NONE
Note 1: True = C1 OUT;
False = C2 OUT
762C SINGLE
STATION
MICRO
Controller
February 1998
Preface
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Ð
• xiii
Quick Check • 1
Product Overview • 11
Installation • 23
Configuration • 49
Operation • 109
EXACT Tuning • 135
Calibration, Troubleshooting,
Maintenance • 159
Appendix A Specifications • 183
Appendix B Configuration Worksheets • 193
Appendix C Structure Diagrams • 237
Appendix D Parts List • 247
Appendix E Dimensional Print • 255
Appendix F Functional Diagram • 261
Glossary
• 267
Index
• 287
The Intelligent Automation People
246
762CNA Controller
MI 018-885 February 1998
Parts List
D
NOTE Information in this Parts List is based on PL 009-136 dated 12/94.
762CNA SINGLE STATION MICRO
Controller with Integral Power Supply
Style AA*, DIN Panel Mounted
Model Code
762CNA = SINGLE STATION MICRO Controller, DIN Panel-Mounted with Integral Power Supply
Voltage
–A = 120 V ac, 50/60 Hz
–B = 220 V ac, 50/60 Hz
–C = 240 V ac, 50/60 Hz
–D = 24 V dc
–E = 24 V ac, 50/60 Hz
–J = 100 V ac, 50/60 Hz
Housing
T = Terminal Block on Rear of Housing
W = Controller Chassis Without Housing
Optional
–1 = Output Isolation
–2 = RTD Input
NOTE To order parts, call Foxboro at 800-343-1198. (In Massachusetts,
call 800-322-2322.)
* The second letter in the style is the firmware style.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - D - Parts List
247
Figure D-1. DIN Panel-Mounted Controller Assembly
25
24
23
248
762CNA Controller - D - Parts List
MI 018-885 February 1998
Table D-1. DIN Panel Mounted Controller Assembly (Figure D-1)
Item
Part No
Qty
Part Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
L0122HX
B0171PC
X0167VT
L0117AV
K0143EJ
B0130JX
K0143DE
Below
L0122JR
L0122JS
X0173NY
A2004EK
-K0143BW
X0169KY
K0143CB
Below
C3510KP
P0156BM
C3510KX
E0118BA
Below
L0122HZ
L0122JA
L0122JB
L0122JE
L0122JC
L0122JD
G0114AK
G0114BY
G0114AJ
L0122HY
X0169YG
L0122HM
K0143DU
K0143AH
1
1
4
1
1
AR
1
1
Chassis Assembly
Data Label
Tap Screw, 0.143-19 x 0.500, fh
Base Assembly (see Figure D-2)
Cover Assembly
Adhesive
Cable Assembly, Display
Electronic Module (see Figure D-3)
For All Model Code Suffixes Except –D
For Model Code Suffix –D
Washer, Wave
Screw, 0.138-32 x 0.75, pnh
Memory Module (see Figure D-3)
PWA, Optional (For Model Code Suffix –1)
Screw, 0.138-32 x 0.25, pnh
PWA, Optional (For Model Code Suffix –2)
Fuse (part of item 17)
1/2 A, 120 V (for Voltage –A and –J)
300 mA, 220/240 V (for Voltage -B and -C)
2 A, 24 V (for Voltage –D and –E)
Fuseholder (part of item 17)
Bracket Assembly
For Model Code Suffix –A
For Model Code Suffix –B
For Model Code Suffix –C
For Model Code Suffix –D
For Model Code Suffix –E
For Model Code Suffix –J
Clamp, Screw
Clamp, Upper
Clamp, Lower
Back Panel Assembly
Tap Screw, 0.112-40 x 0.25, fh
Housing
Terminal Cover (Division 2 only)
Terminal Cover (General Purpose only)
9
10
11
12
13
14
*15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
7
4
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
4
1
*Parts Preceded by an Asterisk are Recommended Spare Parts.
Give Instrument Model Number and Style when Ordering.
See Recommended Spare Parts Summary Section for Quantities.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - D - Parts List
249
Figure D-2. Base Assembly
Table D-2. Base Assembly (Figure D-1)
250
Item
Part No
Qty
Part Name
1
*2
3
4
5
6
7
8
L0117AN
L0117BS
L0117AW
X0120ML
X0172TE
X0167VT
X0143AD
X0143AE
1
1
1
2
4
4
2
4
Display Assembly
Membrane Switch Assembly
Base Molding
Screw, pnh, 0.112-40 x 0.25
Screw, pnh, 138-32 x 0.75
Screw, flh, 0.143-19 x 0.500 (not shown)
Washer, flat, 0.112
Washer, flat, 0.138
762CNA Controller - D - Parts List
MI 018-885 February 1998
Figure D-3. Electronics Module Assembly - Digital PWA
QTY 1
QTY 2
Table D-3. Digital PWA Portion of Electronics Module Assembly (Figure D-3)
Item
Part No
Qty
Part Name
*1
2
2A
2B
2C
K0141LN
L0122RL
1
1
ref
ref
ref
Memory Module (location X9)
Set of items 2A, 2B, and 2C
Numeric Processor Firmware, Lower (location X8)
Numeric Processor Firmware, Upper (location X7)
Display Processor Firmware (location X5)
3
K0143FA
3
Jumper
4
K0141FN
1
Set of items 1, 2A, 2B, and 2C
Table D-4. Recommended Spare Parts Summary
Number of Parts
Recommended for
MI 018-885
Figure
Number
Item
Number
Part
Number
1
Inst.
5
Inst.
20
Inst.
D-1
15
2
2
2
D-2
D-3
2
1
Below
C3510KP
P0156BM
C3510KX
L0117BS
K0141LN
0
0
1
1
1
1
February 1998
762CNA Controller - D - Parts List
Part Name
Fuse
1/2 A, for 120 V use
300 mA, for 220/240 V use
2 A, for 24 V use
Membrane Switch Assembly
Memory Module
251
252
762CNA Controller - D - Parts List
MI 018-885 February 1998
762C SINGLE
STATION
MICRO
Controller
February 1998
Preface
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Ð
Appendix A
Appendix B
Appendix C
Appendix D
Appendix E
Appendix F
Glossary
Index
• xiii
Quick Check • 1
Product Overview • 11
Installation • 23
Configuration • 49
Operation • 109
EXACT Tuning • 135
Calibration, Troubleshooting,
Maintenance • 159
Specifications • 183
Configuration Worksheets • 193
Structure Diagrams • 237
Parts List • 247
Dimensional Print • 255
Functional Diagram • 261
• 267
• 287
The Intelligent Automation People
254
762CNA Controller
MI 018-885 February 1998
Dimensional
Print
E
NOTE Information in this appendix is based on DP 018-836 dated 10/94.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - E -
255
Figure E-1. 762CNA SINGLE STATION MICRO Controller
Mounting Panel 3 to 32 mm
(0.12 to 0.90 in) Thick
Mounting Bracket
Housing
Two 16-position
Terminal Strips
Power Terminals (24,
100, 120, 220, 240 V
ac, or 24 V dc, as
specified)
Front Panel
Power
Terminal
Cover
10.2
0.4
72
2.8
137
5.4
165
6.5
144
5.7
32
1.3
6.3
0.25
315
12.4
8.0
0.32
305
12.0
25
1.0
6.7 DIA
0.26 DIA
32
16
17
1
50
1.97
66
2.6
Terminal Cover
for Division 2
Instruments
Agency
Label
64
2.5
256
762CNA Controller - E -
MI 018-885 February 1998
Figure E-2. Panel Cutout Dimensions
68.0 to 69.5
2.68 to 2.74
(N X 72.0) - 4.0 = Width (mm); Tolerance = +1.5, -0
(N X 2.84) - 0.16 = Width (in); Tolerance = +.06, -0
138.0 to 139.0
5.43 to 5.47
Single
cutout*
c
3.0 to 3.3
0.12 to 0.13
Cutout for multiple controllers*
Centerline of controller
7.6 to 7.9
0.30 to 0.31
13 maximum
0.5
Front surface of
panel
If panel thickness is greater than 13 mm (0.5
in), a clearance slot for latch on
bottom of controller is required.
Panel thickness
*If panel has more than one cutout, allow 45 mm (1.78 in) vertical distance between cutouts as shown below. This provides
36 mm (1.4 in) spacing between controllers.
Upper Cutout
Lower Cutout
45 minimum
1.78
MI 018-885
May 1995
762C Controller – E - Dimensional Print
257
258
762CNA Controller - E -
MI 018-885 February 1998
762C SINGLE
STATION
MICRO
Controller
February 1998
Preface
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Ð
Appendix A
Appendix B
Appendix C
Appendix D
Appendix E
Appendix F
Glossary
Index
• xiii
Quick Check • 1
Product Overview • 11
Installation • 23
Configuration • 49
Operation • 109
EXACT Tuning • 135
Calibration, Troubleshooting,
Maintenance • 159
Specifications • 183
Configuration Worksheets • 193
Structure Diagrams • 237
Parts List • 247
Dimensional Print • 255
Functional Diagram • 261
• 267
• 287
The Intelligent Automation People
260
762CNA Controller
MI 018-885 February 1998
Functional
Diagram
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - F - Functional Diagram
F
261
262
762CNA Controller - F - Functional Diagram
MI 018-885 February 1998
Functional Diagram
FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM OF 762C/743CB CONTROLLER
FILTERE D DE RIV
ME AS
SOURCE
SIGNA L
INB IA S
FACE PLATE
RO UTE D
CAS CADE
CA SCA DE
PRIMARY
OUTP UT
LIN
SQ R
SQ D
CHAR1
CHAR2
RANG E
10 0
O UTB IA S
REMO TE S P
S OURCE
NOTE:
For information on input signal
conditioning and scaling, refer to
Chapter 4 – Configuration.
SIG.DIS T. LIST
MEA S
ERROR
DE RIV
FILTER
+
+
+
L IN
CHA R1
CHA R2
x
P RE TUNE
B UMP
S OURCE
F( )
+
x
+
+
I
RATIO
+
ACTIO N
P D,P ID
REMO TE
SE T PT
+
L IN
S QR
S QD
CHA R1
CHA R2
R
SE T P T
L IMITS
L OCTRK
L
S IG . DIST. L IS T
SET PT
SP L EAD/LA G
FILTER
I PID,PD,AM
M
S OURCE
0%
INCREME NT
INT FB K
BIAS
NOTE:
For information on split ranging,
refer to Chapter 4 – Configuration..
NO NE
CASCADE (RATIO)
AUTO SELECT (HI or LO)
INT FBK, C1
SIGNA L
C1, SP1
C1, MEAS 1
1
100
CO NTR
C1 O UT
1
SE LECTOR
HI or LO
P RIMA RY
CO NTR
x
C2 REMS P S ECONDA RY
CO NTR
C2 OUT
AO UT 1
C2, S P2
C2, MEAS 2
INT FB K, C2
INT FBK , C1
C2 REMS P
SE CONDA RY
CO NTR
INT FB K, C2
C2 OUT
AO UT 1
C1, SP 1
INT FBK
C1, MEAS 1
CO NTR
1
C2, S P2
C2, MEA S2
CO NTR
2
C1 O UT
1
INT FBK , C2
INT FBK , C1
C1, ME AS 1
A OUT 1
C2 OUT
AUTO SELECT (GATE 4)
CASCADE (SIMPLE)
P RIMA RY
CONTR
CO NTR
2
C2, ME AS2
C1, MEAS 1
C1, SP
0
C2 , MEA S2
C2 O UT
INT FB K
G ATE 4
MI 0 18 -88 5/0 18 -8 89 /0 18 -9 00
7 62 CN A/76 2C SA /7 43 CB C on tro ll er
A pp en di x F - Fu nc ti on al Di ag ram
PID, I
PD
INV ERS E
F( )
BATCH
PRE LOA D
+
C1, SP
LL IM
OUTMUL
+
+
OUT
MA NUAL
O UTSUM
MEAS TRK
INB IAS
HLIM
O UTPUT
LIMITS
A
1 00%
1
10 0
INTE GRA L LAG ( T)
PD, AM: T=BA LANCE
I, P ID: T=I
OUTTRK
LIN
SQ R
SQ D
CHAR1
CHAR2
AM
1 00
P
A OUT 1
762C SINGLE
STATION
MICRO
Controller
February 1998
Preface
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Ð
Appendix A
Appendix B
Appendix C
Appendix D
Appendix E
Appendix F
Glossary
Index
• xiii
Quick Check • 1
Product Overview • 11
Installation • 23
Configuration • 49
Operation • 109
EXACT Tuning • 135
Calibration, Troubleshooting,
Maintenance • 159
Specifications • 183
Configuration Worksheets • 193
Structure Diagrams • 237
Parts List • 247
Dimensional Print • 255
Functional Diagram • 261
• 267
• 287
The Intelligent Automation People
266
762CNA Controller
MI 018-885 February 1998
Glossary
G
This Glossary contains words that may appear on your display. Most are
configuration parameters. However, messages related to EXACT control
and those that indicate a problem with your controller are also included.
A
A
IN 1 after signal conditioning, gain, and biases have been applied.
ABS
ABSolute alarm.
ACTION
OUTPUT INCreases with INCreasing measurement; OUTPUT INCreases
with DECreasing measurement.
ACTION
LATCHING, NON LATching, or PERMISVE alarms.
ADDRESS
Device number (0 to 99) on serial communication port. A total of 30 can
be used.
ALARM n
Alarm number 1 through 4.
ALARMS
CONFIGuration, tuning values (ALLTUNE), and DISPLAYing values of
up to four alarms.
ALLTUNE
Sets values of TUNE, LIMITS, CONSTS, ALARMS, and TOTALS.
A/M
Auto/Manual.
A/M STN
Specifies Auto/Manual Station function in CONFIGuration.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - G - Glossary
267
Analog
Specifies an ANALOG CALIBration INPUT.
AND
AND gate.
AOUT 1, AOUT 2
Analog Output 1 or 2.
AUTOSEL
Logic output of Auto Selector; True = C1 OUT, False = C2 OUT.
ATTACH
Specifies signals from Signal Distribution List that will activate alarms.
AUTO SEL
Specifies the STRATEGY of using the controller as an AUTO SELector.
B
B
IN 2 after signal conditioning, gain, and biases have been applied.
BALANCE
Time function used in P/PD controller.
BATCH
BATCH action function.
BAUD
Data transfer speed between host and controller.
BIAS
Output BIAS for P/PD controller.
BIPOLAR
In dynamic compensation (DYNC), a lead/lag (LLAG) IMPULSE that is
both POSITIVE and NEGATIVE.
BOTH
Allows either the workstation or the panel to switch controller operation
from W to P or vice versa.
BUMP
Parameter in EXACT configuration.
BYPASS
Routes the set point directly to the output, thus bypassing the control algorithm.
C
C
IN 3 after signal conditioning, gain, and biases been applied.
Cn A/M
Auto/Manual function of Controller 1 or 2.
Cn EXACT
EXACT function of Controller 1 or 2.
268
762CNA Controller - G - Glossary
MI 018-885 February 1998
Cn LIMITS
Protects access to set point and output LIMITS in SHOWOP.
Cn LOCSP
Local Set point of Controller 1 or 2.
Cn MEAS
Measurement signal of Controller 1 or 2.
Cn OUT
Output signal of Controller 1 or 2.
Cn OUTHL
Parameter to READ VALUE of High Output Limit of Controller 1 or 2.
Cn OUTLL
Parameter to READ VALUE of Low Output Limit of Controller 1 or 2.
Cn R/L
Remote/Local function of Controller 1 or 2.
Cn REMSP
Remote Set point of Controller 1 or 2.
Cn SETP
Active Set point of Controller 1 or 2.
Cn SPHL
Parameter to READ VALUE of High Set Point Limit of Controller 1 or 2.
Cn SPLL
Parameter to READ VALUE of Low Set Point Limit of Controller 1 or 2.
CALC, CALC n
Up to three CALCulations on a number of inputs to the controller.
CALIB
Allows CALIBration of controller.
CASCADE
Specifies the STRATEGY of using the controller as a CASCADE controller.
CHAR n
Up to 9-point (8-segment) CHARacterization of signal.
CI 1, CI 2
Contact Input 1 and 2.
CLM
Change Limit in EXACT configuration.
CNT/SEC
In totalizer, counts per second at 100% totalizing rate.
CO 1, CO 2
Contact Output 1 and 2.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - G - Glossary
269
COMM FAIL
Logic signal in Gate Input List generated by serial communication failure.
CONFIG
Allows entering of controller CONFIGuration.
CONSTS
Constants G through J.
CONTACTS
Parameter to READ VALUE of contact inputs and outputs.
COUNT
Specifies STATE of Totalizer as Counting.
COUNT UP, DN
Specifies TYPE of Totalizer action, counting up or down from preset value.
D
D
Derivative in EXACT configuration.
D
IN 4 after signal conditioning, gain, and biases have been applied.
DB
Deadband of alarms and split range.
DEADBAND
Deadband of split range.
DEADTIME
DEADTIME in Dynamic Compensation (DYNC).
DEC PT
Specifies DECimal PoinT position in the Totalizer display.
DEG C
Temperature in Celsius degrees.
DEG F
Temperature in Fahrenheit degrees.
DEV
DEViation alarm.
DF
Faceplate derivative value in ALLTUNE configuration.
DFCT
Derivative Factor in EXACT configuration.
DIRECT
Gate output is same as input.
DIS PROC
Identifies VERSION of the DISplay PROCessor firmware.
270
762CNA Controller - G - Glossary
MI 018-885 February 1998
DISPLAY
Allows configuration of information that is to be presented on controller
faceplate.
DMP
Maximum allowed damping in EXACT configuration.
DYNC
Dynamic Compensation consisting of DEADTIME, LEADLAG, and
IMPULSE.
E
E
F 1 after signal conditioning, gain, and biases have been applied.
ENG UNTS
Engineering Units.
ENT
Reason for particular action taken in EXACT tuning.
ENT - 1 PEAK
Message - only one significant (with respect to noise band) peak was found.
Measurement is approximately critically damped.
ENT = 2 PEAKS
Message - two peaks found. If peaks are significant, response period is used
to adjust proportional and derivative actions.
ENT = 3 PEAKS
Message - 3 peaks found. If peaks are significant, response period is used to
adjust proportional and derivative actions.
ENT = DAMPED
Message - error signal (measurement deviation from set point) was overdamped. Response may appear overdamped if WMAX is set too low. If so,
algorithm will tighten control settings. This can lead to instability.
ENT = SUSPECT
Message - error signal has suspicious shape that may be caused by multiple
disturbances. P, I, and/or D were slightly adjusted based on this suspicious
shape.
ENT = FAST
Message - error signal response occurred faster than expected, based on
WMAX time. No corrective action was taken.
ENT = SP CHANGE
Message - a large set point change occurred after algorithm had located or
verified a peak. Additional corrective action did not occur because algorithm went immediately into SETTLE (waiting for next peak) state.
ENT = OOR
Message - error signal was observed but P, I, and/or D were not changed
because process was out of control range.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - G - Glossary
271
ENT = CLAMPED
Message - algorithm attempted to change P and I to values larger than setting of PF and IF modified by CLM.
ENT = INIT
EXACT algorithm has been initialized.
ERR
Error parameter in EXACT configuration.
EVEN
EVEN PARITY.
EXACT
EXpert Adaptive Controller Tuning.
EXACT SW
Specifies an event from the Gate Input List to activate EXACT tuning.
EXIT PASS
Enables passage from below to above the PASSCODE when TOGGLE feature is configured.
EXT ACK
Allows specification from Gate Input List of a parameter to EXTernally
ACKnowledge an alarm.
EXTERNAL
Specifies EXTERNAL ANALOG INPUT in CALIBration.
EXTLIM
EXTernal LIMits of OUTPUT.
F
F
F2 after signal conditioning, gain, and biases have been applied.
F1, F2
Frequency (pulse) inputs 1 and 2.
FCEPLATE
Panel faceplate as applied to mechanism to select source of ratio.
FILTER
FILTER time that can be applied to each input.
FLUNK
Loss of serial communication between controller and host to produce a
specified action (in W of W/P mode).
FOLLOW
Switch used in Dynamic Compensation to bypass Deadtime and Leadlag
functions.
FORM
ABSolute, DEViation, or Rate Of Change alarms.
272
762CNA Controller - G - Glossary
MI 018-885 February 1998
FORMAT
Signal conditioning (LINEAR, SQUARED, SQ ROOT, CHAR).
FREQ
Specifies FREQuency for Calibration.
FREQ
FREQuency inputs as opposed to a pair of pulse up/pulse down inputs.
FREQ I/P
Two FREQuency or one pulse up/pulse down pair of inputs.
FS
Implements Full Scale CALIBration when FREQuency INPUT is used.
FUNC n
In CONFIGuration, specifies FUNCtion 1 or 2 of the instrument. Available
functions include various controller types, A/M Station, and 3-Bar Indicator.
G
G
One of four constants.
GAIN
Gain as applied to inputs and lead/lag function of dynamic compensation.
GATES, GATE n
Boolean GATE 0 through 9.
H
H
One of four constants.
HI ACT
In HIgh (above split point) end of SPLIT RaNGe, specifies whether output
increases with increasing or decreasing measurement.
HI SELECT
SELECTion of the HIgher output when using auto selector control.
HI/HI
High-High alarm.
HI/LO
High-Low alarm.
HOLD
Specifies an event from the Gate Input List to HOLD (disable) the Totalizer.
I
I
Integral in EXACT configuration.
I
One of four constants.
I ONLY
Integral only controller.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - G - Glossary
273
IEC 100
RTD using IEC 100 curve.
IF
Faceplate integral value in ALLTUNE configuration.
IMPULSE
A function of LEADLAG in Dynamic Compensation.
IN n
Analog INput 1 through INput 4.
IN BIAS
Bias functionally applied before GAIN on inputs. (Configured after
GAIN). Also, bias applied to set point.
INC/DEC
Output INCreases with DECreasing measurement.
INC/INC
Output INCreases with INCreasing measurement.
INPUTS
Four analog and two frequency inputs.
INPUT n
Input to Boolean gate.
INTERNAL
Specifies INTERNAL ANALOG INPUT in CALIBration.
INT FBK
INTegral FeedBacK.
J
L
J
One of four constants.
L
Specifies Local control upon STARTUP after a power failure.
LAST A/M
Last status of A/M before serial communication was lost.
LAST W/P
Last status of W/P before serial communication was lost.
LAST VAL
The LAST VALue of the output before a power loss.
LATCHING
LATCHING alarm action.
LBAR ALM
Specifies display of Left BAR ALarM limits on a 3-Bar Indicator for
SOURCE signal alarmed.
274
762CNA Controller - G - Glossary
MI 018-885 February 1998
LEADLAG
Lead/lag in Dynamic Compensation (DYNC).
LEVEL 1
LEVEL 1 alarm value in ALLTUNE (or OPTUNE).
LEVEL 2
LEVEL 2 alarm value in ALLTUNE (or OPTUNE).
LFT BAR
LeFT BARgraph in a 3-Bar Indicator.
LIM
Output Cycling LIMit in EXACT configuration.
LIMITS
Parameter to READ set point and output LIMITS.
LINEAR
Linear variable in TOP LINE, MEAS SP, or 3 Bar Indicator display.
LINEAR
LINEAR conditioning; repeats input.
LO SELECT
SELECTion of the LOwer output when using auto selector control.
LOCAL
Provides configuration of LOCAL Set Point.
LOC TRK
Causes local set point to track remote set point.
LOGIC
Defines logic gate Boolean type.
LO/LO
Low-low alarm.
LOW
LOW EXTernal output LIMits.
LOW ACT
In Low end (below split point) of SPLIT RaNGe, specifies whether output
increases with increasing or decreasing measurement.
LRV
Lower Range Value.
M
MBAR ALM
Specifies display of Middle BAR ALarM limits on a 3-Bar Indicator for
SOURCE signal alarmed.
MEAS
Provides access to signal conditioning and SOURCE of controller
MEASurement.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - G - Glossary
275
MEAS
DiSPlay of the MEASurement in Auto/Manual Station.
MEAS ALM
Specifies display of the MEASurement ALarM.
MEAS, SP
The engineering scaled value of the variable identified by the Bargraph
Identifier. It is located on the second line of the alphanumeric display.
MEAS TRK
MEASurement Tracking. Local set point tracks measurement.
MID BAR
MIDdle BARgraph in a 3-Bar Indicator.
MODIFIER
Modification of OUTPUT by adding it to (OUTSUM) or multiplying it by
(OUTMUL) a parameter from the Signal Input List.
N
NAND
NAND gate.
NB
Noise Band in EXACT tuning.
NEGATIVE
In dynamic compensation (DYNC), IMPULSE that is only NEGATIVE.
NEW PASS
Set NEW PASScode.
NO
No assignment; not used.
NONE
No signal in Signal Distribution List; Function switch not used in Gate
Input List. Refer to various sections in this document for further description.
NON LAT
NONLATching alarm action.
NONLIN
NONLINear curve, consisting of a number of x-y coordinate pairs, which is
applied to controller error (Set Point - Measurement).
NOR
NOR gate.
NOT
Logic signal reversal.
NOVRAM
Identifies version of the NOVRAM configurator module.
276
762CNA Controller - G - Glossary
MI 018-885 February 1998
NOVRAM ALL FAIL
Copy function failed; problem in both ORIG and COPY memory modules.
NOVRAM COPY FAIL
Copy function failed; problem in (COPY) memory module.
NOVRAM MSTR FAIL
Copy function failed; problem in master (ORIG) memory module.
NUM PROC
Identifies VERSION of the NUMeric PROCessor firmware.
O
ODD
ODD PARITY for serial communications.
OFF
Definition varies — Refer to various sections in this document.
ON
Definition varies — Refer to various sections in this document.
ONE FUNC
Specifies the STRATEGY of using the instrument as a single controller,
auto/manual station, or 3-bar indicator.
OPTUNE
Allows OPerator TUNing of specified parameters as specified in SHOWOP.
OR
OR gate.
OUT n
Specifies OUTPUT during CALIBration.
OUT ALM
Specifies display of the OUTput ALarM.
OUT HLIM
Allows setting High LIMit of OUTput in ALLTUNE (or OPTUNE).
OUT LLIM
Allows setting Low LIMit of OUTput in ALLTUNE (or OPTUNE).
OUTBAR
Specifies signal to be displayed on the right bargraph (usually C1 OUT or
C2 OUT).
OUTBIAS
Bias functionally applied after GAIN for inputs. (Configured before
GAIN). Also, BIAS added to RATIO after GAIN has been applied.
OUTMUL
Provides OUTput MULtiplication; modified analog input is multiplied by
controller output.
OUTPUT REVERSE
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - G - Glossary
277
Reverses controller output to accommodate reverse acting valve operator.
OUTPUTS
Allows configuration of parameters relating to control output.
OUTSUM
Provides OUTput SUMming; modified analog input is added to controller
output.
OUTTRK
Specifies that OUTput TRacK as source specified from the Signal Input
List.
OVR
Overshoot in EXACT configuration.
P
P
Proportional band in EXACT configuration.
P
Panel control.
PARITY
Error detection feature in serial communications.
PASSCODE
User-defined security access code. To configure a new passcode, see NEW
PASS.
PD
Proportional plus Derivative controller.
PERMISVE
Permissive alarm action; No alarm display but Boolean logic is active.
PF
Faceplate proportional band value in ALLTUNE configuration.
PH DISP
Allows the local or remote set point to be displayed before or after the signal
is characterized.
PI
Proportional plus Integral controller.
PID
Proportional plus Integral plus Derivative controller.
PK1, 2, 3
Peak Height in EXACT configuration.
POINTS
Total number of POINTS to be used with CHAR 1 or CHAR 2.
POSITIVE
In dynamic compensation (DYNC), IMPULSE that is only POSITIVE.
278
762CNA Controller - G - Glossary
MI 018-885 February 1998
PRELOAD
In ALLTUNE, the PRELOAD of the BATCH feature.
PRESET1, 2
Specifies the number that Totalizer 1 or 2 is to count up to or down from.
PRIORITY
Allows selection of whether the workstation or panel can switch controller
operation from W to P and vice versa.
PTUNE
Pretune state monitoring in EXACT configuration.
PULSE
One pair of pulse up/pulse down inputs as opposed to two frequency
inputs.
R
R
Specifies Remote control upon STARTUP after a power failure.
RANGE
Gain as applied to RATIO function.
RATIO
RATIO control.
RATIO
Specifies the details of the RATIO DISPLAY.
RBAR ALM
Specifies display of Right BAR ALarM limits on a 3-Bar Indicator for
SOURCE signal alarmed.
RD EXACT
READ parameters in EXACT algorithm.
RD PTUNE
READ message relating to Pretune (PTUNE) function.
RD PTUNE = OFF
Message that Pretune function has not been switched on.
RD PTUNE = IN AUTO?
Message that Pretune function is ready. Put controller in AUTO.
RD PTUNE = SMALL 1
Message - small (2.5%) change in measurement. Phase 1. If message lasts
longer than twice process dead time, value of BUMP is too small.
RD PTUNE = WAIT 2
Message - waiting for steady state. Phase 2.
RD PTUNE = PID 3
Message - new values of P, I, and D calculated. Output is returned to initial
value. Phase 3.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - G - Glossary
279
RD PTUNE = NB 4
Message - measured noise band. Phase 4.
RD PTUNE = FINISH
Message - Pretune function finished. Values of the 6 key EXACT parameters have been calculated and put into memory.
RD PTUNE = INC WRONG
Message - Pretuning not completed because controller action is configured
wrong.
RD PTUNE = NOISE
Message - Pretuning not completed because value of noise band (NG) is too
small.
READ
Allows operator to READ controller CONFIGuration and VALUES.
REF
REFerence variable in DEViation alarms.
RESET
Specifies an event from the Gate Input List to RESET the Totalizer.
R/L
Permits configuration of Remote Set Point.
RL LOGIC
Specifies the LOC TRK, SWITCHing, and STARTUP in Remote/Local set
point and Ratio control.
ROC
Rate of Change alarm FORM.
ROUTED
The parameter used to route any signal from the Signal Distribution List to
be the SOURCE of the RATIO function.
RT BAR
Right BAR in a 3-Bar Indicator.
S
SAMA 100
RTD using SAMA 100 curve.
SCALE
RTD or Thermocouple curve (SCALE).
SECURE
Passcode protected category in SET mode.
SET
Allows user to enter CONFIGure and TUNE modes.
SET PT
Allows configuration of LOCAL set point, REMOTE set point, and
RATIO.
280
762CNA Controller - G - Glossary
MI 018-885 February 1998
SHOWOP
Allows selection of those parameters (TUNE, LIMITS, ALARMS,
CONSTS, TOTALS) that may be adjusted (OPTUNE) without use of a
PASSCODE. YES enables adjustment.
SIGNAL
Specifies INBIAS and SOURCE as applies to RATIO function.
SIGNALS
Parameter to READ VALUE of conditioned input, analog output, and
CALCulation SIGNALS.
SOURCE
The SOURCE of EXTernal LIMits, output tracking (OUTTRK), MEASurement, and RATIO from the Signal Distribution List.
SP HILIM
Allows setting HIgh LIMit of Set Point in ALLTUNE (or OPTUNE).
SP LAG
Specifies Set Point LAG (ratio of lead to lag) in ALLTUNE (or OPTUNE).
SP LOLIM
Allows setting LOw LIMit of Set Point in ALLTUNE (or OPTUNE).
SPLIT PT
Specifies point of split (in percent) in SPLIT RNG.
SPLT RNG
One control algorithm is divided into two analog output ranges when YES
is selected.
SET P
Display of the Set Point in an Auto/Manual Station.
SQUARED
Input SQUARED.
SQ ROOT
SQuare ROOT of input.
STARTUP
Allows status selection for A/M, R/L, and W/P upon restart after a power
failure. Also allows selection of OUTPUT value to be a value from 0% to
100% or the LAST VALue of output before power loss.
STATE
EXACT (STUN) function is ON or OFF.
STATUS ENT
EXACT Message - reason why specific corrective action was taken. This
parameter is updated every time P, I, and/or D is adjusted.
STATUS STUN
EXACT Message - status of specific corrective action taking place.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - G - Glossary
281
STRATEGY
Specifies whether the instrument is to be used as a ONE FUNCTION
instrument, TWO FUNCTION instrument, CASCADE controller, or
AUTO SELECTOR controller.
STUN = QUIET
EXACT Message - no corrective action is taking place (error is <2NB).
STUN = LOCATE 1, 2, OR 3
EXACT Message - a peak (1, 2, or 3) has been located.
STUN = VERIFY 1, 2, OR 3
EXACT Message - the located peak (1, 2, or 3) has been verified.
STUN = ADAPT
EXACT Message - P, I, and/or D has been adjusted.
STUN = SETTLE
EXACT Message - waiting for next peak.
STUN = MANUAL
EXACT Message - self-tuning is operational, but controller is in MANual.
STUN = INACTIVE
EXACT Message - EXACT is temporarily disabled due to a configured condition that affects the closed-loop control.
STUN
Step being executed in EXACT tuning.
SWITCH
Configuration of one of the entries in the Gate Input List to act as a
SWITCH.
T
TAG
A TOP LINE display of up to a nine characters.
Tn STATE
Specifies the STATE (COUNT, RESET, or HOLD) of Totalizer 1 or 2.
T/C E, T/C J, T/C K
Thermocouple using type E, J, or K curve.
TEMP
TEMPerature display (RTD or Thermocouple).
TIME
Time in dynamic compensation (in minutes).
TIME OUT
Length of time in minutes that communication is interrupted before
FLUNK action is implemented.
282
762CNA Controller - G - Glossary
MI 018-885 February 1998
TOGGLE
Enables user to go from one of the User Interface modes (READ or SET)
to the Normal Operation mode and return to the function from which the
User Interface was exited using the TAG key.
TOP LINE
A nine character ASCII string or an engineering scaled variable with a units
label.
TOTAL 1,2
In READ, displays the value of Totalizer 1 or 2.
TOTAL 1, 2
Specifies the CONFIGuration of TOTALizer 1 or 2.
TOTAL 1, 2
Totalizer status in Gate Input List and lower two bytes of totalizer value in
Signal Distribution List.
TOTALS
Allows setting values for the Totalizers in ALLTUNE (or OPTUNE).
TPK1, 2, 3
Time to peak parameter in EXACT configuration.
TRK MAN
Specifies whether output tracking switches and signals of the two controllers are common in an Auto Selector.
TUNE C1, 2
Allows TUNing the control mode of Controller 1 or 2.
TWO FUNC
Specifies the STRATEGY of using the instrument for TWO FUNCtions
other than CASCADE and AUTO SELect
TYPE
Attributes that determine kind of controller.
TYPE
Type of alarms; High-high, High-low, or Low-low.
TYPE
Type of TOP LINE VARIABLE display, MEAS, SP display, 3-Bar Indicator
display, and A/M Station display.
U
URV
Upper Range Value.
USER SET
USER SET values in EXACT control.
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CNA Controller - G - Glossary
283
V
VALUE
The VALUE (0 to 100%) of output upon restart (STARTUP) after a power
loss.
VALUES
Allows operator to READ VALUES of various parameters.
VARIABLE
Variable input to the TAG DISPlay in place of an ASCII looptag.
VERIFY
VERIFY NEW PASScode.
W
W
Workstation control.
WMAX
Maximum Wait Time in EXACT configuration.
W/P
Workstation/Panel.
WRONG NOVRAM
Memory module is for another model controller.
X
X nn, Y nn
Values of x-y pair, in characterizer function.
XNOR
Exclusive-NOR gate.
XOR
Exclusive-OR gate.
Y
Z
284
YES
Feature used.
ZERO
Implements CALIBration of ZERO when FREQuency INPUT is used.
762CNA Controller - G - Glossary
MI 018-885 February 1998
762C SINGLE
STATION
MICRO
Controller
February 1998
Preface
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Ð
Appendix A
Appendix B
Appendix C
Appendix D
Appendix E
Appendix F
Glossary
Index
• xiii
Quick Check • 1
Product Overview • 11
Installation • 23
Configuration • 49
Operation • 109
EXACT Tuning • 135
Calibration, Troubleshooting,
Maintenance • 159
Specifications • 183
Configuration Worksheets • 193
Structure Diagrams • 237
Parts List • 247
Dimensional Print • 255
Functional Diagram • 261
• 267
• 287
The Intelligent Automation People
286
762CNA Controller
MI 018-885 February 1998
Index
A
Batch Control 103
Block Diagram 110
BYPASS 59
Certifications 187
Changing Alarm Settings 126
Changing the Control Status 121
Changing the Display 6
Characterizers 100
Common Configuration Functions 58
Configuration 49
Configuration Copy Accessory 105
Configuration Worksheets 193
Configuring, Tuning, and Displaying Alarms 70
Connecting to Power Source 3
Connecting Wires to Compression Type Terminals
30
Control Options 15
Control Station Configurations 16
Control Type and Tuning 58
Controller Display 4
Controller Identification 25
Controls and Indicators 113
Copy Configuration Accessory 17
C
D
Absolute Alarms 65
Actual Output Indication 17
Alarm Action 70
Alarm Configuration Examples 71
Alarm, Type of 64
Alarms 14, 49, 64, 111
Alarms, Form of 64
Alternate Station Configurations 76
Analog Input Signal Wiring 33
Analog Inputs 59
Auto Selector Controller 78
Auto/Manual Control 63
Auto/Manual Station 79
B
Calculating Calibrating Resistances for Temperature
Difference Measurement 171
Calculation Functions 111
Calculations 82
Calculations/Logic Functions 14
Calibration 159
Frequency Inputs 165
OUT 1 and OUT 2 165, 166
RTD Input 164
Calibration Equipment Accuracy 160
Calibration Procedures 160
Cascade Controller 76
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CSA Controller – Index
Data Communication 112
Deviation Alarms 65
Discrete Inputs 60
Display Features 62
Display Variable 62
Displaying/Acknowledging Alarms 123
Dynamic Compensation 86, 87
E
Enable Serial Communications 101
Enabling/Disabling EXACT Tuning 127
287
Entering a Passcode 117
Error Messages 173
EXACT
Calculating Initial Parameters 140
Calculating PID Values 138
Change Limit (CLM) 143
Determining Process Response 137, 138
Initial Values of P, I, and D 141
Noise Band (NB) 142
Output Cycling Limit (LIM) 143
Structure Diagrams 144
Technical Description 136
Using EXACT Tuning 144
EXACT Control 112
EXACT Tuning 135
EXTERNAL Calibration 163, 164
External Reset 103
F
Forms of Alarms 65
Frequency Input Signal Wiring 34
Frequency Inputs 59
Frequency of Calibration 160
Front Panel 18
Functional Specifications 183
Functions 110
K
Keypad 115
Keypad Functions 19
L
Logic Gates 81
LOw/LOw Alarms 69
M
Maintenance 159, 176
Front Panel Replacement 178
Precautions When Replacing ROMs 178
Replacement of Fuse 178
RTD or Isolated Output PWA Replacement
179
Test Display 173
Transformer Assembly Replacement 178
Modes of Operation 116
N
G
Nonlinear Control 100
NORMAL Mode Operation 117
Gates, Logic 81
Glossary 267
O
H
HIgh/HIgh Alarms 68
High/Low Alarms 67
I
Implementing Your Configuration 54, 55, 56
Indicator Station 79
Input Signal Conditioning 14
Input Signal Conditioning and Scaling 60
Input Signal Terminal/Wire Designations 32
Input Signals 59
288
Inputs 13, 111
Installation Procedure 27
INTERNAL Calibration 163
Isolated Output Option 179
762CNA Controller - Index
Operating and Storage Conditions 187
Operation 109
Optional Features And Accessories 189
Optional Surge Suppressor 41
OPTO-22 Converter Card 45
Output Action 99
Output Bargraph 99
Output Limits 98
Output Reverse 99
Output Signal Terminal/Wire Designations 38
Output Signal Wiring 38
Output Signals 62
MI 018-885
February 1998
Output Summing and Multiplying 94
Output Tracking 94
Output Upon Restart 99
Outputs 13, 112
P
Passcode Security 17
Performance Specifications 188
pH Display 100
Physical Specifications 186
Planning Your Configuration 50
Power Wiring 40
Preface xiii
Product Safety Specifications 187
Pulse Input Wiring 36
Signal Conditioning 111
Signal Wiring to Controller 30
Specifications
Functional 183
Operating and Storage Condition 187
Safety 187
Split Range Output 94, 97
Structure Diagrams 115, 237
Surge Suppressor 41, 42
Switch, see Logic Gates 81
T
Tag Display 62
Toggle 102
Totalizers 16, 89, 111
Tutorial Example 150
Types of Alarms 66
R
Range Conversion 166
4 to 20 mA to 1 to 5 V 166
Absolute Temperature Measurement 169
RTD Input Range 167
Temperature Difference Measurement 170
Rate of Change Alarm 65
Rate of Change Alarms 104
Ratio Control 93
READ Mode Operation 132
Reading Bargraph Values 118
Reading the Configuration 7, 8
Removing Termination Resistors 29, 30
RS-232/RS-485 Converter 42
RS-485 Serial Communications Interface 17
RTD and Contact Input Wiring 37
RTD Input Option 179
U
Unpacking 24
W
Wiring 43
Wiring to Controller 31
Wiring to Controllers 43
S
Seating the NOVRAM 2
Security 58, 112
Selected Variable Display 62
Serial Communications Terminal/Wire
Designations 39
Serial Communications Wiring 39
Set Point 91
Setpoint Limits 93
MI 018-885
February 1998
762CSA Controller – Index
289
ISSUE DATES
JAN 1995
MAY 1995
FEB 1996
FEB 1998
Vertical lines to right of text or illustrations indicate areas changed at last issue date.
MB 100
Printed in U.S.A.
0298